Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for Providing Haptic Feedback

ABSTRACT

An electronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, tactile output generator(s) for generating tactile outputs, and orientation sensor(s) for determining a current orientation of the electronic device displays a user interface on the display, where the user interface includes an indicator of current device orientation. The device detects movement of the device. In response to detecting the movement: in accordance with a determination that the current orientation of the device meets criteria: the device changes the user interface to indicate that the criteria are met by the current orientation of the device and generates a tactile output upon changing the user interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientation of the device; and in accordance with a determination that the current orientation of the device does not meet the criteria, the device changes the user interface without generating the tactile output.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 16/157,891, filedOct. 11, 2018, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.15/273,650, filed Sep. 22, 2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,156,903, which isa continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 15/272,380, filed Sep. 21,2016, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,996,157, which claims priority to U.S.Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/384,170, filed Sep. 6, 2016,entitled “Devices, Methods, and Graphical User Interfaces for ProvidingHaptic Feedback,” and priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No.62/349,115, filed Jun. 12, 2016, entitled “Devices, Methods, andGraphical User Interfaces for Providing Haptic Feedback,” all of whichare incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.

TECHNICAL FIELD

This relates generally to electronic devices with touch-sensitivesurfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices withtouch-sensitive surfaces that generate tactile outputs to provide hapticfeedback to a user.

BACKGROUND

The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers andother electronic computing devices has increased significantly in recentyears. Example touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads andtouch-screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate userinterfaces and objects therein on a display. Example user interfaceobjects include digital images, video, text, icons, and control elementssuch as buttons and other graphics.

Haptic feedback, typically in combination with visual and/or audiofeedback, is often used in an attempt to make manipulation of userinterfaces and user interface objects more efficient and intuitive for auser, thereby improving the operability of electronic devices. Butconventional methods of providing haptic feedback are not as helpful asthey could be.

SUMMARY

Accordingly, there is a need for electronic devices with improvedmethods and interfaces for providing haptic feedback. Such methods andinterfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods forproviding haptic feedback. Such methods and interfaces reduce thenumber, extent, and/or nature of the inputs from a user by helping theuser to understand the connection between provided inputs and deviceresponses to the inputs, thereby creating a more efficient human-machineinterface.

The above deficiencies and other problems associated with userinterfaces for electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces arereduced or eliminated by the disclosed devices. In some embodiments, thedevice is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device isportable (e.g., a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handhelddevice). In some embodiments, the device is a personal electronic device(e.g., a wearable electronic device, such as a watch). In someembodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the devicehas a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or“touch-screen display”). In some embodiments, the device has a graphicaluser interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory and one or moremodules, programs or sets of instructions stored in the memory forperforming multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interactswith the GUI primarily through stylus and/or finger contacts andgestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, thefunctions optionally include image editing, drawing, presenting, wordprocessing, spreadsheet making, game playing, telephoning, videoconferencing, e-mailing, instant messaging, workout support, digitalphotographing, digital videoing, web browsing, digital music playing,note taking, and/or digital video playing. Executable instructions forperforming these functions are, optionally, included in a non-transitorycomputer readable storage medium or other computer program productconfigured for execution by one or more processors.

There is a need for electronic devices with more methods and interfacesfor providing haptic feedback indicating crossing of a threshold fortriggering or canceling an operation. Such methods and interfaces maycomplement or replace conventional methods for indicating crossing of athreshold for triggering or canceling an operation. Such methods andinterfaces reduce the number, extent, and/or the nature of the inputsfrom a user and produce a more efficient human-machine interface.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying, on the display, a user interface thatincludes a first item; while displaying the user interface that includesthe first item, detecting a first portion of an input by a first contacton the touch-sensitive surface, where the detecting the first portion ofthe input by the first contact includes detecting the first contact at alocation on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the firstitem, and detecting a first movement of the first contact on thetouch-sensitive surface. The method further includes, in response todetecting the first portion of the input that includes the firstmovement of the first contact: in accordance with a determination thatthe first movement of the first contact meets first movement-thresholdcriteria that are a precondition for performing a first operation,generating a first tactile output, where the first tactile outputindicates that the first movement-threshold criteria for the firstoperation have been met; and in accordance with a determination that thefirst movement of the first contact does not meet the firstmovement-threshold criteria for the first operation, forgoing generationof the first tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces, a touch-sensitivesurface unit configured to detect contacts, one or more tactile outputgenerator units configured to generate tactile outputs, and a processingunit coupled with the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit,and the one or more tactile output generator units. In some embodiments,the processing unit includes a detecting unit, a performing unit, amoving unit, a revealing unit, and a replacing unit. The processing unitis configured to: enable display of, on the display unit, a userinterface that includes a first item; while displaying the userinterface that includes the first item, detect a first portion of aninput by a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, wheredetecting the first portion of the input by the first contact includesdetecting the first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit that corresponds to the first item, and detecting a first movementof the first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processingunit is further configured to: in response to detecting the firstportion of the input that includes the first movement of the firstcontact: in accordance with a determination that the first movement ofthe first contact meets first movement-threshold criteria that are aprecondition for performing a first operation, generate a first tactileoutput, where the first tactile output indicates that the firstmovement-threshold criteria for the first operation have been met; andin accordance with a determination that the first movement of the firstcontact does not meet the first movement-threshold criteria for thefirst operation, forgo generation of the first tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying, on the display, an item navigation userinterface that includes: a representation of a first portion of aplurality of items, where the plurality of items are arranged into twoor more groups that are represented by corresponding index values in aplurality of index values and the first portion of the plurality ofitems includes a first group of the items that corresponds to a firstindex value in the plurality of index values; and an index navigationelement that includes representations of three or more of the pluralityof index values. The method further includes: while displaying the itemnavigation user interface, detecting a first drag gesture on thetouch-sensitive surface that includes movement from a first locationcorresponding to the representation of the first index value thatrepresents a first group of the items to a second location correspondingto a representation of a second index value that represents a secondgroup of the items; and in response to detecting the first drag gesture:generating, via the one or more tactile output generators, a firsttactile output that corresponds to the movement to the second locationcorresponding to the second index value; and switching from displayingthe representation of the first portion of the plurality of items todisplaying a representation of a second portion of the plurality ofitems, where the second portion of the plurality of items include thesecond group of the items.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device an electronicdevice includes a display unit configured to display user interfaces; atouch-sensitive surface unit; one or more tactile output generator unitsconfigured to generate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled tothe display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or moretactile output generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a switching unit, a replacing unit, a movingunit, and a determining unit. The processing unit is configured to:enable display of, on the display unit, an item navigation userinterface that includes: a representation of a first portion of aplurality of items, where the plurality of items are arranged into twoor more groups that are represented by corresponding index values in aplurality of index values and the first portion of the plurality ofitems includes a first group of the items that corresponds to a firstindex value in the plurality of index values; an index navigationelement that includes representations of three or more of the pluralityof index values; while displaying the item navigation user interface,detect a first drag gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit thatincludes movement from a first location corresponding to therepresentation of the first index value that represents a first group ofthe items to a second location corresponding to a representation of asecond index value that represents a second group of the items; and inresponse to detecting the first drag gesture: generate, via the one ormore tactile output generator units, a first tactile output thatcorresponds to the movement to the second location corresponding to thesecond index value; and switch from displaying the representation of thefirst portion of the plurality of items to displaying a representationof a second portion of the plurality of items, where the second portionof the plurality of items include the second group of the items.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes an adjustable control; detecting a contact onthe touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to theadjustable control on the display, where movement of the contact thatcorresponds to movement away from the adjustable control changes anadjustment rate for adjusting the adjustable control based on movementof the contact; while continuously detecting the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface: detecting a first movement of the contactacross the touch-sensitive surface. The method further includes: inresponse to detecting the first movement of the contact: in accordancewith a determination that the first movement of the contact correspondsto more than a first threshold amount of movement of a focus selectoraway from the adjustable control, where the first threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from a first adjustment rate to a secondadjustment rate: generating a first tactile output, via the one or moretactile output devices, when the focus selector has reached the firstthreshold amount of movement; and adjusting the adjustable control atthe second adjustment rate in accordance with movement of the contactthat is detected after the focus selector has moved more than the firstthreshold amount; and in accordance with a determination that the firstmovement of the contact corresponds to less than the first thresholdamount of movement of the focus selector away from the adjustablecontrol, adjusting the adjustable control at the first adjustment ratein accordance with movement of the contact without generating the firsttactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled to the displayunit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactileoutput generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, an adjusting unit, a switching unit, adetermining unit, and a maintaining unit. The processing unit isconfigured to: enable display of (e.g., with the display unit) a userinterface on the display unit, where the user interface includes anadjustable control; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit) a contact onthe touch-sensitive surface unit at a location that corresponds to theadjustable control on the display unit, where movement of the contactthat corresponds to movement away from the adjustable control changes anadjustment rate for adjusting the adjustable control based on movementof the contact; while continuously detecting the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface unit: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit) afirst movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit;and in response to detecting the first movement of the contact: inaccordance with a determination that the first movement of the contactcorresponds to more than a first threshold amount of movement of a focusselector away from the adjustable control, where the first thresholdamount of movement triggers a transition from a first adjustment rate toa second adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s)) a first tactile output, via the one or more tactileoutput devices, when the focus selector has reached the first thresholdamount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit) theadjustable control at the second adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected after the focus selector hasmoved more than the first threshold amount; and in accordance with adetermination that the first movement of the contact corresponds to lessthan the first threshold amount of movement of the focus selector awayfrom the adjustable control, adjust the adjustable control at the firstadjustment rate in accordance with movement of the contact withoutgenerating the first tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a slider control that represents a continuousrange of values between a first value and a second value, the slidercontrol includes a first end that corresponds to the first value and asecond end that corresponds to the second value, the slider controlfurther includes a movable indicator that is configured to move alongthe slider control between the first end and the second end of theslider control, to indicate a current value selected from the continuousrange of values represented by the slider control. The method furtherincludes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at alocation that corresponds to the moveable indicator of the slidercontrol; detecting movement of the contact on the touch-sensitivesurface; and in response to detecting the movement of the contact,moving the moveable indicator along the slider control in accordancewith the movement of the contact; and generating a first tactile outputupon the moveable indicator reaching the first end of the slider controlin accordance with the movement of the contact, where a tactile outputpattern of the first tactile output is configured based on a movementspeed of the movable indicator when the moveable indicator reaches thefirst end of the slider control.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled to the displayunit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactileoutput generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a moving unit, and a changing unit. Theprocessing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface onthe display unit, where: the user interface includes a slider controlthat represents a continuous range of values between a first value and asecond value, the slider control includes a first end that correspondsto the first value and a second end that corresponds to the secondvalue, the slider control further includes a movable indicator that isconfigured to move along the slider control between the first end andthe second end of the slider control, to indicate a current valueselected from the continuous range of values represented by the slidercontrol; detect a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit at alocation that corresponds to the moveable indicator of the slidercontrol; detect movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit; and in response to detecting the movement of the contact, move themoveable indicator along the slider control in accordance with themovement of the contact; and generate a first tactile output upon themoveable indicator reaching the first end of the slider control inaccordance with the movement of the contact, where a tactile outputpattern of the first tactile output is configured based on a movementspeed of the movable indicator when the moveable indicator reaches thefirst end of the slider control.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a first user interface element; detecting acontact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds tothe first user interface element; detecting an input by the contact,including detecting a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitivesurface. The method further includes: in response to detecting the inputby the contact: changing a position of an outer edge of the userinterface element relative to a first threshold position in the userinterface in accordance with the movement of the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface; detecting that the change in the position ofthe outer edge of the user interface element relative to the firstthreshold position in the user interface has caused the outer edge ofthe user interface element to move across the first threshold positionin the user interface; after detecting that the outer edge of the userinterface element has moved across the first threshold position in theuser interface generating a tactile output; and moving the position ofthe outer edge of the user interface element to the first thresholdposition.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled to the displayunit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactileoutput generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a changing unit, a moving unit, a scrollingunit, an expanding unit, and a shrinking unit. The processing unit isconfigured to: enable display of a user interface on the display unit,where the user interface includes a first user interface element; detecta contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface unit thatcorresponds to the first user interface element; detect an input by thecontact, including detecting a movement of the contact across thetouch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting the input by thecontact: change a position of an outer edge of the user interfaceelement relative to a first threshold position in the user interface inaccordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitivesurface unit; detect that the change in the position of the outer edgeof the user interface element relative to the first threshold positionin the user interface has caused the outer edge of the user interfaceelement to move across the first threshold position in the userinterface; after detecting that the outer edge of the user interfaceelement has moved across the first threshold position in the userinterface, generate a tactile output; and move the position of the outeredge of the user interface element to the first threshold position.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a first object and a plurality of predeterminedobject snap positions; detecting a first portion of an input by acontact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds tothe first object in the user interface; in response to detecting thefirst portion of the input by the contact, and in accordance with adetermination that the first portion of the input meets selectioncriteria: visually indicating selection of the first object; andgenerating a first tactile output in conjunction with visuallyindicating selection of the first object. The method further includes:while the first object is selected, detecting a second portion of theinput by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, where detecting thesecond portion of the input includes detecting movement of the contactacross the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the secondportion of the input by the contact, moving the first object on the userinterface in accordance with the movement of the contact; afterdetecting the second portion of the input, while the first object isproximate to a first predetermined object snap position, detecting athird portion of the input by the contact on the touch sensitivesurface; and in response to detecting the third portion of the input bythe contact, and in accordance with a determination that the thirdportion of the input meets drop-off criteria: visually indicatingdeselection of the first object; moving the first object to the firstpredetermined object snap position; and generating a second tactileoutput.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled to the displayunit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactileoutput generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a moving unit, a shifting unit, and ascrolling unit. The processing unit is configured to: enable display ofa user interface on the display unit, where the user interface includesa first object and a plurality of predetermined object snap positions;detect a first portion of an input by a contact on the touch-sensitivesurface unit at a location that corresponds to the first object in theuser interface; in response to detecting the first portion of the inputby the contact, and in accordance with a determination that the firstportion of the input meets selection criteria: visually indicateselection of the first object; and generate a first tactile output inconjunction with visually indicating selection of the first object;while the first object is selected, detect a second portion of the inputby the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, where detecting thesecond portion of the input includes detecting movement of the contactacross the touch-sensitive surface unit; in response to detecting thesecond portion of the input by the contact, move the first object on theuser interface in accordance with the movement of the contact; afterdetecting the second portion of the input, while the first object isproximate to a first predetermined object snap position, detect a thirdportion of the input by the contact on the touch sensitive surface; andin response to detecting the third portion of the input by the contact,and in accordance with a determination that the third portion of theinput meets drop-off criteria: visually indicate deselection of thefirst object; move the first object to the first predetermined objectsnap position; and generate a second tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, one or moretactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and one ormore orientation sensors for determining a current orientation of theelectronic device. The method includes displaying a user interface onthe display, where the user interface includes an indicator of deviceorientation that indicates the current orientation of the electronicdevice; detecting movement of the electronic device; and, in response todetecting the movement of the electronic device: in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic devicemeets first criteria: changing the user interface to indicate that thefirst criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice; and generating a tactile output upon changing the user interfaceto indicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientationof the electronic device; and in accordance with a determination thatthe current orientation of the electronic device does not meet the firstcriteria, changing the user interface to indicate the currentorientation of the device without generating the tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; one or more orientation sensors configured todetermine a current orientation of the electronic device, and aprocessing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surfaceunit, the one or more tactile output generator units, and the one ormore orientation sensors. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a changing unit, and a determining unit. Theprocessing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface onthe display unit, where the user interface includes an indicator ofdevice orientation that indicates the current orientation of theelectronic device; detect movement of the electronic device; and, inresponse to detecting the movement of the electronic device: inaccordance with a determination that the current orientation of theelectronic device meets first criteria: change the user interface toindicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientation ofthe electronic device; and generate a tactile output upon changing theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; and in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic device doesnot meet the first criteria, change the user interface to indicate thecurrent orientation of the device without generating the tactile output.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at anelectronic device with a touch-sensitive surface, a display, and one ormore tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Themethod includes displaying a user interface on the display, wherein theuser interface includes a user interface object that includes a firstmoveable component that represents a first plurality of selectableoptions; detecting a first scroll input directed to the first moveablecomponent of the user interface object that includes movement of a firstcontact on the touch-sensitive surface and liftoff of the first contactfrom the touch-sensitive surface; in response to detecting the firstscroll input: moving the first moveable component through a subset ofthe first plurality of selectable options of the first moveablecomponent, including moving the first moveable component through a firstselectable option and a second selectable option of the first moveablecomponent after detecting the liftoff of the first contact from thetouch-sensitive surface, wherein the movement of the first moveablecomponent gradually slows down after the liftoff of the first contact isdetected; as the first moveable component moves through a firstselectable option with a first speed: generating a first tactile output;and generating a first audio output; and, as the first moveablecomponent moves through the second selectable option with a second speedthat is slower than the first speed: generating a second tactile outputthat is different in a first output property than the first tactileoutput and that is the same in a second output property as the firsttactile output; and generating a second audio output that is differentin the second output property than the first audio output.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay unit configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitivesurface unit; one or more tactile output generator units configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit coupled to the displayunit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the one or more tactileoutput generator units. In some embodiments, the processing unitincludes a detecting unit, a moving unit, and a determining unit. Theprocessing unit is configured to: enable display of a user interface onthe display unit, where the user interface includes a user interfaceobject that includes a first moveable component that represents a firstplurality of selectable options; detect a first scroll input directed tothe first moveable component of the user interface object that includesmovement of a first contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit andliftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface unit; inresponse to detecting the first scroll input: move the first moveablecomponent through a subset of the first plurality of selectable optionsof the first moveable component, including moving the first moveablecomponent through a first selectable option and a second selectableoption of the first moveable component after detecting the liftoff ofthe first contact from the touch-sensitive surface unit, where themovement of the first moveable component gradually slows down after theliftoff of the first contact is detected; as the first moveablecomponent moves through a first selectable option with a first speed:generate a first tactile output; and generate a first audio output; and,as the first moveable component moves through the second selectableoption with a second speed that is slower than the first speed: generatea second tactile output that is different in a first output propertythan the first tactile output and that is the same in a second outputproperty as the first tactile output; and generate a second audio outputthat is different in the second output property than the first audiooutput.

Thus, electronic devices with displays and touch-sensitive surfaces areprovided with more methods and interfaces for providing haptic feedback,thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfactionwith such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replaceconventional methods for providing haptic feedback.

In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes adisplay, a touch-sensitive surface, optionally one or more sensors todetect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface, one ormore processors, memory, and one or more programs; the one or moreprograms are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by theone or more processors and the one or more programs include instructionsfor performing or causing performance of the operations of any of themethods described herein. In accordance with some embodiments, acomputer readable storage medium has stored therein instructions whichwhen executed by an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitivesurface, and optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities ofcontacts with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to performor cause performance of the operations of any of the methods describedherein. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interfaceon an electronic device with a display, a touch-sensitive surface,optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts withthe touch-sensitive surface, a memory, and one or more processors toexecute one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or moreof the elements displayed in any of the methods described herein, whichare updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methodsdescribed herein. In accordance with some embodiments, an electronicdevice includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionallyone or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with thetouch-sensitive surface; and means for performing or causing performanceof the operations of any of the methods described herein. In accordancewith some embodiments, an information processing apparatus, for use inan electronic device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface, andoptionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts withthe touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing or causingperformance of the operations of any of the methods described herein.

Thus, electronic devices with displays, touch-sensitive surfaces,optionally one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts withthe touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators,optionally one or more device orientation sensors, and optionally anaudio system, are provided with improved methods and interfaces forproviding haptic feedback to a user, thereby increasing theeffectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction with such devices. Suchmethods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methodsfor providing haptic feedback to a user.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

For a better understanding of the various described embodiments,reference should be made to the Description of Embodiments below, inconjunction with the following drawings in which like reference numeralsrefer to corresponding parts throughout the figures.

FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction devicewith a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for eventhandling in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device having a touchscreen in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 2B-2C show exploded views of a force-sensitive input device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applicationson a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction devicewith a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 4C-4E illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 4F-4G illustrate a set of sample tactile output patterns inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 4H-4J illustrate example haptic audio output patterns versus timethat are used in conjunction with tactile outputs to simulate buttonclicks in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 4K illustrates example combinations of tactile output patterns andhaptic audio output patterns versus time in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 4L-4Q enlarge the combinations shown in FIG. 4K for clarity.

FIGS. 5A-5DK illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback indicating crossing of a threshold for triggering or cancelingan operation in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 6A-6Z illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with switching between subsets of indexedcontent during navigation of indexed content in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 7A-7Q illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback during variable rate scrubbing in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 8A-8N illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback for interaction with a slider control (e.g., a brightnessslider control) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 9A-9V illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback for interaction with a slider control (e.g., a sleep timerslider control) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 10A-10I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback for interaction with a slider control (e.g., a photo selectorslider control) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 11A-11L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with visual rubber band effect (e.g., in a listuser interface) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 12A-120 illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with visual rubber band effect (e.g., in a photoeditor user interface) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 13A-13L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with visual rubber band effect (e.g., in a webbrowser user interface) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 14A-14T illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback to indicate selection, picking up, dragging, dropping, and/orsnapping of objects in a user interface (e.g., a calendar userinterface), in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 15A-15L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback to indicate selection, picking up, dragging, dropping, andsnapping of objects in a user interface (e.g., a weather forecast userinterface), in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 16A-16K illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback to indicate selection, picking up, dragging, dropping, andsnapping of objects in a user interface (e.g., a home screen userinterface), in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 17A-17H illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback on satisfaction of device orientation criteria (e.g., device isaligned with particular directions relative to magnetic North) inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 18A-18E illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback on satisfaction of device orientation criteria (e.g., device islevel and stable) in accordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 19A-19T illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback for selection of a respective value in a value picker inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 20A-20G are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback indicating crossing of a threshold for triggering or cancelingan operation in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 21 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 22A-22E are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with switching between subsets of indexedcontent during navigation of indexed content in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 23 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 24A-24G are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback during variable rate scrubbing in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 25 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 26A-26E are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback for interaction with a slider control in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 27 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 28A-28E are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback in conjunction with visual rubber band effect in accordancewith some embodiments.

FIG. 29 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 30A-30G are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback to indicate selection, picking up, dragging, dropping, and/orsnapping of objects in a user interface in accordance with someembodiments.

FIG. 31 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 32A-32C are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback on satisfaction of device orientation criteria in accordancewith some embodiments.

FIG. 33 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 34A-34D are flow diagrams of a process for providing hapticfeedback for selection of a respective value in a value picker inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 35 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device inaccordance with some embodiments.

DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS

Many electronic devices provide feedback as input is detected at agraphical user interface to provide an indication of the effects theinput has on device operations. Methods described herein provide hapticfeedback, often in conjunction with visual and/or audio feedback, tohelp a user understand the effects of detected inputs on deviceoperations and to provide information to a user about the state of adevice.

The methods, devices, and GUIs described herein use haptic feedback toimprove user interface interactions in multiple ways. For example, theymake it easier to: indicate hidden thresholds; perform scrubbing, suchas index bar scrubbing and variable rate scrubbing; enhance rubber bandeffects; drag and drop objects; indicate device orientation; and scrollmovable user interface components that represent selectable options.

Example Devices

Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of whichare illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detaileddescription, numerous specific details are set forth in order to providea thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However,it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the variousdescribed embodiments may be practiced without these specific details.In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components,circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not tounnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc.are, in some instances, used herein to describe various elements, theseelements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only usedto distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contactcould be termed a second contact, and, similarly, a second contact couldbe termed a first contact, without departing from the scope of thevarious described embodiments. The first contact and the second contactare both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the contextclearly indicates otherwise.

The terminology used in the description of the various describedembodiments herein is for the purpose of describing particularembodiments only and is not intended to be limiting. As used in thedescription of the various described embodiments and the appendedclaims, the singular forms “a,” “an,” and “the” are intended to includethe plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicatesotherwise. It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as usedherein refers to and encompasses any and all possible combinations ofone or more of the associated listed items. It will be furtherunderstood that the terms “includes,” “including,” “comprises,” and/or“comprising,” when used in this specification, specify the presence ofstated features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/orcomponents, but do not preclude the presence or addition of one or moreother features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components,and/or groups thereof.

As used herein, the term “if” is, optionally, construed to mean “when”or “upon” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting,”depending on the context. Similarly, the phrase “if it is determined” or“if [a stated condition or event] is detected” is, optionally, construedto mean “upon determining” or “in response to determining” or “upondetecting [the stated condition or event]” or “in response to detecting[the stated condition or event],” depending on the context.

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, andassociated processes for using such devices are described. In someembodiments, the device is a portable communications device, such as amobile telephone, that also contains other functions, such as PDA and/ormusic player functions. Example embodiments of portable multifunctiondevices include, without limitation, the iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad®devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. Other portable electronicdevices, such as laptops or tablet computers with touch-sensitivesurfaces (e.g., touch-screen displays and/or touchpads), are,optionally, used. It should also be understood that, in someembodiments, the device is not a portable communications device, but isa desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-screendisplay and/or a touchpad).

In the discussion that follows, an electronic device that includes adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface is described. It should beunderstood, however, that the electronic device optionally includes oneor more other physical user-interface devices, such as a physicalkeyboard, a mouse and/or a joystick.

The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one ormore of the following: a note taking application, a drawing application,a presentation application, a word processing application, a websitecreation application, a disk authoring application, a spreadsheetapplication, a gaming application, a telephone application, a videoconferencing application, an e-mail application, an instant messagingapplication, a workout support application, a photo managementapplication, a digital camera application, a digital video cameraapplication, a web browsing application, a digital music playerapplication, and/or a digital video player application.

The various applications that are executed on the device optionally useat least one common physical user-interface device, such as thetouch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitivesurface as well as corresponding information displayed on the deviceare, optionally, adjusted and/or varied from one application to the nextand/or within a respective application. In this way, a common physicalarchitecture (such as the touch-sensitive surface) of the deviceoptionally supports the variety of applications with user interfacesthat are intuitive and transparent to the user.

Attention is now directed toward embodiments of portable devices withtouch-sensitive displays. FIG. 1A is a block diagram illustratingportable multifunction device 100 with touch-sensitive display system112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system112 is sometimes called a “touch screen” for convenience, and issometimes simply called a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includesmemory 102 (which optionally includes one or more computer readablestorage mediums), memory controller 122, one or more processing units(CPUs) 120, peripherals interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry110, speaker 111, microphone 113, input/output (I/O) subsystem 106,other input or control devices 116, and external port 124. Device 100optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detectingintensities of contacts on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surfacesuch as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generatingtactile outputs on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile outputs on atouch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 ofdevice 100 or touchpad 355 of device 300). These components optionallycommunicate over one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.

As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output”refers to physical displacement of a device relative to a previousposition of the device, physical displacement of a component (e.g., atouch-sensitive surface) of a device relative to another component(e.g., housing) of the device, or displacement of the component relativeto a center of mass of the device that will be detected by a user withthe user's sense of touch. For example, in situations where the deviceor the component of the device is in contact with a surface of a userthat is sensitive to touch (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of auser's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacementwill be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding toa perceived change in physical characteristics of the device or thecomponent of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitivesurface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is, optionally,interpreted by the user as a “down click” or “up click” of a physicalactuator button. In some cases, a user will feel a tactile sensationsuch as an “down click” or “up click” even when there is no movement ofa physical actuator button associated with the touch-sensitive surfacethat is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movements. Asanother example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is, optionally,interpreted or sensed by the user as “roughness” of the touch-sensitivesurface, even when there is no change in smoothness of thetouch-sensitive surface. While such interpretations of touch by a userwill be subject to the individualized sensory perceptions of the user,there are many sensory perceptions of touch that are common to a largemajority of users. Thus, when a tactile output is described ascorresponding to a particular sensory perception of a user (e.g., an “upclick,” a “down click,” “roughness”), unless otherwise stated, thegenerated tactile output corresponds to physical displacement of thedevice or a component thereof that will generate the described sensoryperception for a typical (or average) user. Using tactile outputs toprovide haptic feedback to a user enhances the operability of the deviceand makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a tactile output pattern specifies characteristicsof a tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, theshape of a movement waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of thetactile output, and/or the duration of the tactile output.

When tactile outputs with different tactile output patterns aregenerated by a device (e.g., via one or more tactile output generatorsthat move a moveable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactileoutputs may invoke different haptic sensations in a user holding ortouching the device. While the sensation of the user is based on theuser's perception of the tactile output, most users will be able toidentify changes in waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactileoutputs generated by the device. Thus, the waveform, frequency andamplitude can be adjusted to indicate to the user that differentoperations have been performed. As such, tactile outputs with tactileoutput patterns that are designed, selected, and/or engineered tosimulate characteristics (e.g., size, material, weight, stiffness,smoothness, etc.); behaviors (e.g., oscillation, displacement,acceleration, rotation, expansion, etc.); and/or interactions (e.g.,collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) of objectsin a given environment (e.g., a user interface that includes graphicalfeatures and objects, a simulated physical environment with virtualboundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment withphysical boundaries and physical objects, and/or a combination of any ofthe above) will, in some circumstances, provide helpful feedback tousers that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of theuser's operation of the device. Additionally, tactile outputs are,optionally, generated to correspond to feedback that is unrelated to asimulated physical characteristic, such as an input threshold or aselection of an object. Such tactile outputs will, in somecircumstances, provide helpful feedback to users that reduces inputerrors and increases the efficiency of the user's operation of thedevice.

In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile outputpattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in auser interface or behind the scenes in a device. Examples of the eventsof interest include activation of an affordance (e.g., a real or virtualbutton, or toggle switch) provided on the device or in a user interface,success or failure of a requested operation, reaching or crossing aboundary in a user interface, entry into a new state, switching of inputfocus between objects, activation of a new mode, reaching or crossing aninput threshold, detection or recognition of a type of input or gesture,etc. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as awarning or an alert for an impending event or outcome that would occurunless a redirection or interruption input is timely detected. Tactileoutputs are also used in other contexts to enrich the user experience,improve the accessibility of the device to users with visual or motordifficulties or other accessibility needs, and/or improve efficiency andfunctionality of the user interface and/or the device. Tactile outputsare optionally accompanied with audio outputs and/or visible userinterface changes, which further enhance a user's experience when theuser interacts with a user interface and/or the device, and facilitatebetter conveyance of information regarding the state of the userinterface and/or the device, and which reduce input errors and increasethe efficiency of the user's operation of the device.

FIG. 4F provides a set of sample tactile output patterns that may beused, either individually or in combination, either as is or through oneor more transformations (e.g., modulation, amplification, truncation,etc.), to create suitable haptic feedback in various scenarios and forvarious purposes, such as those mentioned above and those described withrespect to the user interfaces and methods discussed herein. Thisexample of a palette of tactile outputs shows how a set of threewaveforms and eight frequencies can be used to produce an array oftactile output patterns. In addition to the tactile output patternsshown in this figure, each of these tactile output patterns isoptionally adjusted in amplitude by changing a gain value for thetactile output pattern, as shown, for example for FullTap 80 Hz, FullTap200 Hz, MiniTap 80 Hz, MiniTap 200 Hz, MicroTap 80 Hz, and MicroTap 200Hz in FIG. 4G, which are each shown with variants having a gain of 1.0,0.75, 0.5, and 0.25. As shown in FIG. 4G, changing the gain of a tactileoutput pattern changes the amplitude of the pattern without changing thefrequency of the pattern or changing the shape of the waveform. In someembodiments, changing the frequency of a tactile output pattern alsoresults in a lower amplitude as some tactile output generators arelimited by how much force can be applied to the moveable mass and thushigher frequency movements of the mass are constrained to loweramplitudes to ensure that the acceleration needed to create the waveformdoes not require force outside of an operational force range of thetactile output generator (e.g., the peak amplitudes of the FullTap at230 Hz, 270 Hz, and 300 Hz are lower than the amplitudes of the FullTapat 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 125 Hz, and 200 Hz).

In FIG. 4F1, each column shows tactile output patterns that have aparticular waveform. The waveform of a tactile output pattern representsthe pattern of physical displacements relative to a neutral position(e.g., x_(zero)) versus time that a moveable mass goes through togenerate a tactile output with that tactile output pattern. For example,a first set of tactile output patterns shown in the left column in FIG.4F1 (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “FullTap”) each have a waveformthat includes an oscillation with two complete cycles (e.g., anoscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position and crosses theneutral position three times). A second set of tactile output patternsshown in the middle column in FIG. 4F1 (e.g., tactile output patterns ofa “MiniTap”) each have a waveform that includes an oscillation thatincludes one complete cycle (e.g., an oscillation that starts and endsin a neutral position and crosses the neutral position one time). Athird set of tactile output patterns shown in the right column in FIG.4F1 (e.g., tactile output patterns of a “MicroTap”) each have a waveformthat includes an oscillation that include one half of a complete cycle(e.g., an oscillation that starts and ends in a neutral position anddoes not cross the neutral position). The waveform of a tactile outputpattern also includes a start buffer and an end buffer that representthe gradual speeding up and slowing down of the moveable mass at thestart and at the end of the tactile output. The example waveforms shownin FIGS. 4F1-4F4 and 4G1-4G4 include x_(min) and x_(max) values whichrepresent the maximum and minimum extent of movement of the moveablemass. For larger electronic devices with larger moveable masses, theremay be larger or smaller minimum and maximum extents of movement of themass. The example shown in FIGS. 4F1-4F4 and 4G1-4G4 describes movementof a mass in 1 dimension, however similar principles would also apply tomovement of a moveable mass in two or three dimensions.

As shown in FIG. 4F1, each tactile output pattern also has acorresponding characteristic frequency that affects the “pitch” of ahaptic sensation that is felt by a user from a tactile output with thatcharacteristic frequency. For a continuous tactile output, thecharacteristic frequency represents the number of cycles that arecompleted within a given period of time (e.g., cycles per second) by themoveable mass of the tactile output generator. For a discrete tactileoutput, a discrete output signal (e.g., with 0.5, 1, or 2 cycles) isgenerated, and the characteristic frequency value specifies how fast themoveable mass needs to move to generate a tactile output with thatcharacteristic frequency. As shown in FIG. 4F1, for each type of tactileoutput (e.g., as defined by a respective waveform, such as FullTap,MiniTap, or MicroTap), a higher frequency value corresponds to fastermovement(s) by the moveable mass, and hence, in general, a shorter timeto complete the tactile output (e.g., including the time to complete therequired number of cycle(s) for the discrete tactile output, plus astart and an end buffer time). For example, a FullTap with acharacteristic frequency of 80 Hz takes longer to complete than FullTapwith a characteristic frequency of 100 Hz (e.g., 35.4 ms vs. 28.3 ms inFIG. 4F1). In addition, for a given frequency, a tactile output withmore cycles in its waveform at a respective frequency takes longer tocomplete than a tactile output with fewer cycles its waveform at thesame respective frequency. For example, a FullTap at 150 Hz takes longerto complete than a MiniTap at 150 Hz (e.g., 19.4 ms vs. 12.8 ms), and aMiniTap at 150 Hz takes longer to complete than a MicroTap at 150 Hz(e.g., 12.8 ms vs. 9.4 ms). However, for tactile output patterns withdifferent frequencies this rule may not apply (e.g., tactile outputswith more cycles but a higher frequency may take a shorter amount oftime to complete than tactile outputs with fewer cycles but a lowerfrequency, and vice versa). For example, at 300 Hz, a FullTap takes aslong as a MiniTap (e.g., 9.9 ms).

As shown in FIG. 4F1, a tactile output pattern also has a characteristicamplitude that affects the amount of energy that is contained in atactile signal, or a “strength” of a haptic sensation that may be feltby a user through a tactile output with that characteristic amplitude.In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile outputpattern refers to an absolute or normalized value that represents themaximum displacement of the moveable mass from a neutral position whengenerating the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristicamplitude of a tactile output pattern is adjustable, e.g., by a fixed ordynamically determined gain factor (e.g., a value between 0 and 1), inaccordance with various conditions (e.g., customized based on userinterface contexts and behaviors) and/or preconfigured metrics (e.g.,input-based metrics, and/or user-interface-based metrics). In someembodiments, an input-based metric (e.g., an intensity-change metric oran input-speed metric) measures a characteristic of an input (e.g., arate of change of a characteristic intensity of a contact in a pressinput or a rate of movement of the contact across a touch-sensitivesurface) during the input that triggers generation of a tactile output.In some embodiments, a user-interface-based metric (e.g., aspeed-across-boundary metric) measures a characteristic of a userinterface element (e.g., a speed of movement of the element across ahidden or visible boundary in a user interface) during the userinterface change that triggers generation of the tactile output. In someembodiments, the characteristic amplitude of a tactile output patternmay be modulated by an “envelope” and the peaks of adjacent cycles mayhave different amplitudes, where one of the waveforms shown above isfurther modified by multiplication by an envelope parameter that changesover time (e.g., from 0 to 1) to gradually adjust amplitude of portionsof the tactile output over time as the tactile output is beinggenerated.

Although specific frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms are representedin the sample tactile output patterns in FIG. 4F1 for illustrativepurposes, tactile output patterns with other frequencies, amplitudes,and waveforms may be used for similar purposes. For example, waveformsthat have between 0.5 to 4 cycles can be used. Other frequencies in therange of 60 Hz-400 Hz may be used as well. Table 1 provides examples ofparticular haptic feedback behaviors, configurations, and examples oftheir use.

TABLE 1 Behavior Feedback Configuration Configuration Examples UserInterface Haptics Retarget MicroTap Drag calendar event across dayDefault High (270 Hz) boundary Gain: 0.4 Retarget in force press quickMinimum action menu Interval: 0.05 Sliding over origin point in ascrubber Reaching 0 degrees when cropping/straightening Rearranging alist when items snap together Swiping across multiple keyboards in akeyboard selection menu (e.g., a vertical menu) after a long press on akeyboard selection icon; or Swiping across multiple alternate charactersin an accent keyboard (e.g., a horizontal menu) after a long press on acharacter key Retarget MicroTap Retarget in A-Z scrubber Strong High(270 Hz) Gain: 0.5 Minimum Interval: 0.05 Retarget MicroTap Spinning awheel in the wheels of Picker High (270 Hz) time user interface Gain:0.4 Minimum Interval: 0.05 Impact Default MicroTap Changing scrubbingspeed when Medium adjusting a slider (150 Hz) Creating a new calendarevent by Gain max: 0.8 tapping and holding Gain min: 0.0 Activating atoggle switch (changing the switch from on to off or off to on) Reachinga predefined orientation on a compass (e.g., every 45 degrees fromNorth) Reaching a level state (e.g., 0 degrees tilt in any axis for 0.5seconds) Dropping a pin in a map Sending or receiving a message with anemphasis animation (e.g., “slam” effect) Sending or receiving anacknowledgment of a message Snapping a ruler to different orientations(e.g., every 45 degrees) Crossing over a suggested photo while scrubbingthrough a burst of photos Crossing over a detent in a scrubber (e.g.,text size, haptic strength, display brightness, display colortemperature) Transaction failure notification (ApplePay Failure) ImpactLight MicroTap Picking up an existing item (e.g., Medium a calendarevent, a favorite in (150 Hz) web browser) Gain max: 0.6 Moving a timeselector over a Gain min: 0.0 minor division of time (e.g., 15 min) insleep alarm Impact Strong MicroTap Moving a time selector over a majorMedium division of time (e.g., 1 hour) in (150 Hz) sleep alarm Gain max:1.0 Gain min: 0.0 Edge Scrubber MicroTap Dragging a brightness scrubberto Medium an edge of the scrubber (150 Hz) Dragging a volume scrubber toan Gain max: 0.6 edge of the scrubber Gain min: 0.3 Edge Zoom MicroTapReaching maximum zoom level High (270 Hz) when zooming into a photoGain: 0.6 Re-centering a map Drag Default MicroTap Pickup and drop anevent in High (270 Hz) calendar Gain Pickup: 1.0 Gain Drop: 0.6 DragSnapping MicroTap Rearrange lists in weather, High (270 Hz) contacts,music, etc. Gain Pickup: 1.0 Gain Drop: 0.6 Gain Snap: 1.0 States SwipeSwipe in: Swipe to delete a mail message or Action MiniTap Highconversation (270 Hz) Swipe to mark a mail message as Gain: 1.0read/unread in mail Swipe out: MicroTap Swipe to delete a table row(e.g., High (270 Hz) a document in a document Gain: 0.55creation/viewing application, a note in a notes application, a locationin a weather application, a podcast in a podcast application, a song ina playlist in a music application, a voice memo in a voice recordingapplication Swipe to delete a message while displaying apressure-triggered preview Swipe to mark a message as read/unread whiledisplaying a pressure-triggered preview Swipe to delete a news articleSwipe to favorite/love a news article Button Default MicroTap Reply tomessage/conversation High (270 Hz) Adding a bookmark in an Gain: 0.9electronic book reader application Activating a virtual assistantStarting to record a voice memo Stopping recording a voice memo ButtonMiniTap Low Delete message/conversation Destructive (100 Hz) FeedbackIntensity: 0.8 Event Success FullTap Confirmation that a payment hasMedium been made (200 Hz) Alert that authentication is needed Gain: 0.7to make a payment (e.g., biometric MiniTap High authentication orpasscode (270 Hz) authentication) Gain: 1.0 Adding a payment account toan electronic wallet application Pairing success for Bluetooth pairingEvent Error MiniTap High Failure to process a payment (270 Hz)transaction Gain: 0.85 Failure to authenticate a Gain: 0.75 fingerprintdetected on a FullTap fingerprint sensor Medium Incorrectpasscode/password (200 Hz) entered in a passcode/password Gain: 0.65entry UI FullTap Low (150 Hz) Gain: 0.75 Event FullTap High Shake toundo Warning (300 Hz) Gain: 0.9 FullTap Custom (270 Hz) Gain: 0.9 ForcePress States Preview MicroTap Peek/Preview (e.g., peek at a mail Custommessage) (200 Hz) Gain: 1.0 States Preview FullTap Pop/Commit (e.g., popinto full Custom mail message) (150 Hz) Gain: 1.0 States PreviewMicroTap Unavailable (e.g., press hard on an Custom app icon thatdoesn't have any (200 Hz) associated quick actions) Gain: 1.0 SystemHaptics Device MicroTap Press power button once to lock Locked Mediumdevice (150 Hz) Gain: 1.0 MiniTap Medium (150 Hz) Gain: 1.0 Vibe on Vibeat 150 Hz Attach device to power source Attach that gradually increasesor decreases in amplitude over time Ringtones & Custom tactile Receivephone call or text Alerts output using message one or more of: Vibe 150Hz MicroTap 150 Hz MiniTap 150 Hz FullTap 150 Hz Alert before 3x FullTapMute the device Mute (150 Hz) Solid-State Home Button 1 (“Tick”) MiniTapPress home button with click 230 Hz option 1 selected Gain: 1.0 2(“Tak”) MiniTap Press home button with click 270 Hz option 2 selectedGain: 1.0 3 (“Tock”) MiniTap Press home button with click 300 Hz option3 selected Gain: 1.0 Special Effects Full screen Custom wide Full screenmessages moments moments band tactile (e.g., fireworks, lightening,outputs etc.) in Messages Digital Touch Custom tactile Taps andheartbeats in Messages outputs

The examples shown above in Table 1 are intended to illustrate a rangeof circumstances in which tactile outputs can be generated for differentinputs and events. Table 1 should not be taken as a requirement that adevice respond to each of the listed inputs or events with the indicatedtactile output. Rather, Table 1 is intended to illustrate how tactileoutputs vary and/or are similar for different inputs and/or events(e.g., based on the tactile output pattern, frequency, gain, etc.). Forexample, Table 1 shows how an “event success” tactile output varies froman “event failure” tactile output and how a retarget tactile outputdiffers from an impact tactile output.

FIGS. 4H-4J illustrate example haptic audio output patterns versus timethat are used in conjunction with tactile outputs to simulate buttonclicks in accordance with some embodiments.

FIG. 4K illustrates example combinations of tactile output patterns andhaptic audio output patterns versus time in accordance with someembodiments. FIGS. 4L-4Q enlarge the combinations shown in FIG. 4K forclarity.

In FIG. 4H, the top haptic audio pattern “Click A1 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz)to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown inFIG. 4K (first row in the First Click column) and the upper portion ofFIG. 4L, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a controlactivation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., thecontact is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “ClickA1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same “Click A1 audio” and“Click A” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz) are played to simulate the firstup-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain ofthe “Click A1 audio” and/or “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz) arereduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to the precedingdown-click.

The top haptic audio pattern “Click A1 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) to simulate a firstdown-click in a “soft” first click, as shown in FIG. 4K (second row inthe First Click column) and the lower portion of FIG. 4L, where the rateof change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold isbelow a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft”and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the“Click A1 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) are reduced (e.g.,by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. Inthis example, “Click A1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A”Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same“Click A1 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) are played tosimulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click A1 audio” and/or “Click A” Soft MiniTap(230 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to thepreceding down-click.

In FIG. 4H, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click A2 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz)to simulate a second down-click in a “normal” second click that followsthe first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g., as thesecond click in a double click input), as shown in FIG. 4K (first row inthe Second Click column) and the upper portion of FIG. 4M, where therate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activationthreshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact in thesecond click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example,“Click A2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” NormalMiniTap (230 Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same “ClickA2 audio” and “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz) are played to simulatethe second up-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases,the gain of the “Click A2 audio” and/or “Click A” Normal MiniTap (230Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to thepreceding second down-click.

The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click A2 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) to simulate a seconddown-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click withina predetermined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a doubleclick input), as shown in FIG. 4K (second row in the Second Clickcolumn) and the lower portion of FIG. 4M, where the rate of change ofintensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below athreshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/orslow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click A2audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) inthe “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. In thisexample, “Click A2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click A” SoftMiniTap (230 Hz) tactile output by 2 ms. In some cases, the same “ClickA2 audio” and “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) are played to simulate thesecond up-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases, thegain of the “Click A2 audio” and/or “Click A” Soft MiniTap (230 Hz) arereduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the precedingsecond down-click.

In FIG. 4I, the top haptic audio pattern “Click B1 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270 Hz)to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown inFIG. 4K (third row in the First Click column) and the upper portion ofFIG. 4N, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a controlactivation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., thecontact is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “ClickB1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same “Click B1 audio”and “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270 Hz) are played to simulate the firstup-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain ofthe “Click B1 audio” and/or “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270 Hz) arereduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to the precedingdown-click.

The top haptic audio pattern “Click B1 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) to simulate a firstdown-click in a “soft” first click, as shown in FIG. 4K (fourth row inthe First Click column) and the lower portion of FIG. 4N, where the rateof change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold isbelow a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft”and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the“Click B1 audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) are reduced (e.g.,by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. Inthis example, “Click B1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B”Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same“Click B1 audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) are played tosimulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click B1 audio” and/or “Click B” Soft MiniTap(230 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to thepreceding down-click.

In FIG. 4I, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click B2 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click B” Normal MiniTap (270 Hz)to simulate a second down-click in a “normal” second click that followsthe first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g., as thesecond click in a double click input), as shown in FIG. 4K (third row inthe Second Click column) and the upper portion of FIG. 4O, where therate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activationthreshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact in thesecond click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example,“Click B2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B” NormalMiniTap (270 Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same“Click B2 audio” and “Click B” Normal MiniTap (230 Hz) are played tosimulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click B2 audio” and/or “Click B” Normal MiniTap(270 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative tothe preceding second down-click.

The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click B2 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) to simulate a seconddown-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click withina predetermined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a doubleclick input), as shown in FIG. 4K (fourth row in the Second Clickcolumn) and the lower portion of FIG. 4O, where the rate of change ofintensity of a contact at a control activation threshold is below athreshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/orslow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click B2audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) inthe “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. In thisexample, “Click B2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click B” SoftMiniTap (270 Hz) tactile output by 2.8 ms. In some cases, the same“Click B2 audio” and “Click B” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) are played tosimulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click B2 audio” and/or “Click B” Soft MiniTap(270 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative tothe preceding second down-click.

In FIG. 4J, the top haptic audio pattern “Click C1 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300 Hz)to simulate a first down-click in a “normal” first click, as shown inFIG. 4K (fifth row in the First Click column) and the upper portion ofFIG. 4P, where the rate of change of intensity of a contact at a controlactivation threshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., thecontact is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example, “ClickC1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same “Click C1 audio”and “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300 Hz) are played to simulate the firstup-click that follows the first down-click. In some cases, the gain ofthe “Click C1 audio” and/or “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300 Hz) arereduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to the precedingdown-click.

The top haptic audio pattern “Click C1 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) to simulate a firstdown-click in a “soft” first click, as shown in FIG. 4K (sixth row inthe First Click column) and the lower portion of FIG. 4P, where the rateof change of intensity of a contact at a control activation threshold isbelow a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft”and/or slow press). To simulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the“Click C1 audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) are reduced (e.g.,by 50%) in the “soft” down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. Inthis example, “Click C1 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C”Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same“Click C1 audio” and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (270 Hz) are played tosimulate the first up-click that follows the first down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click C1 audio” and/or “Click C” Soft MiniTap(300 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the up-click relative to thepreceding down-click.

In FIG. 4J, the bottom haptic audio pattern “Click C2 audio” is audiooutput that is played conjunction with “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300 Hz)to simulate a second down-click in a “normal” second click that followsthe first click within a predetermined period of time (e.g., as thesecond click in a double click input), as shown in FIG. 4K (fifth row inthe Second Click column) and the upper portion of FIG. 4Q, where therate of change of intensity of a contact at a control activationthreshold is above a threshold rate of change (e.g., the contact in thesecond click is making a “normal” hard/fast press). In this example,“Click C2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” NormalMiniTap (300 Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same“Click C2 audio” and “Click C” Normal MiniTap (300 Hz) are played tosimulate the second up-click that follows the second down-click. In somecases, the gain of the “Click C2 audio” and/or “Click C” Normal MiniTap(300 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative tothe preceding second down-click.

The bottom haptic audio pattern “Click C2 audio” is also played inconjunction with “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) to simulate a seconddown-click in a “soft” second click that follows the first click withina predetermined period of time (e.g., as the second click in a doubleclick input), as shown in FIG. 4K (sixth row in the Second Click column)and the lower portion of FIG. 4Q, where the rate of change of intensityof a contact at a control activation threshold is below a threshold rateof change (e.g., the contact is making a “soft” and/or slow press). Tosimulate a “soft” down-click, the gain of the “Click C2 audio” and“Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) are reduced (e.g., by 50%) in the “soft”down-click relative to the “normal” down-click. In this example, “ClickC2 audio” is offset from the start of the “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300Hz) tactile output by 1.9 ms. In some cases, the same “Click C2 audio”and “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) are played to simulate the secondup-click that follows the second down-click. In some cases, the gain ofthe “Click C2 audio” and/or “Click C” Soft MiniTap (300 Hz) are reduced(e.g., by 50%) in the second up-click relative to the preceding seconddown-click.

It should be appreciated that device 100 is only one example of aportable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has moreor fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or morecomponents, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangementof the components. The various components shown in FIG. 1A areimplemented in hardware, software, firmware, or a combination thereof,including one or more signal processing and/or application specificintegrated circuits.

Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory andoptionally also includes non-volatile memory, such as one or moremagnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or othernon-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by othercomponents of device 100, such as CPU(s) 120 and the peripheralsinterface 118, is, optionally, controlled by memory controller 122.

Peripherals interface 118 can be used to couple input and outputperipherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102. The one or moreprocessors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets ofinstructions stored in memory 102 to perform various functions fordevice 100 and to process data.

In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU(s) 120, and memorycontroller 122 are, optionally, implemented on a single chip, such aschip 104. In some other embodiments, they are, optionally, implementedon separate chips.

RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and sends RF signals, alsocalled electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electricalsignals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates withcommunications networks and other communications devices via theelectromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-knowncircuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited toan antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner,one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, asubscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and so forth. RFcircuitry 108 optionally communicates with networks, such as theInternet, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), an intranetand/or a wireless network, such as a cellular telephone network, awireless local area network (LAN) and/or a metropolitan area network(MAN), and other devices by wireless communication. The wirelesscommunication optionally uses any of a plurality of communicationsstandards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited toGlobal System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSMEnvironment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA),high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data-Only (EV-DO),HSPA, HSPA+, Dual-Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), long term evolution (LTE), nearfield communication (NFC), wideband code division multiple access(W-CDMA), code division multiple access (CDMA), time division multipleaccess (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a,IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE802.11n), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, a protocol fore-mail (e.g., Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post officeprotocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., extensible messaging andpresence protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for InstantMessaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messagingand Presence Service (IMPS)), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or anyother suitable communication protocol, including communication protocolsnot yet developed as of the filing date of this document.

Audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audiointerface between a user and device 100. Audio circuitry 110 receivesaudio data from peripherals interface 118, converts the audio data to anelectrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to speaker 111.Speaker 111 converts the electrical signal to human-audible sound waves.Audio circuitry 110 also receives electrical signals converted bymicrophone 113 from sound waves. Audio circuitry 110 converts theelectrical signal to audio data and transmits the audio data toperipherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is, optionally,retrieved from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108by peripherals interface 118. In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212, FIG. 2A). The headset jackprovides an interface between audio circuitry 110 and removable audioinput/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones or a headsetwith both output (e.g., a headphone for one or both ears) and input(e.g., a microphone).

I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100, suchas touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices116, with peripherals interface 118. I/O subsystem 106 optionallyincludes display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158,intensity sensor controller 159, haptic feedback controller 161, and oneor more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. Theone or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signalsfrom/to other input or control devices 116. The other input or controldevices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons,rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels,and so forth. In some alternate embodiments, input controller(s) 160are, optionally, coupled with any (or none) of the following: akeyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or a pointer device suchas a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208, FIG. 2A) optionallyinclude an up/down button for volume control of speaker 111 and/ormicrophone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button(e.g., 206, FIG. 2A).

Touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and anoutput interface between the device and a user. Display controller 156receives and/or sends electrical signals from/to touch-sensitive displaysystem 112. Touch-sensitive display system 112 displays visual output tothe user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons,video, and any combination thereof (collectively termed “graphics”). Insome embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to userinterface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to auser-interactive graphical user interface object (e.g., a graphical userinterface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed towardthe graphical user interface object). Examples of user-interactivegraphical user interface objects include, without limitation, a button,slider, icon, selectable menu item, switch, hyperlink, or other userinterface control.

Touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensoror set of sensors that accepts input from the user based on hapticand/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and displaycontroller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets ofinstructions in memory 102) detect contact (and any movement or breakingof the contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 and converts thedetected contact into interaction with user-interface objects (e.g., oneor more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) that are displayed ontouch-sensitive display system 112. In an example embodiment, a point ofcontact between touch-sensitive display system 112 and the usercorresponds to a finger of the user or a stylus.

Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystaldisplay) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, orLED (light emitting diode) technology, although other displaytechnologies are used in other embodiments. Touch-sensitive displaysystem 112 and display controller 156 optionally detect contact and anymovement or breaking thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensingtechnologies now known or later developed, including but not limited tocapacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies,as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements fordetermining one or more points of contact with touch-sensitive displaysystem 112. In an example embodiment, projected mutual capacitancesensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPhone®, iPodTouch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.

Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution inexcess of 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen videoresolution is in excess of 400 dpi (e.g., 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or greater).The user optionally makes contact with touch-sensitive display system112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, a finger,and so forth. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed towork with finger-based contacts and gestures, which can be less precisethan stylus-based input due to the larger area of contact of a finger onthe touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates the roughfinger-based input into a precise pointer/cursor position or command forperforming the actions desired by the user.

In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating ordeactivating particular functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad isa touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, doesnot display visual output. The touchpad is, optionally, atouch-sensitive surface that is separate from touch-sensitive displaysystem 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by thetouch screen.

Device 100 also includes power system 162 for powering the variouscomponents. Power system 162 optionally includes a power managementsystem, one or more power sources (e.g., battery, alternating current(AC)), a recharging system, a power failure detection circuit, a powerconverter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light-emittingdiode (LED)) and any other components associated with the generation,management and distribution of power in portable devices.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164.FIG. 1A shows an optical sensor coupled with optical sensor controller158 in I/O subsystem 106. Optical sensor(s) 164 optionally includecharge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor(CMOS) phototransistors. Optical sensor(s) 164 receive light from theenvironment, projected through one or more lens, and converts the lightto data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143(also called a camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally capturestill images and/or video. In some embodiments, an optical sensor islocated on the back of device 100, opposite touch-sensitive displaysystem 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen isenabled for use as a viewfinder for still and/or video imageacquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located onthe front of the device so that the user's image is obtained (e.g., forselfies, for videoconferencing while the user views the other videoconference participants on the touch screen, etc.).

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact intensitysensors 165. FIG. 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled withintensity sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact intensitysensor(s) 165 optionally include one or more piezoresistive straingauges, capacitive force sensors, electric force sensors, piezoelectricforce sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitivesurfaces, or other intensity sensors (e.g., sensors used to measure theforce (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contactintensity sensor(s) 165 receive contact intensity information (e.g.,pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from theenvironment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensoris collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least onecontact intensity sensor is located on the back of device 100, oppositetouch-screen display system 112 which is located on the front of device100.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166.FIG. 1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled with peripherals interface118. Alternately, proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensorturns off and disables touch-sensitive display system 112 when themultifunction device is placed near the user's ear (e.g., when the useris making a phone call).

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile outputgenerators 167. FIG. 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled withhaptic feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile outputgenerator(s) 167 optionally include one or more electroacoustic devicessuch as speakers or other audio components and/or electromechanicaldevices that convert energy into linear motion such as a motor,solenoid, electroactive polymer, piezoelectric actuator, electrostaticactuator, or other tactile output generating component (e.g., acomponent that converts electrical signals into tactile outputs on thedevice). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedbackgeneration instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generatestactile outputs on device 100 that are capable of being sensed by a userof device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile outputgenerator is collocated with, or proximate to, a touch-sensitive surface(e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and, optionally, generates atactile output by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g.,in/out of a surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and forth inthe same plane as a surface of device 100). In some embodiments, atleast one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back ofdevice 100, opposite touch-sensitive display system 112, which islocated on the front of device 100.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG.1A shows accelerometer 168 coupled with peripherals interface 118.Alternately, accelerometer 168 is, optionally, coupled with an inputcontroller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information isdisplayed on the touch-screen display in a portrait view or a landscapeview based on an analysis of data received from the one or moreaccelerometers. Device 100 optionally includes, in addition toaccelerometer(s) 168, a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASSor other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaininginformation concerning the location and orientation (e.g., portrait orlandscape) of device 100.

In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102include operating system 126, communication module (or set ofinstructions) 128, contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130,graphics module (or set of instructions) 132, haptic feedback module (orset of instructions) 133, text input module (or set of instructions)134, Global Positioning System (GPS) module (or set of instructions)135, and applications (or sets of instructions) 136. Furthermore, insome embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157, asshown in FIGS. 1A and 3. Device/global internal state 157 includes oneor more of: active application state, indicating which applications, ifany, are currently active; display state, indicating what applications,views or other information occupy various regions of touch-sensitivedisplay system 112; sensor state, including information obtained fromthe device's various sensors and other input or control devices 116; andlocation and/or positional information concerning the device's locationand/or attitude.

Operating system 126 (e.g., iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X,WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includesvarious software components and/or drivers for controlling and managinggeneral system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control,power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between varioushardware and software components.

Communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devicesover one or more external ports 124 and also includes various softwarecomponents for handling data received by RF circuitry 108 and/orexternal port 124. External port 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB),FIREWIRE, etc.) is adapted for coupling directly to other devices orindirectly over a network (e.g., the Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). Insome embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin)connector that is the same as, or similar to and/or compatible with the30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devicesfrom Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif. In some embodiments, the externalport is a Lightning connector that is the same as, or similar to and/orcompatible with the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPodTouch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, Calif.

Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact withtouch-sensitive display system 112 (in conjunction with displaycontroller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad orphysical click wheel). Contact/motion module 130 includes varioussoftware components for performing various operations related todetection of contact (e.g., by a finger or by a stylus), such asdetermining if contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger-downevent), determining an intensity of the contact (e.g., the force orpressure of the contact or a substitute for the force or pressure of thecontact), determining if there is movement of the contact and trackingthe movement across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one ormore finger-dragging events), and determining if the contact has ceased(e.g., detecting a finger-up event or a break in contact).Contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitivesurface. Determining movement of the point of contact, which isrepresented by a series of contact data, optionally includes determiningspeed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or anacceleration (a change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point ofcontact. These operations are, optionally, applied to single contacts(e.g., one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiplesimultaneous contacts (e.g., “multitouch”/multiple finger contacts). Insome embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156detect contact on a touchpad.

Contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by a user.Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contactpatterns (e.g., different motions, timings, and/or intensities ofdetected contacts). Thus, a gesture is, optionally, detected bydetecting a particular contact pattern. For example, detecting a fingertap gesture includes detecting a finger-down event followed by detectinga finger-up (lift off) event at the same position (or substantially thesame position) as the finger-down event (e.g., at the position of anicon). As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on thetouch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger-down event followedby detecting one or more finger-dragging events, and subsequentlyfollowed by detecting a finger-up (lift off) event. Similarly, tap,swipe, drag, and other gestures are optionally detected for a stylus bydetecting a particular contact pattern for the stylus.

In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on thelength of time between detecting the finger-down event and the finger-upevent, but is independent of the intensity of the finger contact betweendetecting the finger-down event and the finger-up event. In someembodiments, a tap gesture is detected in accordance with adetermination that the length of time between the finger-down event andthe finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (e.g., less than0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 or 0.5 seconds), independent of whether the intensityof the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold(greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such asa light press or deep press intensity threshold. Thus, a finger tapgesture can satisfy particular input criteria that do not require thatthe characteristic intensity of a contact satisfy a given intensitythreshold in order for the particular input criteria to be met. Forclarity, the finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to satisfya nominal contact-detection intensity threshold, below which the contactis not detected, in order for the finger-down event to be detected. Asimilar analysis applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or othercontact. In cases where the device is capable of detecting a finger orstylus contact hovering over a touch sensitive surface, the nominalcontact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond tophysical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch sensitivesurface.

The same concepts apply in an analogous manner to other types ofgestures. For example, a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a depinchgesture, and/or a long press gesture are optionally detected based onthe satisfaction of criteria that are either independent of intensitiesof contacts included in the gesture, or do not require that contact(s)that perform the gesture reach intensity thresholds in order to berecognized. For example, a swipe gesture is detected based on an amountof movement of one or more contacts; a pinch gesture is detected basedon movement of two or more contacts towards each other; a depinchgesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts away fromeach other; and a long press gesture is detected based on a duration ofthe contact on the touch-sensitive surface with less than a thresholdamount of movement. As such, the statement that particular gesturerecognition criteria do not require that the intensity of the contact(s)meet a respective intensity threshold in order for the particulargesture recognition criteria to be met means that the particular gesturerecognition criteria are capable of being satisfied if the contact(s) inthe gesture do not reach the respective intensity threshold, and arealso capable of being satisfied in circumstances where one or more ofthe contacts in the gesture do reach or exceed the respective intensitythreshold. In some embodiments, a tap gesture is detected based on adetermination that the finger-down and finger-up event are detectedwithin a predefined time period, without regard to whether the contactis above or below the respective intensity threshold during thepredefined time period, and a swipe gesture is detected based on adetermination that the contact movement is greater than a predefinedmagnitude, even if the contact is above the respective intensitythreshold at the end of the contact movement. Even in implementationswhere detection of a gesture is influenced by the intensities ofcontacts performing the gesture (e.g., the device detects a long pressmore quickly when the intensity of the contact is above an intensitythreshold or delays detection of a tap input when the intensity of thecontact is higher), the detection of those gestures does not requirethat the contacts reach a particular intensity threshold so long as thecriteria for recognizing the gesture can be met in circumstances wherethe contact does not reach the particular intensity threshold (e.g.,even if the amount of time that it takes to recognize the gesturechanges).

Contact intensity thresholds, duration thresholds, and movementthresholds are, in some circumstances, combined in a variety ofdifferent combinations in order to create heuristics for distinguishingtwo or more different gestures directed to the same input element orregion so that multiple different interactions with the same inputelement are enabled to provide a richer set of user interactions andresponses. The statement that a particular set of gesture recognitioncriteria do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet arespective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesturerecognition criteria to be met does not preclude the concurrentevaluation of other intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria toidentify other gestures that do have criteria that is met when a gestureincludes a contact with an intensity above the respective intensitythreshold. For example, in some circumstances, first gesture recognitioncriteria for a first gesture—which do not require that the intensity ofthe contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold in order for thefirst gesture recognition criteria to be met—are in competition withsecond gesture recognition criteria for a second gesture—which aredependent on the contact(s) reaching the respective intensity threshold.In such competitions, the gesture is, optionally, not recognized asmeeting the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture ifthe second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are metfirst. For example, if a contact reaches the respective intensitythreshold before the contact moves by a predefined amount of movement, adeep press gesture is detected rather than a swipe gesture. Conversely,if the contact moves by the predefined amount of movement before thecontact reaches the respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture isdetected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such circumstances,the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture still donot require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respectiveintensity threshold in order for the first gesture recognition criteriato be met because if the contact stayed below the respective intensitythreshold until an end of the gesture (e.g., a swipe gesture with acontact that does not increase to an intensity above the respectiveintensity threshold), the gesture would have been recognized by thefirst gesture recognition criteria as a swipe gesture. As such,particular gesture recognition criteria that do not require that theintensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold inorder for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met will (A)in some circumstances ignore the intensity of the contact with respectto the intensity threshold (e.g. for a tap gesture) and/or (B) in somecircumstances still be dependent on the intensity of the contact withrespect to the intensity threshold in the sense that the particulargesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a long press gesture) will failif a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria(e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognize an input as corresponding toan intensity-dependent gesture before the particular gesture recognitioncriteria recognize a gesture corresponding to the input (e.g., for along press gesture that is competing with a deep press gesture forrecognition).

Graphics module 132 includes various known software components forrendering and displaying graphics on touch-sensitive display system 112or other display, including components for changing the visual impact(e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast or other visualproperty) of graphics that are displayed. As used herein, the term“graphics” includes any object that can be displayed to a user,including without limitation text, web pages, icons (such asuser-interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos,animations and the like.

In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representinggraphics to be used. Each graphic is, optionally, assigned acorresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives, from applicationsetc., one or more codes specifying graphics to be displayed along with,if necessary, coordinate data and other graphic property data, and thengenerates screen image data to output to display controller 156.

Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components forgenerating instructions used by tactile output generator(s) 167 toproduce tactile outputs at one or more locations on device 100 inresponse to user interactions with device 100.

Text input module 134, which is, optionally, a component of graphicsmodule 132, provides soft keyboards for entering text in variousapplications (e.g., contacts 137, e-mail 140, IM 141, browser 147, andany other application that needs text input).

GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides thisinformation for use in various applications (e.g., to telephone 138 foruse in location-based dialing, to camera 143 as picture/video metadata,and to applications that provide location-based services such as weatherwidgets, local yellow page widgets, and map/navigation widgets).

Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets ofinstructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

-   -   contacts module 137 (sometimes called an address book or contact        list);    -   telephone module 138;    -   video conferencing module 139;    -   e-mail client module 140;    -   instant messaging (IM) module 141;    -   workout support module 142;    -   camera module 143 for still and/or video images;    -   image management module 144;    -   browser module 147;    -   calendar module 148;    -   widget modules 149, which optionally include one or more of:        weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget        149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and        other widgets obtained by the user, as well as user-created        widgets 149-6;    -   widget creator module 150 for making user-created widgets 149-6;    -   search module 15I;    -   video and music player module 152, which is, optionally, made up        of a video player module and a music player module;    -   notes module 153;    -   map module 154; and/or    -   online video module 155.

Examples of other applications 136 that are, optionally, stored inmemory 102 include other word processing applications, other imageediting applications, drawing applications, presentation applications,JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voicerecognition, and voice replication.

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, displaycontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text inputmodule 134, contacts module 137 includes executable instructions tomanage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in applicationinternal state 192 of contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370),including: adding name(s) to the address book; deleting name(s) from theaddress book; associating telephone number(s), e-mail address(es),physical address(es) or other information with a name; associating animage with a name; categorizing and sorting names; providing telephonenumbers and/or e-mail addresses to initiate and/or facilitatecommunications by telephone 138, video conference 139, e-mail 140, or IM141; and so forth.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111,microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134,telephone module 138 includes executable instructions to enter asequence of characters corresponding to a telephone number, access oneor more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify a telephone numberthat has been entered, dial a respective telephone number, conduct aconversation and disconnect or hang up when the conversation iscompleted. As noted above, the wireless communication optionally usesany of a plurality of communications standards, protocols andtechnologies.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111,microphone 113, touch-sensitive display system 112, display controller156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158, contactmodule 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list137, and telephone module 138, videoconferencing module 139 includesexecutable instructions to initiate, conduct, and terminate a videoconference between a user and one or more other participants inaccordance with user instructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132,and text input module 134, e-mail client module 140 includes executableinstructions to create, send, receive, and manage e-mail in response touser instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144,e-mail client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send e-mailswith still or video images taken with camera module 143.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132,and text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includesexecutable instructions to enter a sequence of characters correspondingto an instant message, to modify previously entered characters, totransmit a respective instant message (for example, using a ShortMessage Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) protocol fortelephony-based instant messages or using XMPP, SIMPLE, Apple PushNotification Service (APNs) or IMPS for Internet-based instantmessages), to receive instant messages, and to view received instantmessages. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instantmessages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video filesand/or other attachments as are supported in a MMS and/or an EnhancedMessaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers toboth telephony-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) andInternet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs,or IMPS).

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132,text input module 134, GPS module 135, map module 154, and music playermodule 146, workout support module 142 includes executable instructionsto create workouts (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burninggoals); communicate with workout sensors (in sports devices and smartwatches); receive workout sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitora workout; select and play music for a workout; and display, store andtransmit workout data.

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, displaycontroller 156, optical sensor(s) 164, optical sensor controller 158,contact module 130, graphics module 132, and image management module144, camera module 143 includes executable instructions to capture stillimages or video (including a video stream) and store them into memory102, modify characteristics of a still image or video, and/or delete astill image or video from memory 102.

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, displaycontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text inputmodule 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includesexecutable instructions to arrange, modify (e.g., edit), or otherwisemanipulate, label, delete, present (e.g., in a digital slide show oralbum), and store still and/or video images.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module132, and text input module 134, browser module 147 includes executableinstructions to browse the Internet in accordance with userinstructions, including searching, linking to, receiving, and displayingweb pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other fileslinked to web pages.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module132, text input module 134, e-mail client module 140, and browser module147, calendar module 148 includes executable instructions to create,display, modify, and store calendars and data associated with calendars(e.g., calendar entries, to do lists, etc.) in accordance with userinstructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, widget modules 149are mini-applications that are, optionally, downloaded and used by auser (e.g., weather widget 149-1, stocks widget 149-2, calculator widget149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, and dictionary widget 149-5) or createdby the user (e.g., user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, awidget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS(Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In someembodiments, a widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) fileand a JavaScript file (e.g., Yahoo! Widgets).

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module132, text input module 134, and browser module 147, the widget creatormodule 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (e.g.,turning a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display systemcontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text inputmodule 134, search module 151 includes executable instructions to searchfor text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specifiedsearch terms) in accordance with user instructions.

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display systemcontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video andmusic player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow theuser to download and play back recorded music and other sound filesstored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, andexecutable instructions to display, present or otherwise play backvideos (e.g., on touch-sensitive display system 112, or on an externaldisplay connected wirelessly or via external port 124). In someembodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, displaycontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text inputmodule 134, notes module 153 includes executable instructions to createand manage notes, to do lists, and the like in accordance with userinstructions.

In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch-sensitive display system112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module132, text input module 134, GPS module 135, and browser module 147, mapmodule 154 includes executable instructions to receive, display, modify,and store maps and data associated with maps (e.g., driving directions;data on stores and other points of interest at or near a particularlocation; and other location-based data) in accordance with userinstructions.

In conjunction with touch-sensitive display system 112, display systemcontroller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, text input module 134, e-mail clientmodule 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includesexecutable instructions that allow the user to access, browse, receive(e.g., by streaming and/or download), play back (e.g., on the touchscreen 112, or on an external display connected wirelessly or viaexternal port 124), send an e-mail with a link to a particular onlinevideo, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats,such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, ratherthan e-mail client module 140, is used to send a link to a particularonline video.

Each of the above identified modules and applications correspond to aset of executable instructions for performing one or more functionsdescribed above and the methods described in this application (e.g., thecomputer-implemented methods and other information processing methodsdescribed herein). These modules (i.e., sets of instructions) need notbe implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, andthus various subsets of these modules are, optionally, combined orotherwise re-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments,memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structuresidentified above. Furthermore, memory 102 optionally stores additionalmodules and data structures not described above.

In some embodiments, device 100 is a device where operation of apredefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusivelythrough a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using a touch screen and/ora touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons,dials, and the like) on device 100 is, optionally, reduced.

The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through atouch screen and/or a touchpad optionally include navigation betweenuser interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by theuser, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any userinterface that is displayed on device 100. In such embodiments, a “menubutton” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, themenu button is a physical push button or other physical input controldevice instead of a touchpad.

FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for eventhandling in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments,memory 102 (in FIG. 1A) or 370 (FIG. 3) includes event sorter 170 (e.g.,in operating system 126) and a respective application 136-1 (e.g., anyof the aforementioned applications 136, 137-155, 380-390).

Event sorter 170 receives event information and determines theapplication 136-1 and application view 191 of application 136-1 to whichto deliver the event information. Event sorter 170 includes eventmonitor 171 and event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments,application 136-1 includes application internal state 192, whichindicates the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitivedisplay system 112 when the application is active or executing. In someembodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event sorter170 to determine which application(s) is (are) currently active, andapplication internal state 192 is used by event sorter 170 to determineapplication views 191 to which to deliver event information.

In some embodiments, application internal state 192 includes additionalinformation, such as one or more of: resume information to be used whenapplication 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state informationthat indicates information being displayed or that is ready for displayby application 136-1, a state queue for enabling the user to go back toa prior state or view of application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue ofprevious actions taken by the user.

Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface118. Event information includes information about a sub-event (e.g., auser touch on touch-sensitive display system 112, as part of amulti-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information itreceives from I/O subsystem 106 or a sensor, such as proximity sensor166, accelerometer(s) 168, and/or microphone 113 (through audiocircuitry 110). Information that peripherals interface 118 receives fromI/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive displaysystem 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to the peripheralsinterface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripheralsinterface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments,peripheral interface 118 transmits event information only when there isa significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predeterminednoise threshold and/or for more than a predetermined duration).

In some embodiments, event sorter 170 also includes a hit viewdetermination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determinationmodule 173.

Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures fordetermining where a sub-event has taken place within one or more views,when touch-sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view.Views are made up of controls and other elements that a user can see onthe display.

Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is aset of views, sometimes herein called application views or userinterface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-basedgestures occur. The application views (of a respective application) inwhich a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levelswithin a programmatic or view hierarchy of the application. For example,the lowest level view in which a touch is detected is, optionally,called the hit view, and the set of events that are recognized as properinputs are, optionally, determined based, at least in part, on the hitview of the initial touch that begins a touch-based gesture.

Hit view determination module 172 receives information related tosub-events of a touch-based gesture. When an application has multipleviews organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy which shouldhandle the sub-event. In most circumstances, the hit view is the lowestlevel view in which an initiating sub-event occurs (i.e., the firstsub-event in the sequence of sub-events that form an event or potentialevent). Once the hit view is identified by the hit view determinationmodule, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to thesame touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.

Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which viewor views within a view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence ofsub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determinationmodule 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particularsequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizerdetermination module 173 determines that all views that include thephysical location of a sub-event are actively involved views, andtherefore determines that all actively involved views should receive aparticular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if touchsub-events were entirely confined to the area associated with oneparticular view, views higher in the hierarchy would still remain asactively involved views.

Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches the event information to an eventrecognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments including activeevent recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174delivers the event information to an event recognizer determined byactive event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments,event dispatcher module 174 stores in an event queue the eventinformation, which is retrieved by a respective event receiver module182.

In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event sorter 170.Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event sorter 170. In yet otherembodiments, event sorter 170 is a stand-alone module, or a part ofanother module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.

In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes a plurality of eventhandlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of whichincludes instructions for handling touch events that occur within arespective view of the application's user interface. Each applicationview 191 of the application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers180. Typically, a respective application view 191 includes a pluralityof event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of eventrecognizers 180 are part of a separate module, such as a user interfacekit (not shown) or a higher level object from which application 136-1inherits methods and other properties. In some embodiments, a respectiveevent handler 190 includes one or more of: data updater 176, objectupdater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from eventsorter 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater176, object updater 177 or GUI updater 178 to update the applicationinternal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of the application views191 includes one or more respective event handlers 190. Also, in someembodiments, one or more of data updater 176, object updater 177, andGUI updater 178 are included in a respective application view 191.

A respective event recognizer 180 receives event information (e.g.,event data 179) from event sorter 170, and identifies an event from theevent information. Event recognizer 180 includes event receiver 182 andevent comparator 184. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 alsoincludes at least a subset of: metadata 183, and event deliveryinstructions 188 (which optionally include sub-event deliveryinstructions).

Event receiver 182 receives event information from event sorter 170. Theevent information includes information about a sub-event, for example, atouch or a touch movement. Depending on the sub-event, the eventinformation also includes additional information, such as location ofthe sub-event. When the sub-event concerns motion of a touch, the eventinformation optionally also includes speed and direction of thesub-event. In some embodiments, events include rotation of the devicefrom one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to alandscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event informationincludes corresponding information about the current orientation (alsocalled device attitude) of the device.

Event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined eventor sub-event definitions and, based on the comparison, determines anevent or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of an event orsub-event. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes eventdefinitions 186. Event definitions 186 contain definitions of events(e.g., predefined sequences of sub-events), for example, event 1(187-1), event 2 (187-2), and others. In some embodiments, sub-events inan event 187 include, for example, touch begin, touch end, touchmovement, touch cancellation, and multiple touching. In one example, thedefinition for event 1 (187-1) is a double tap on a displayed object.The double tap, for example, comprises a first touch (touch begin) onthe displayed object for a predetermined phase, a first lift-off (touchend) for a predetermined phase, a second touch (touch begin) on thedisplayed object for a predetermined phase, and a second lift-off (touchend) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition forevent 2 (187-2) is a dragging on a displayed object. The dragging, forexample, comprises a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for apredetermined phase, a movement of the touch across touch-sensitivedisplay system 112, and lift-off of the touch (touch end). In someembodiments, the event also includes information for one or moreassociated event handlers 190.

In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of anevent for a respective user-interface object. In some embodiments, eventcomparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user-interfaceobject is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an applicationview in which three user-interface objects are displayed ontouch-sensitive display system 112, when a touch is detected ontouch-sensitive display system 112, event comparator 184 performs a hittest to determine which of the three user-interface objects isassociated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object isassociated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparatoruses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects an eventhandler associated with the sub-event and the object triggering the hittest.

In some embodiments, the definition for a respective event 187 alsoincludes delayed actions that delay delivery of the event informationuntil after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-eventsdoes or does not correspond to the event recognizer's event type.

When a respective event recognizer 180 determines that the series ofsub-events do not match any of the events in event definitions 186, therespective event recognizer 180 enters an event impossible, eventfailed, or event ended state, after which it disregards subsequentsub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other eventrecognizers, if any, that remain active for the hit view continue totrack and process sub-events of an ongoing touch-based gesture.

In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 includes metadata183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate howthe event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery to activelyinvolved event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includesconfigurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how eventrecognizers interact, or are enabled to interact, with one another. Insome embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags,and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varyinglevels in the view or programmatic hierarchy.

In some embodiments, a respective event recognizer 180 activates eventhandler 190 associated with an event when one or more particularsub-events of an event are recognized. In some embodiments, a respectiveevent recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with theevent to event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is distinctfrom sending (and deferred sending) sub-events to a respective hit view.In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated withthe recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flagcatches the flag and performs a predefined process.

In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-eventdelivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-eventwithout activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event deliveryinstructions deliver event information to event handlers associated withthe series of sub-events or to actively involved views. Event handlersassociated with the series of sub-events or with actively involved viewsreceive the event information and perform a predetermined process.

In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used inapplication 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates the telephonenumber used in contacts module 137, or stores a video file used in videoplayer module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates andupdates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater177 creates a new user-interface object or updates the position of auser-interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUIupdater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.

In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or has access to dataupdater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In someembodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178are included in a single module of a respective application 136-1 orapplication view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two ormore software modules.

It shall be understood that the foregoing discussion regarding eventhandling of user touches on touch-sensitive displays also applies toother forms of user inputs to operate multifunction devices 100 withinput-devices, not all of which are initiated on touch screens. Forexample, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally coordinatedwith single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movementssuch as taps, drags, scrolls, etc., on touch-pads; pen stylus inputs;movement of the device; oral instructions; detected eye movements;biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof are optionally utilizedas inputs corresponding to sub-events which define an event to berecognized.

FIG. 1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module inaccordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, I/O subsystem 106(e.g., haptic feedback controller 161 (FIG. 1A) and/or other inputcontroller(s) 160 (FIG. 1A)) includes at least some of the examplecomponents shown in FIG. 1C. In some embodiments, peripherals interface118 includes at least some of the example components shown in FIG. 1C.

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedbackmodule 133. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 aggregatesand combines tactile outputs for user interface feedback from softwareapplications on the electronic device (e.g., feedback that is responsiveto user inputs that correspond to displayed user interfaces and alertsand other notifications that indicate the performance of operations oroccurrence of events in user interfaces of the electronic device).Haptic feedback module 133 includes one or more of: waveform module 123(for providing waveforms used for generating tactile outputs), mixer 125(for mixing waveforms, such as waveforms in different channels),compressor 127 (for reducing or compressing a dynamic range of thewaveforms), low-pass filter 129 (for filtering out high frequency signalcomponents in the waveforms), and thermal controller 131 (for adjustingthe waveforms in accordance with thermal conditions). In someembodiments, haptic feedback module 133 is included in haptic feedbackcontroller 161 (FIG. 1A). In some embodiments, a separate unit of hapticfeedback module 133 (or a separate implementation of haptic feedbackmodule 133) is also included in an audio controller (e.g., audiocircuitry 110, FIG. 1A) and used for generating audio signals. In someembodiments, a single haptic feedback module 133 is used for generatingaudio signals and generating waveforms for tactile outputs.

In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 also includes triggermodule 121 (e.g., a software application, operating system, or othersoftware module that determines a tactile output is to be generated andinitiates the process for generating the corresponding tactile output).In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals forinitiating generation of waveforms (e.g., by waveform module 123). Forexample, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals based on presettiming criteria. In some embodiments, trigger module 121 receivestrigger signals from outside haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., in someembodiments, haptic feedback module 133 receives trigger signals fromhardware input processing module 146 located outside haptic feedbackmodule 133) and relays the trigger signals to other components withinhaptic feedback module 133 (e.g., waveform module 123) or softwareapplications that trigger operations (e.g., with trigger module 121)based on activation of the hardware input device (e.g., a home button).In some embodiments, trigger module 121 also receives tactile feedbackgeneration instructions (e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, FIGS. 1Aand 3). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates triggersignals in response to haptic feedback module 133 (or trigger module 121in haptic feedback module 133) receiving tactile feedback instructions(e.g., from haptic feedback module 133, FIGS. 1A and 3).

Waveform module 123 receives trigger signals (e.g., from trigger module121) as an input, and in response to receiving trigger signals, provideswaveforms for generation of one or more tactile outputs (e.g., waveformsselected from a predefined set of waveforms designated for use bywaveform module 123, such as the waveforms described in greater detailbelow with reference to FIGS. 4F-4G).

Mixer 125 receives waveforms (e.g., from waveform module 123) as aninput, and mixes together the waveforms. For example, when mixer 125receives two or more waveforms (e.g., a first waveform in a firstchannel and a second waveform that at least partially overlaps with thefirst waveform in a second channel) mixer 125 outputs a combinedwaveform that corresponds to a sum of the two or more waveforms. In someembodiments, mixer 125 also modifies one or more waveforms of the two ormore waveforms to emphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of thetwo or more waveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particularwaveform(s) and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms). Insome circumstances, mixer 125 selects one or more waveforms to removefrom the combined waveform (e.g., the waveform from the oldest source isdropped when there are waveforms from more than three sources that havebeen requested to be output concurrently by tactile output generator167)

Compressor 127 receives waveforms (e.g., a combined waveform from mixer125) as an input, and modifies the waveforms. In some embodiments,compressor 127 reduces the waveforms (e.g., in accordance with physicalspecifications of tactile output generators 167 (FIG. 1A) or 357 (FIG.3)) so that tactile outputs corresponding to the waveforms are reduced.In some embodiments, compressor 127 limits the waveforms, such as byenforcing a predefined maximum amplitude for the waveforms. For example,compressor 127 reduces amplitudes of portions of waveforms that exceed apredefined amplitude threshold while maintaining amplitudes of portionsof waveforms that do not exceed the predefined amplitude threshold. Insome embodiments, compressor 127 reduces a dynamic range of thewaveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 dynamically reduces thedynamic range of the waveforms so that the combined waveforms remainwithin performance specifications of the tactile output generator 167(e.g., force and/or moveable mass displacement limits).

Low-pass filter 129 receives waveforms (e.g., compressed waveforms fromcompressor 127) as an input, and filters (e.g., smooths) the waveforms(e.g., removes or reduces high frequency signal components in thewaveforms). For example, in some instances, compressor 127 includes, incompressed waveforms, extraneous signals (e.g., high frequency signalcomponents) that interfere with the generation of tactile outputs and/orexceed performance specifications of tactile output generator 167 whenthe tactile outputs are generated in accordance with the compressedwaveforms. Low-pass filter 129 reduces or removes such extraneoussignals in the waveforms.

Thermal controller 131 receives waveforms (e.g., filtered waveforms fromlow-pass filter 129) as an input, and adjusts the waveforms inaccordance with thermal conditions of device 100 (e.g., based oninternal temperatures detected within device 100, such as thetemperature of haptic feedback controller 161, and/or externaltemperatures detected by device 100). For example, in some cases, theoutput of haptic feedback controller 161 varies depending on thetemperature (e.g. haptic feedback controller 161, in response toreceiving same waveforms, generates a first tactile output when hapticfeedback controller 161 is at a first temperature and generates a secondtactile output when haptic feedback controller 161 is at a secondtemperature that is distinct from the first temperature). For example,the magnitude (or the amplitude) of the tactile outputs may varydepending on the temperature. To reduce the effect of the temperaturevariations, the waveforms are modified (e.g., an amplitude of thewaveforms is increased or decreased based on the temperature).

In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 (e.g., trigger module121) is coupled to hardware input processing module 146. In someembodiments, other input controller(s) 160 in FIG. 1A includes hardwareinput processing module 146. In some embodiments, hardware inputprocessing module 146 receives inputs from hardware input device 145(e.g., other input or control devices 116 in FIG. 1A, such as a homebutton). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 is any inputdevice described herein, such as touch-sensitive display system 112(FIG. 1A), keyboard/mouse 350 (FIG. 3), touchpad 355 (FIG. 3), one ofother input or control devices 116 (FIG. 1A), or an intensity-sensitivehome button (e.g., as shown in FIG. 2B or a home button with amechanical actuator as illustrated in FIG. 2C). In some embodiments,hardware input device 145 consists of an intensity-sensitive home button(e.g., as shown in FIG. 2B or a home button with a mechanical actuatoras illustrated in FIG. 2C), and not touch-sensitive display system 112(FIG. 1A), keyboard/mouse 350 (FIG. 3), or touchpad 355 (FIG. 3). Insome embodiments, in response to inputs from hardware input device 145,hardware input processing module 146 provides one or more triggersignals to haptic feedback module 133 to indicate that a user inputsatisfying predefined input criteria, such as an input corresponding toa “click” of a home button (e.g., a “down click” or an “up click”), hasbeen detected. In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 provideswaveforms that correspond to the “click” of a home button in response tothe input corresponding to the “click” of a home button, simulating ahaptic feedback of pressing a physical home button.

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes haptic feedbackcontroller 161 (e.g., haptic feedback controller 161 in FIG. 1A), whichcontrols the generation of tactile outputs. In some embodiments, hapticfeedback controller 161 is coupled to a plurality of tactile outputgenerators, and selects one or more tactile output generators of theplurality of tactile output generators and sends waveforms to theselected one or more tactile output generators for generating tactileoutputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 coordinatestactile output requests that correspond to activation of hardware inputdevice 145 and tactile output requests that correspond to softwareevents (e.g., tactile output requests from haptic feedback module 133)and modifies one or more waveforms of the two or more waveforms toemphasize particular waveform(s) over the rest of the two or morewaveforms (e.g., by increasing a scale of the particular waveform(s)and/or decreasing a scale of the rest of the waveforms, such as toprioritize tactile outputs that correspond to activations of hardwareinput device 145 over tactile outputs that correspond to softwareevents).

In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1C, an output of haptic feedbackcontroller 161 is coupled to audio circuitry of device 100 (e.g., audiocircuitry 110, FIG. 1A), and provides audio signals to audio circuitryof device 100. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161provides both waveforms used for generating tactile outputs and audiosignals used for providing audio outputs in conjunction with generationof the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller161 modifies audio signals and/or waveforms (used for generating tactileoutputs) so that the audio outputs and the tactile outputs aresynchronized (e.g., by delaying the audio signals and/or waveforms). Insome embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 includes adigital-to-analog converter used for converting digital waveforms intoanalog signals, which are received by amplifier 163 and/or tactileoutput generator 167.

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes amplifier 163.In some embodiments, amplifier 163 receives waveforms (e.g., from hapticfeedback controller 161) and amplifies the waveforms prior to sendingthe amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167 (e.g., any oftactile output generators 167 (FIG. 1A) or 357 (FIG. 3)). For example,amplifier 163 amplifies the received waveforms to signal levels that arein accordance with physical specifications of tactile output generator167 (e.g., to a voltage and/or a current required by tactile outputgenerator 167 for generating tactile outputs so that the signals sent totactile output generator 167 produce tactile outputs that correspond tothe waveforms received from haptic feedback controller 161) and sendsthe amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167. In response,tactile output generator 167 generates tactile outputs (e.g., byshifting a moveable mass back and forth in one or more dimensionsrelative to a neutral position of the moveable mass).

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes sensor 169,which is coupled to tactile output generator 167. Sensor 169 detectsstates or state changes (e.g., mechanical position, physicaldisplacement, and/or movement) of tactile output generator 167 or one ormore components of tactile output generator 167 (e.g., one or moremoving parts, such as a membrane, used to generate tactile outputs). Insome embodiments, sensor 169 is a magnetic field sensor (e.g., a HallEffect sensor) or other displacement and/or movement sensor. In someembodiments, sensor 169 provides information (e.g., a position, adisplacement, and/or a movement of one or more parts in tactile outputgenerator 167) to haptic feedback controller 161 and, in accordance withthe information provided by sensor 169 about the state of tactile outputgenerator 167, haptic feedback controller 161 adjusts the waveformsoutput from haptic feedback controller 161 (e.g., waveforms sent totactile output generator 167, optionally via amplifier 163).

FIG. 2A illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 having a touchscreen (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112, FIG. 1A) in accordancewith some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or moregraphics within user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well asothers described below, a user is enabled to select one or more of thegraphics by making a gesture on the graphics, for example, with one ormore fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figure) or one or morestyluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figure). In some embodiments,selection of one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contactwith the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gestureoptionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left toright, right to left, upward and/or downward) and/or a rolling of afinger (from right to left, left to right, upward and/or downward) thathas made contact with device 100. In some implementations orcircumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select thegraphic. For example, a swipe gesture that sweeps over an applicationicon optionally does not select the corresponding application when thegesture corresponding to selection is a tap.

Device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, suchas “home” or menu button 204. As described previously, menu button 204is, optionally, used to navigate to any application 136 in a set ofapplications that are, optionally executed on device 100. Alternatively,in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in aGUI displayed on the touch-screen display.

In some embodiments, device 100 includes the touch-screen display, menubutton 204, push button 206 for powering the device on/off and lockingthe device, volume adjustment button(s) 208, Subscriber Identity Module(SIM) card slot 210, head set jack 212, and docking/charging externalport 124. Push button 206 is, optionally, used to turn the power on/offon the device by depressing the button and holding the button in thedepressed state for a predefined time interval; to lock the device bydepressing the button and releasing the button before the predefinedtime interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate anunlock process. In some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbalinput for activation or deactivation of some functions throughmicrophone 113. Device 100 also, optionally, includes one or morecontact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts ontouch-sensitive display system 112 and/or one or more tactile outputgenerators 167 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 100.

FIGS. 2B-2C show exploded views of a first input device suitable for usein the electronic devices shown in FIGS. 1A, 2A, 3, and/or 4A (e.g., ashome button 204). FIG. 2B shows an example of an intensity-sensitivehome button with capacitive sensors used to determine a range ofintensity values that correspond to force applied to theintensity-sensitive home button. FIG. 2C shows an example of a homebutton with a mechanical switch element. With reference to FIG. 2B, theinput device stack 220 includes a cover element 222 and a trim 224. Inthe illustrated embodiment, the trim 224 completely surrounds the sidesof the cover element 222 and the perimeter of the top surface of thecover element 222. Other embodiments are not limited to thisconfiguration. For example, in one embodiment the sides and/or topsurface of the cover element 222 can be partially surrounded by the trim224. Alternatively, the trim 224 can be omitted in other embodiments.

Both the cover element 222 and the trim 224 can be formed with anysuitable opaque, transparent, and/or translucent material. For example,the cover element 222 can be made of glass, plastic, or sapphire and thetrim 224 may be made of a metal or plastic. In some embodiments, one ormore additional layers (not shown) can be positioned below the coverelement 222. For example, an opaque ink layer can be disposed below thecover element 222 when the cover element 222 is made of a transparentmaterial. The opaque ink layer can conceal the other components in theinput device stack 220 so that the other components are not visiblethrough the transparent cover element 222.

A first circuit layer 226 can be disposed below the cover element 222.Any suitable circuit layer may be used. For example, the first circuitlayer 226 may be a circuit board or a flexible circuit. The firstcircuit layer 226 can include one or more circuits, signal lines, and/orintegrated circuits. In one embodiment, the first circuit layer 226includes a biometric sensor 228. Any suitable type of biometric sensorcan be used. For example, in one embodiment the biometric sensor is acapacitive fingerprint sensor that captures at least one fingerprintwhen a user's finger (or fingers) approaches and/or contacts the coverelement 222.

The first circuit layer 226 may be attached to the bottom surface of thecover element 222 with an adhesive layer 230. Any suitable adhesive canbe used for the adhesive layer. For example, a pressure sensitiveadhesive layer may be used as the adhesive layer 230.

A compliant layer 232 is disposed below the first circuit layer 226. Inone embodiment, the compliant layer 232 includes an opening 234 formedin the compliant layer 232. The opening 234 exposes the top surface ofthe first circuit layer 226 and/or the biometric sensor 228 when thedevice stack 220 is assembled. In the illustrated embodiment, thecompliant layer 232 is positioned around an interior perimeter of thetrim 224 and/or around a peripheral edge of the cover element 222.Although depicted in a circular shape, the compliant layer 232 can haveany given shape and/or dimensions, such as a square or oval. Thecompliant layer 232 is shown as a continuous compliant layer in FIGS. 2Band 2C, but other embodiments are not limited to this configuration. Insome embodiments, multiple discrete compliant layers may be used in thedevice stack 220. Additionally, in some embodiments, the compliant layer232 does not include the opening 234 and the compliant layer 232 extendsacross at least a portion of the input device stack 220. For example,the compliant layer 232 may extend across the bottom surface of thecover element 222, the bottom surface of the first circuit layer 226, ora portion of the bottom surface of the cover element 222 (e.g., aroundthe peripheral edge of the cover element) and the bottom surface of thefirst circuit layer 226.

A second circuit layer 238 is positioned below the first circuit layer226. A flexible circuit and a circuit board are examples of a circuitlayer that can be used in the second circuit layer 238. In someembodiments, the second circuit layer 238 can include a first circuitsection 240 and a second circuit section 242. The first and secondcircuit sections 240, 242 can be electrically connected one anotherother.

The first circuit section 240 can include a first set of one or moreintensity sensor components that are included in an intensity sensor. Insome embodiments, the first circuit section 240 can be electricallyconnected to the first circuit layer 226. For example, when the firstcircuit layer 226 includes a biometric sensor 228, the biometric sensor228 may be electrically connected to the first circuit section 240 ofthe second circuit layer 238.

The second circuit section 242 can include additional circuitry, such assignal lines, circuit components, integrated circuits, and the like. Inone embodiment, the second circuit section 242 may include aboard-to-board connector 244 to electrically connect the second circuitlayer 238 to other circuitry in the electronic device. For example, thesecond circuit layer 238 can be operably connected to a processingdevice using the board-to-board connector 244. Additionally, oralternatively, the second circuit layer 238 may be operably connected tocircuitry that transmits signals (e.g., sense signals) received from theintensity sensor component(s) in the first circuit section 240 to aprocessing device. Additionally, or alternatively, the second circuitlayer 238 may be operably connected to circuitry that provides signals(e.g., drive signals, a reference signal) to the one or more intensitysensor components in the first circuit section 240.

In some embodiments, the first circuit section 240 of the second circuitlayer 238 may be attached to the bottom surface of the first circuitlayer 226 using an adhesive layer 236. In a non-limiting example, a dieattach film may be used to attach the first circuit section 240 to thebottom surface of the first circuit layer 226.

A third circuit layer 246 is disposed below the first circuit section240 of the second circuit layer 238. The third circuit layer 246 mayinclude a second set of one or more intensity sensor components that areincluded in an intensity sensor. The third circuit layer 246 issupported by and/or attached to a support element 248. In oneembodiment, the support element 248 is attached to the trim 224 toproduce an enclosure for the other components in the device stack 220.The support element 248 may be attached to the trim 224 using anysuitable attachment mechanism.

The first set of one or more intensity sensor components in the firstcircuit section 240 and the second set of one or more intensity sensorcomponents in the third circuit layer 246 together form an intensitysensor. The intensity sensor can use any suitable intensity sensingtechnology. Example sensing technologies include, but are not limitedto, capacitive, piezoelectric, piezoresistive, ultrasonic, and magnetic.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 2B and 2C, the intensity sensor is acapacitive force sensor. With a capacitive force sensor, the first setof one or more intensity sensor components can include a first set ofone or more electrodes 250 and the second set of one or more forcesensor components a second set of one or more electrodes 252. Althoughshown in a square shape in FIGS. 2B and 2C each electrode in the firstand second sets of one or more electrodes 250, 252 can have any givenshape (e.g., rectangles, circles). Additionally, the one or moreelectrodes in the first and second sets 250, 252 may be arranged in anygiven pattern (e.g., one or more rows and one or more columns).

FIGS. 2B and 2C show two electrodes in the first and second sets of oneor more electrodes 250, 252. However, other embodiments are not limitedto this configuration. The first and second sets of one or moreelectrodes 250, 252 may each be a single electrode or multiple discreteelectrodes. For example, if the first set of one or more electrodes is asingle electrode, the second set of one or more electrodes comprisesmultiple discrete electrodes. In some embodiments, the second set of oneor more electrodes can be a single electrode and the first set includesmultiple discrete electrodes. Alternatively, both the first and secondsets of one or more electrodes may each include multiple discreteelectrodes.

Each electrode in the first set of one or more electrodes 250 is alignedin at least one direction (e.g., vertically) with a respective electrodein the second set of one or more electrodes 252 to produce one or morecapacitors. When a force input is applied to the cover element 222(e.g., the input surface of the input device), at least one electrode inthe first set 250 moves closer to a respective electrode in the secondset 252, which varies the capacitance of the capacitor(s). A capacitancesignal sensed from each capacitor represents a capacitance measurementof that capacitor. A processing device (not shown) is configured toreceive the capacitance signal(s) and correlate the capacitancesignal(s) to an amount of intensity applied to the cover element 222. Insome embodiments the force sensor can replace a switch element anddifferent intensity thresholds can be used to determine activationevents.

In some embodiments, such as the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C, a switchelement 254 can be positioned below the support element 248. The switchelement 254 registers a user input when a force input applied to thecover element 222 exceeds a given amount of force (e.g., a forcethreshold associated with closing the distance between the first circuitsection 240 and the third circuit layer 246). Any suitable switchelement can be used. For example, the switch element 254 may be a domeswitch that collapses when the force input applied to the cover element222 exceeds the force threshold. When collapsed, the dome switchcompletes a circuit that is detected by a processing device andrecognized as a user input (e.g., a selection of an icon, function, orapplication). In one embodiment, the dome switch is arranged such thatthe apex of the collapsible dome is proximate to the bottom surface ofthe support plate 248. In another embodiment, the base of thecollapsible dome can be proximate to the bottom surface of the supportplate 248.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an example multifunction device with adisplay and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with someembodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments,device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer,a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device(such as a child's learning toy), a gaming system, or a control device(e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includesone or more processing units (CPU's) 310, one or more network or othercommunications interfaces 360, memory 370, and one or more communicationbuses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication buses 320optionally include circuitry (sometimes called a chipset) thatinterconnects and controls communications between system components.Device 300 includes input/output (I/O) interface 330 comprising display340, which is typically a touch-screen display. I/O interface 330 alsooptionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device)350 and touchpad 355, tactile output generator 357 for generatingtactile outputs on device 300 (e.g., similar to tactile outputgenerator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A), sensors 359(e.g., optical, acceleration, proximity, touch-sensitive, and/or contactintensity sensors similar to contact intensity sensor(s) 165 describedabove with reference to FIG. 1A). Memory 370 includes high-speed randomaccess memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM or other random access solidstate memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, suchas one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storagedevices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storagedevices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devicesremotely located from CPU(s) 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 storesprograms, modules, and data structures analogous to the programs,modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portablemultifunction device 100 (FIG. 1A), or a subset thereof. Furthermore,memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and datastructures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores drawingmodule 380, presentation module 382, word processing module 384, websitecreation module 386, disk authoring module 388, and/or spreadsheetmodule 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 (FIG.1A) optionally does not store these modules.

Each of the above identified elements in FIG. 3 are, optionally, storedin one or more of the previously mentioned memory devices. Each of theabove identified modules corresponds to a set of instructions forperforming a function described above. The above identified modules orprograms (i.e., sets of instructions) need not be implemented asseparate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus varioussubsets of these modules are, optionally, combined or otherwisere-arranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 370optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identifiedabove. Furthermore, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules anddata structures not described above.

Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”)that are, optionally, implemented on portable multifunction device 100.

FIG. 4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applicationson portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with someembodiments. Similar user interfaces are, optionally, implemented ondevice 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes thefollowing elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

-   -   Signal strength indicator(s) 402 for wireless communication(s),        such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;    -   Time 404;    -   Bluetooth indicator 405;    -   Battery status indicator 406;    -   Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:        -   Icon 416 for telephone module 138, labeled “Phone,” which            optionally includes an indicator 414 of the number of missed            calls or voicemail messages;        -   Icon 418 for e-mail client module 140, labeled “Mail,” which            optionally includes an indicator 410 of the number of unread            e-mails;        -   Icon 420 for browser module 147, labeled “Browser;” and        -   Icon 422 for video and music player module 152, also            referred to as iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152,            labeled “iPod;” and    -   Icons for other applications, such as:        -   Icon 424 for IM module 141, labeled “Messages;”        -   Icon 426 for calendar module 148, labeled “Calendar;”        -   Icon 428 for image management module 144, labeled “Photos;”        -   Icon 430 for camera module 143, labeled “Camera;”        -   Icon 432 for online video module 155, labeled “Online            Video;”        -   Icon 434 for stocks widget 149-2, labeled “Stocks;”        -   Icon 436 for map module 154, labeled “Maps;”        -   Icon 438 for weather widget 149-1, labeled “Weather;”        -   Icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4, labeled “Clock;”        -   Icon 442 for workout support module 142, labeled “Workout            Support;”        -   Icon 444 for notes module 153, labeled “Notes;” and        -   Icon 446 for a settings application or module, which            provides access to settings for device 100 and its various            applications 136.

It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A aremerely examples. For example, in some embodiments, icon 422 for videoand music player module 152 is labeled “Music” or “Music Player.” Otherlabels are, optionally, used for various application icons. In someembodiments, a label for a respective application icon includes a nameof an application corresponding to the respective application icon. Insome embodiments, a label for a particular application icon is distinctfrom a name of an application corresponding to the particularapplication icon.

FIG. 4B illustrates an example user interface on a device (e.g., device300, FIG. 3) with a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., a tablet ortouchpad 355, FIG. 3) that is separate from the display 450. Device 300also, optionally, includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g.,one or more of sensors 357) for detecting intensities of contacts ontouch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators359 for generating tactile outputs for a user of device 300.

Although many of the examples that follow will be given with referenceto inputs on touch screen display 112 (where the touch sensitive surfaceand the display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detectsinputs on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display,as shown in FIG. 4B. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface(e.g., 451 in FIG. 4B) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG. 4B) thatcorresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG. 4B) on the display(e.g., 450). In accordance with these embodiments, the device detectscontacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B) with the touch-sensitive surface451 at locations that correspond to respective locations on the display(e.g., in FIG. 4B, 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470).In this way, user inputs (e.g., contacts 460 and 462, and movementsthereof) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,451 in FIG. 4B) are used by the device to manipulate the user interfaceon the display (e.g., 450 in FIG. 4B) of the multifunction device whenthe touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. It should beunderstood that similar methods are, optionally, used for other userinterfaces described herein.

Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily withreference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, finger tap gestures,finger swipe gestures, etc.), it should be understood that, in someembodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are replaced with inputfrom another input device (e.g., a mouse based input or a stylus input).For example, a swipe gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouse click(e.g., instead of a contact) followed by movement of the cursor alongthe path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). Asanother example, a tap gesture is, optionally, replaced with a mouseclick while the cursor is located over the location of the tap gesture(e.g., instead of detection of the contact followed by ceasing to detectthe contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are simultaneouslydetected, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are,optionally, used simultaneously, or a mouse and finger contacts are,optionally, used simultaneously.

As used herein, the term “focus selector” is an input element thatindicates a current part of a user interface with which a user isinteracting. In some implementations that include a cursor or otherlocation marker, the cursor acts as a “focus selector,” so that when aninput (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface(e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B)while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., abutton, window, slider or other user interface element), the particularuser interface element is adjusted in accordance with the detectedinput. In some implementations that include a touch-screen display(e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or the touch screenin FIG. 4A) that enables direct interaction with user interface elementson the touch-screen display, a detected contact on the touch-screen actsas a “focus selector,” so that when an input (e.g., a press input by thecontact) is detected on the touch-screen display at a location of aparticular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider orother user interface element), the particular user interface element isadjusted in accordance with the detected input. In some implementations,focus is moved from one region of a user interface to another region ofthe user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor ormovement of a contact on a touch-screen display (e.g., by using a tabkey or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another button); inthese implementations, the focus selector moves in accordance withmovement of focus between different regions of the user interface.Without regard to the specific form taken by the focus selector, thefocus selector is generally the user interface element (or contact on atouch-screen display) that is controlled by the user so as tocommunicate the user's intended interaction with the user interface(e.g., by indicating, to the device, the element of the user interfacewith which the user is intending to interact). For example, the locationof a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, a contact, or a selection box) overa respective button while a press input is detected on thetouch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicatethat the user is intending to activate the respective button (as opposedto other user interface elements shown on a display of the device).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “intensity” of acontact on a touch-sensitive surface is the force or pressure (force perunit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact or a stylus contact) onthe touch-sensitive surface, or to a substitute (proxy) for the force orpressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of acontact has a range of values that includes at least four distinctvalues and more typically includes hundreds of distinct values (e.g., atleast 256). Intensity of a contact is, optionally, determined (ormeasured) using various approaches and various sensors or combinationsof sensors. For example, one or more force sensors underneath oradjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are, optionally, used to measureforce at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In someimplementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors arecombined (e.g., a weighted average or a sum) to determine an estimatedforce of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of a stylus is,optionally, used to determine a pressure of the stylus on thetouch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact areadetected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or changes thereto, thecapacitance of the touch-sensitive surface proximate to the contactand/or changes thereto, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitivesurface proximate to the contact and/or changes thereto are, optionally,used as a substitute for the force or pressure of the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the substitutemeasurements for contact force or pressure are used directly todetermine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., theintensity threshold is described in units corresponding to thesubstitute measurements). In some implementations, the substitutemeasurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimatedforce or pressure and the estimated force or pressure is used todetermine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., theintensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units ofpressure). Using the intensity of a contact as an attribute of a userinput allows for user access to additional device functionality that mayotherwise not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced-size devicewith limited real estate for displaying affordances (e.g., on atouch-sensitive display) and/or receiving user input (e.g., via atouch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or aphysical/mechanical control such as a knob or a button).

In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or moreintensity thresholds to determine whether an operation has beenperformed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has “clicked” onan icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensitythresholds are determined in accordance with software parameters (e.g.,the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholdsof particular physical actuators and can be adjusted without changingthe physical hardware of device 100). For example, a mouse “click”threshold of a trackpad or touch-screen display can be set to any of alarge range of predefined thresholds values without changing thetrackpad or touch-screen display hardware. Additionally, in someimplementations a user of the device is provided with software settingsfor adjusting one or more of the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., byadjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting aplurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system-level click“intensity” parameter).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristicintensity” of a contact is a characteristic of the contact based on oneor more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, thecharacteristic intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. Thecharacteristic intensity is, optionally, based on a predefined number ofintensity samples, or a set of intensity samples collected during apredetermined time period (e.g., 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10seconds) relative to a predefined event (e.g., after detecting thecontact, prior to detecting liftoff of the contact, before or afterdetecting a start of movement of the contact, prior to detecting an endof the contact, before or after detecting an increase in intensity ofthe contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in intensity ofthe contact). A characteristic intensity of a contact is, optionallybased on one or more of: a maximum value of the intensities of thecontact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an averagevalue of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value ofthe intensities of the contact, a value at the half maximum of theintensities of the contact, a value at the 90 percent maximum of theintensities of the contact, a value produced by low-pass filtering theintensity of the contact over a predefined period or starting at apredefined time, or the like. In some embodiments, the duration of thecontact is used in determining the characteristic intensity (e.g., whenthe characteristic intensity is an average of the intensity of thecontact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity iscompared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determinewhether an operation has been performed by a user. For example, the setof one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensitythreshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, a contactwith a characteristic intensity that does not exceed the first thresholdresults in a first operation, a contact with a characteristic intensitythat exceeds the first intensity threshold and does not exceed thesecond intensity threshold results in a second operation, and a contactwith a characteristic intensity that exceeds the second intensitythreshold results in a third operation. In some embodiments, acomparison between the characteristic intensity and one or moreintensity thresholds is used to determine whether or not to perform oneor more operations (e.g., whether to perform a respective option orforgo performing the respective operation) rather than being used todetermine whether to perform a first operation or a second operation.

In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified for purposesof determining a characteristic intensity. For example, atouch-sensitive surface may receive a continuous swipe contacttransitioning from a start location and reaching an end location (e.g.,a drag gesture), at which point the intensity of the contact increases.In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the endlocation may be based on only a portion of the continuous swipe contact,and not the entire swipe contact (e.g., only the portion of the swipecontact at the end location). In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithmmay be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior todetermining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example,the smoothing algorithm optionally includes one or more of: anunweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothingalgorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponentialsmoothing algorithm. In some circumstances, these smoothing algorithmseliminate narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contactfor purposes of determining a characteristic intensity.

The user interface figures described herein optionally include variousintensity diagrams that show the current intensity of the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds(e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT₀, a light pressintensity threshold IT_(L), a deep press intensity threshold IT_(D)(e.g., that is at least initially higher than I_(L)), and/or one or moreother intensity thresholds (e.g., an intensity threshold I_(H) that islower than I_(L))). This intensity diagram is typically not part of thedisplayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretationof the figures. In some embodiments, the light press intensity thresholdcorresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operationstypically associated with clicking a button of a physical mouse or atrackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity thresholdcorresponds to an intensity at which the device will perform operationsthat are different from operations typically associated with clicking abutton of a physical mouse or a trackpad. In some embodiments, when acontact is detected with a characteristic intensity below the lightpress intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact-detectionintensity threshold IT₀ below which the contact is no longer detected),the device will move a focus selector in accordance with movement of thecontact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an operationassociated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep pressintensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise stated, these intensitythresholds are consistent between different sets of user interfacefigures.

In some embodiments, the response of the device to inputs detected bythe device depends on criteria based on the contact intensity during theinput. For example, for some “light press” inputs, the intensity of acontact exceeding a first intensity threshold during the input triggersa first response. In some embodiments, the response of the device toinputs detected by the device depends on criteria that include both thecontact intensity during the input and time-based criteria. For example,for some “deep press” inputs, the intensity of a contact exceeding asecond intensity threshold during the input, greater than the firstintensity threshold for a light press, triggers a second response onlyif a delay time has elapsed between meeting the first intensitythreshold and meeting the second intensity threshold. This delay time istypically less than 200 ms in duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms,depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with thedelay time increasing as the second intensity threshold increases). Thisdelay time helps to avoid accidental recognition of deep press inputs.As another example, for some “deep press” inputs, there is areduced-sensitivity time period that occurs after the time at which thefirst intensity threshold is met. During the reduced-sensitivity timeperiod, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporaryincrease in the second intensity threshold also helps to avoidaccidental deep press inputs. For other deep press inputs, the responseto detection of a deep press input does not depend on time-basedcriteria.

In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholdsand/or the corresponding outputs vary based on one or more factors, suchas user settings, contact motion, input timing, application running,rate at which the intensity is applied, number of concurrent inputs,user history, environmental factors (e.g., ambient noise), focusselector position, and the like. Example factors are described in U.S.patent application Ser. Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which areincorporated by reference herein in their entireties.

For example, FIG. 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 thatchanges over time based in part on the intensity of touch input 476 overtime. Dynamic intensity threshold 480 is a sum of two components, firstcomponent 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time p1from when touch input 476 is initially detected, and second component478 that trails the intensity of touch input 476 over time. The initialhigh intensity threshold of first component 474 reduces accidentaltriggering of a “deep press” response, while still allowing an immediate“deep press” response if touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity.Second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press”response by gradual intensity fluctuations of in a touch input. In someembodiments, when touch input 476 satisfies dynamic intensity threshold480 (e.g., at point 481 in FIG. 4C), the “deep press” response istriggered.

FIG. 4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (e.g.,intensity threshold I_(D)). FIG. 4D also illustrates two other intensitythresholds: a first intensity threshold I_(H) and a second intensitythreshold I_(L). In FIG. 4D, although touch input 484 satisfies thefirst intensity threshold I_(H) and the second intensity threshold I_(L)prior to time p2, no response is provided until delay time p2 haselapsed at time 482. Also in FIG. 4D, dynamic intensity threshold 486decays over time, with the decay starting at time 488 after a predefineddelay time p1 has elapsed from time 482 (when the response associatedwith the second intensity threshold I_(L) was triggered). This type ofdynamic intensity threshold reduces accidental triggering of a responseassociated with the dynamic intensity threshold I_(D) immediately after,or concurrently with, triggering a response associated with a lowerintensity threshold, such as the first intensity threshold I_(H) or thesecond intensity threshold I_(L).

FIG. 4E illustrate yet another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (e.g.,intensity threshold I_(D)). In FIG. 4E, a response associated with theintensity threshold I_(L) is triggered after the delay time p2 haselapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. Concurrently,dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after the predefined delay timep1 has elapsed from when touch input 490 is initially detected. So adecrease in intensity of touch input 490 after triggering the responseassociated with the intensity threshold I_(L), followed by an increasein the intensity of touch input 490, without releasing touch input 490,can trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold I_(D)(e.g., at time 494) even when the intensity of touch input 490 is belowanother intensity threshold, for example, the intensity threshold I_(L).

An increase of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensitybelow the light press intensity threshold IT_(L) to an intensity betweenthe light press intensity threshold IT_(L) and the deep press intensitythreshold ITS is sometimes referred to as a “light press” input. Anincrease of characteristic intensity of the contact from an intensitybelow the deep press intensity threshold ITS to an intensity above thedeep press intensity threshold ITS is sometimes referred to as a “deeppress” input. An increase of characteristic intensity of the contactfrom an intensity below the contact-detection intensity threshold IT₀ toan intensity between the contact-detection intensity threshold IT₀ andthe light press intensity threshold IT_(L) is sometimes referred to asdetecting the contact on the touch-surface. A decrease of characteristicintensity of the contact from an intensity above the contact-detectionintensity threshold IT₀ to an intensity below the contact-detectionintensity threshold IT₀ is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff ofthe contact from the touch-surface. In some embodiments IT₀ is zero. Insome embodiments, IT₀ is greater than zero. In some illustrations ashaded circle or oval is used to represent intensity of a contact on thetouch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, a circle or oval withoutshading is used represent a respective contact on the touch-sensitivesurface without specifying the intensity of the respective contact.

In some embodiments, described herein, one or more operations areperformed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a respectivepress input or in response to detecting the respective press inputperformed with a respective contact (or a plurality of contacts), wherethe respective press input is detected based at least in part ondetecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality ofcontacts) above a press-input intensity threshold. In some embodiments,the respective operation is performed in response to detecting theincrease in intensity of the respective contact above the press-inputintensity threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on a“down stroke” of the respective press input). In some embodiments, thepress input includes an increase in intensity of the respective contactabove the press-input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease inintensity of the contact below the press-input intensity threshold, andthe respective operation is performed in response to detecting thesubsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contact below thepress-input threshold (e.g., the respective operation is performed on an“up stroke” of the respective press input).

In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoidaccidental inputs sometimes termed “jitter,” where the device defines orselects a hysteresis intensity threshold with a predefined relationshipto the press-input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensitythreshold is X intensity units lower than the press-input intensitythreshold or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or somereasonable proportion of the press-input intensity threshold). Thus, insome embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity ofthe respective contact above the press-input intensity threshold and asubsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the hysteresisintensity threshold that corresponds to the press-input intensitythreshold, and the respective operation is performed in response todetecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the respective contactbelow the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., the respective operationis performed on an “up stroke” of the respective press input).Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input is detected only whenthe device detects an increase in intensity of the contact from anintensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensityat or above the press-input intensity threshold and, optionally, asubsequent decrease in intensity of the contact to an intensity at orbelow the hysteresis intensity, and the respective operation isperformed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., the increasein intensity of the contact or the decrease in intensity of the contact,depending on the circumstances).

For ease of explanation, the description of operations performed inresponse to a press input associated with a press-input intensitythreshold or in response to a gesture including the press input are,optionally, triggered in response to detecting: an increase in intensityof a contact above the press-input intensity threshold, an increase inintensity of a contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensitythreshold to an intensity above the press-input intensity threshold, adecrease in intensity of the contact below the press-input intensitythreshold, or a decrease in intensity of the contact below thehysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press-inputintensity threshold. Additionally, in examples where an operation isdescribed as being performed in response to detecting a decrease inintensity of a contact below the press-input intensity threshold, theoperation is, optionally, performed in response to detecting a decreasein intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity thresholdcorresponding to, and lower than, the press-input intensity threshold.As described above, in some embodiments, the triggering of theseresponses also depends on time-based criteria being met (e.g., a delaytime has elapsed between a first intensity threshold being met and asecond intensity threshold being met).

User Interfaces and Associated Processes

Attention is now directed towards embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”)and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronicdevice, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300, with adisplay, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile outputgenerators for generating tactile outputs, and (optionally) one or moresensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitivesurface.

These user interfaces and associated processes provide new, improvedways to use haptic feedback to:

-   -   indicate hidden thresholds;    -   perform scrubbing, such as index bar scrubbing, variable rate        scrubbing, and slider scrubbing;    -   enhance rubber band effects;    -   drag and drop objects;    -   indicate device orientation; and    -   scroll movable user interface components that represent        selectable options.

FIGS. 5A-5DK illustrate example user interfaces for providing hapticfeedback (optionally, in conjunction with visual feedback) indicatingcrossing of a threshold (e.g., moving past a respective thresholdposition or moving for more than a respective threshold amount ofmovement) for triggering or canceling an operation associated with auser interface item. The user interfaces in these figures are used toillustrate the processes described below, including the processes inFIGS. 20A-20G. For convenience of explanation, some of the embodimentswill be discussed with reference to operations performed on a devicewith a touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, thefocus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, arepresentative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g.,a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with arespective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected onthe touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operationsare, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separatetouch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on thetouch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shownin the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

FIGS. 5A-5W illustrate providing tactile outputs in conjunction withproviding visual feedback when meeting a hidden threshold for triggeringan operation (e.g., changing read/unread status of an e-mail item) in amail application.

FIG. 5A illustrates a user interface 5002 for a mail application thatincludes a list of e-mail summary items, including e-mail summary item5004, e-mail summary item 5006, and e-mail summary item 5008. An e-mailsummary item includes, e.g.:

-   -   sender information 5010,    -   a subject line 5012,    -   an indication of e-mail content (e.g., truncated e-mail content)        5014,    -   a time at which the e-mail was sent 5016    -   a control 5018 for viewing an e-mail that corresponds to the        e-mail summary item, and    -   an unread mail indicator 5020 (e.g., a dot indicating that the        e-mail corresponding to the e-mail summary item has an unread        status).

FIGS. 5B-5I illustrate a process to change the status of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5006 from “unread” to “read.”

In FIG. 5B, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5006,such as touch-down of contact 5022 on touch screen 112. In response todetecting the touch-down of contact 5022 on touch screen 112 on e-mailsummary item 5006, e-mail summary item 5006 is visually distinguished(e.g., highlighted, as shown) to indicate that e-mail summary item 5006is selected and/or to distinguish selected e-mail summary item 5006 fromnon-selected first-email summary item 5004 and e-mail summary item 5008.Contact 5022 moves along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow5024.

In FIG. 5C, contact 5022 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5024. As contact 5022 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5024,e-mail summary item 5006 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5022, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5024, graduallyrevealing (e.g., from the left edge of user interface 5002)content-marking indicator 5026. For example, because e-mail summary item5006 is selected, e-mail summary item 5006 is “attached” to contact 5022such that e-mail summary item 5006 moves with contact 5022. Contact 5022continues to move along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow5028.

In FIG. 5D, contact 5022 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5028. As contact 5022 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5028,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5022, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026, and gradually revealing marking indicator tray 5030.Contact 5022 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5006 asindicated by arrow 5032.

In FIG. 5E, contact 5022 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5032. As contact 5022 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5032,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5022, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026 and marking indicator tray 5030. Contact 5022 continuesto move along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow 5034.

In FIG. 5F, contact 5022 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5034. As contact 5022 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5034,movement of contact 5022 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5022 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold, orreaches a threshold position in the user interface). When movement ofcontact 5022 moves past the threshold position (e.g., a thresholdposition that is not visually marked) in the user interface, the deviceproduces tactile output 5036 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, asillustrated by indicator 5036-a and waveform 5036-b). In addition, whencontact 5022 moves past the threshold position in the user interface, ananimation is started showing the content-marking indicator 5026 suddenlyexpands in the direction of the movement of the contact 5022 to fill upmarking indicator tray 5030.

In FIGS. 5G-5I, in response to lift-off of contact 5022 from touchscreen 112 when movement of contact 5022 has moved past the thresholdposition as described above with regard to FIG. 5F, e-mail summary item5006 is released and returns to its original position in the userinterface, and content-marking indicator 5026 is concealed by emailsummary item 5006. The status of an e-mail that corresponds to seconde-mail summary 5006 is changed to “read,” and second e-mail summary 5006is no longer marked as unread. In FIG. 51, the unread mail indicator5020 is no longer displayed in second e-mail summary 5006.

FIGS. 5J-5P illustrate providing tactile outputs in conjunction withproviding visual feedback when meeting a hidden threshold for triggeringan operation (e.g., changing read/unread status of an e-mail item) in amail application.

In FIG. 5J, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5006,such as touch-down of contact 5038 on touch screen 112. Contact 5038moves along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow 5040.

In FIG. 5K, contact 5038 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5040. As contact 5038 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5040,e-mail summary item 5006 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5038, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5040, graduallyrevealing content-marking indicator 5026. Contact 5038 continues to movealong e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow 5042.

In FIG. 5L, contact 5038 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5042. As contact 5038 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5042,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5038, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026, and gradually revealing marking indicator tray 5030.Contact 5038 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5006 asindicated by arrow 5044.

In FIG. 5M, contact 5038 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5044. As contact 5038 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5044,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5038, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026 and marking indicator tray 5030. Contact 5038 continuesto move along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow 5046.

In FIG. 5N, contact 5038 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5046. As contact 5038 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5046,movement of contact 5038 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5038 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or pasta threshold position in the user interface). When movement of contact5038 meets the movement threshold criteria, the device produces tactileoutput 5050 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated byindicator 5050-a and waveform 5050-b). In addition, the device starts ananimation showing content-marking indicator 5026 suddenly expands in thedirection of the movement of the contact 5038 to fill marking indicatortray 5030. Contact 5038 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5006as indicated by arrow 5048.

In FIG. 5O, in response to lift-off of contact 5038 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5038 has met the movement thresholdcriteria described above with regard to FIG. 5N, e-mail summary item5006 is released to conceal content-marking indicator 5026 again. Thestatus of the e-mail that corresponds to second e-mail summary 5006 ischanged to “unread,” and second e-mail summary 5006 is marked unread. InFIG. 5P, the unread mail indicator 5020 is redisplayed in second e-mailsummary 5006.

FIGS. 5Q-5W illustrate providing tactile outputs in conjunction withproviding visual feedback when meeting a hidden threshold for triggeringan operation (e.g., archiving an e-mail item) in a mail application.

In FIG. 5Q, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5006,such as touch-down of contact 5052 on touch screen 112. Contact 5052moves along e-mail summary item 5006 as indicated by arrow 5054.

In FIG. 5R, contact 5052 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5054. As contact 5052 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5054,e-mail summary item 5006 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5054, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5054, graduallyrevealing (e.g., from the right edge of user interface 5002) contentmenu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5052 continues to move along a path indicatedby arrow 5062.

In FIG. 5S, contact 5052 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5062. As contact 5052 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5062,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5052, continuing to gradually reveal content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5052 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5006 as indicated by arrow 5064.

In FIG. 5T, contact 5052 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5064. As contact 5052 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5064,e-mail summary item 5006 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5052, continuing to gradually reveal content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5052 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5006 as indicated by arrow 5066.

In FIG. 5U, contact 5052 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5066. As contact 5052 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5066,movement of contact 5052 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5052 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or pasta threshold position). When movement of contact 5052 meets the movementthreshold criteria, the device produces tactile output 5068 (e.g.,MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5068-a andwaveform 5068-b) and archive content affordance 5060 suddenly expands inthe direction of the movement of the contact 5052 (e.g., moves fasterthan the movement of the contact and/or moves faster than the previousmovement of archive content affordance 5060) to cover content menuaffordance 5056 and flag content affordance 5058.

In FIG. 5V, in response to lift-off of contact 5052 from touch screen112, e-mail summary 5006 is released. In FIGS. 5V-5W, in response tolift-off of contact 5052 when movement of contact 5052 has met movementthreshold criteria described above with regard to FIG. 5U, second e-mailsummary 5006 is archived (e.g., as indicated by the animation in FIGS.5U-5W, in which third e-mail summary 5008 and the e-mail summaries belowthird e-mail summary 5008 gradually rise from the bottom of userinterface 5002 while the vertical size of second e-mail summary 5006gradually decreases until second e-mail summary 5006 is no longerdisplayed). In FIG. 5W, second e-mail summary 5006 is not displayed inuser interface 5002, indicating that the e-mail that corresponds tosecond e-mail summary 5006 has been archived.

FIGS. 5X-5AF illustrate a process for a process for providing tactileoutputs in conjunction with providing visual feedback when meeting anoperation triggering threshold for an operation (e.g., changingread/unread status of an e-mail item) and subsequently meeting anoperation canceling threshold such that the operation is not performed.During the process, a contact moves in a first direction to pass athreshold position for changing the read status of an e-mail andsubsequently moves in a second direction to pass a threshold positionfor cancelling the operation for changing the read status of the e-mailbefore lift-off.

In FIG. 5X, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5070 on touch screen 112. In response todetecting the touch-down of contact 5070 on touch screen 112 on e-mailsummary item 5008, e-mail summary item 5008 is visually distinguished(e.g., highlighted, as shown) to indicate that e-mail summary item 5008is selected and/or to distinguish selected e-mail summary item 5008 fromnon-selected first-email 5004. Contact 5070 moves along e-mail summaryitem 5008 as indicated by arrow 5072.

In FIG. 5Y, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5072. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5072,e-mail summary item 5008 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5070, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5072, graduallyrevealing (e.g., from the left edge of user interface 502)content-marking indicator 5026. Contact 5070 continues to move alonge-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5074.

In FIG. 5Z, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5074. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5074,e-mail summary item 5008 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5070, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026, and gradually revealing marking indicator tray 5030.Contact 5070 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5008 asindicated by arrow 5076.

In Figure SAA, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5076. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5076,e-mail summary item 5008 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5070, continuing to gradually reveal content-markingindicator 5026 and marking indicator tray 5030. Contact 5070 continuesto move along e-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5078.

In FIG. 5AB, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5078. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5078,movement of contact 5070 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g., movesby a distance exceeding a movement threshold or moves past a thresholdposition in the user interface). When contact 5070 meets the movementthreshold criteria, the device produces tactile output 5080 (e.g.,MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5080-a andwaveform 5080-b). In addition, the device displays an animation showingcontent-marking indicator 5026 suddenly expands in the direction of themovement of the contact 5070 (e.g., moves faster than the movement ofthe contact and/or moves faster than the previous movement ofcontent-marking indicator 5026) to fill marking indicator tray 5030.After movement of contact 5070 has moved past the threshold position forchanging the read/unread status of e-mail represented by e-mail summaryitem 5008, contact 5070 reverses direction and moves along e-mailsummary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5082.

In FIG. 5AC, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5082. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5082,e-mail summary item 5008 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5070. In response to the movement of contact 5070 along the pathindicated by arrow 5082, content-marking indicator 5026 and markingindicator tray 5030 gradually “retreat” toward the left edge of the userinterface 5002 (e.g., the size of content-marking indicator 5026 andmarking indicator tray 5030 is shown gradually decreasing in size).Contact 5070 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5008 asindicated by arrow 5084.

In FIG. 5AD, contact 5070 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5084. As contact 5070 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5086,movement of contact 5070 meets reversal criteria (e.g., reverse movementof contact 5070 exceeds a reverse movement threshold or moves past anoperation cancelation threshold position that is to the left of theoperation triggering threshold position). When contact 5070 moves pastthe operation cancelation threshold position in the user interface, thedevice provides tactile output 5086 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain:0.55, as illustrated by indicator 5086-a and waveform 5086-b) toindicate that the threshold for canceling the operation has been met. Inaddition, the device displays an animation showing content-markingindicator 5026 suddenly shrinks in the direction of the movement of thecontact 5070 (e.g., moves faster than the movement of the contact and/ormoves faster than the previous movement of content-marking indicator5026) and marking indicator tray 5030 is re-displayed. In someembodiments, contact 5070 continues to move along e-mail summary item5008 as indicated by arrow 5088.

In FIG. 5AE, in response to lift-off of contact 5070 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5070 has met reversal criteria describedabove with regard to FIG. 5AD, content-marking indicator 5026 isreleased. The status of the e-mail that corresponds to the third e-mailsummary 5008 is maintained as “unread,” as indicated by unread mailindicator 5020. In FIGS. 5AE-5AF, e-mail summary 5008 andcontent-marking indicator 5026 continues to move toward the left edge ofthe user interface 5002 (e.g., the size of content-marking indicator5026 continues to decrease). In FIG. 5AF, display of the unread mailindicator 5020 is maintained in third e-mail summary 5008. In otherwords, the operation to change the read/unread status of the e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary 5008 is not performed upon lift-off ofcontact 5070 because contact 5070 retreated past the operationcancelation threshold position before lift-off, after having advancedpast the operation triggering threshold position.

FIGS. 5AG-5AP illustrate a process for providing tactile outputs inconjunction with providing visual feedback when meeting an operationtriggering threshold for an operation (e.g., archiving an email) andsubsequently meeting an operation canceling threshold such that theoperation is not performed. During the process, a contact moves in afirst direction to pass a first threshold position for archiving ane-mail and subsequently moves in a second direction to pass a secondthreshold position for cancelling the operation for archiving the e-mailbefore lift-off.

In FIG. 5AG, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5090 on touch screen 112. Contact 5090moves along e-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5092.

In FIG. 5AH, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5092. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5092,e-mail summary item 5008 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5090, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5092, graduallyrevealing (e.g., from the right edge of user interface 5002) contentmenu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5090 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5008 as indicated by arrow 5094.

In FIG. 5AI, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5094. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5094,e-mail summary item 5008 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5090, continuing to gradually reveal content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5090 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5008 as indicated by arrow 5096.

In FIG. 5AJ, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5096. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5096,movement of contact 5090 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g., movesby a distance exceeding a movement threshold or moves past a thresholdposition in the user interface). When movement of contact 5090 meets themovement threshold criteria, the device produces tactile output 5089(e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5098-aand waveform 5098-b) to indicate that the contact has moved past theoperation triggering threshold position. In addition, the devicedisplays an animation showing archive content affordance 5060 suddenlyexpands in the direction of the movement of the contact 5090 (e.g.,moves faster than the movement of the contact and/or moves faster thanthe previous movement of archive content affordance 5060) to covermarking content menu affordance 5056 and flag content affordance 5058.Contact 5090 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5008 asindicated by arrow 5100.

In FIG. 5AK, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5100. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5100,archive content affordance 5060 continues to move in response to themovement of the contact 5090. Contact 5090 reverses direction and movesalong e-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5102.

In FIG. 5AL, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5102. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5102,archive content affordance 5060 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5090. In response to the movement of contact 5090 along the pathindicated by arrow 5102, archive content affordance 5060 gradually“retreats” toward the right edge of the user interface 5002 (e.g., thesize of archive content affordance 5060 is shown gradually decreasing insize). Contact 5090 continues to move along e-mail summary item 5008 asindicated by arrow 5104.

In FIG. 5AM, contact 5090 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5104. As contact 5090 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5104,movement of contact 5090 meets reversal criteria (e.g., reverse movementof contact 5090 exceeds a reverse movement threshold or moves past athreshold position for canceling the operation). When contact 5090 meetsthe reversal criteria, the device produces tactile output 5106 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.55, as illustrated by indicator 5016-a andwaveform 5036-b) to indicate that the contact has moved past theoperation cancellation threshold position. In addition, the devicedisplays an animation showing archive content affordance 5060 suddenlyshrinks in the direction of the movement of the contact 5090 (e.g.,moves faster than the movement of the contact and/or moves faster thanthe previous movement of archive content affordance 5060) and flagcontent affordance 5058 and archive content affordance 5060 arere-displayed. In some embodiments, contact 5090 continues to moves alonge-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5108.

In FIG. 5AN, in response to lift-off of contact 5090 from touch screen112 after reverse movement by distance that exceeds the reverse movementthreshold (e.g., after contact 5090 has moved in the reverse directionpast the threshold position for cancelling the operation), as describedabove with regard to FIG. 5AM, e-mail summary 5008, affordances 5056,5058, and 5060 are released. The status of the e-mail that correspondsto the third e-mail summary 5008 remains as un-archived. In FIGS.5AO-5AP, content menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, andarchive content affordance 5060 continue to “retreat” toward the rightedge of the user interface 5002 (e.g., the size of content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060 decrease). In FIG. 5AP, third e-mail summary 5008 isdisplayed (e.g., remains un-archived) in the list of e-mail summaries inuser interface 5002.

FIGS. 5AQ-5AX illustrate a process for revealing and maintaining displayof content menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, andarchive content affordance 5060 to allow a selection input to bereceived at one of these affordances, without generating tactile outputs(e.g., because movement threshold criteria are not met).

In FIG. 5AQ, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5110 on touch screen 112. Contact 5110moves along e-mail summary item 5008 as indicated by arrow 5112.

In FIG. 5AR, contact 5110 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5112. As contact 5110 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5112,e-mail summary item 5008 moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5110, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5112, graduallyrevealing (e.g., from the right edge of user interface 5002) contentmenu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5110 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5008 as indicated by arrow 5114.

In FIG. 5AS, contact 5110 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5114. As contact 5110 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5114,e-mail summary item 5008 continues to move in response to the movementof the contact 5110, continuing to gradually reveal content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. Contact 5110 continues to move along e-mail summaryitem 5008 as indicated by arrow 5116.

In FIG. 5AT, contact 5110 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5116 and lifted off from touch screen 112. Prior to lift-off, movementof contact 5110 satisfied parking threshold criteria (e.g., contact 5110moved by a distance in excess of a parking threshold distance orposition for parking content menu affordance 5056, flag contentaffordance 5058, and archive content affordance 5060) without satisfyingthe movement threshold criteria (e.g., contact 5110 did not move by adistance in excess of a movement threshold for archiving the e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5008). In response to the lift-off ofthe contact 5110 from touch screen 112, content menu affordance 5056,flag content affordance 5058, and archive content affordance 5060 are“parked” (e.g., display of content menu affordance 5056, flag contentaffordance 5058, and archive content affordance 5060 is maintained).When display of content menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance5058, and archive content affordance 5060 is maintained, subsequentinput (e.g., a tap input) received at content menu affordance 5056, flagcontent affordance 5058, or archive content affordance 5060 performs anoperation associated with the respective affordance. For example, inresponse to a subsequent input received on content menu affordance 5056,a menu of action items is displayed; in response to subsequent inputreceived on flag content affordance 5058, the status of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5008 is toggled to a flagged status(or un-flagged status); and in response to subsequent input received onarchive content affordance 5060, the e-mail corresponding to e-mailsummary item 5008 is deleted.

In FIG. 5AU, the device detects an input, such as a tap input by contact5118, on flag content affordance 5058. In response to the input bycontact 5118, the status of the e-mail corresponding to e-mail summaryitem 5008 is toggled to a flagged status. In response to lift-off ofcontact 5118, content menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance5058, and archive content affordance 5060 “retreat” toward the rightedge of the user interface 5002 (e.g., the size of content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060 decrease), as illustrated in FIGS. 5AV-5AX. Flag marker5120 is displayed in e-mail summary item 5008, as shown in 5AX, toindicate that the e-mail corresponding to e-mail summary item 5008 has aflagged status.

FIGS. 5AY-5BI illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5008 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input) and for changing the read/unreadstatus of the e-mail in response to a second portion of the input.During the process, the device generates tactile output in conjunctionwith displaying visual feedback when the threshold for displaying thepreview is met, and when the threshold for triggering the change of theread/unread status of the e-mail is met.

FIG. 5AY displays a list of e-mail summary items including e-mailsummary item 5004, e-mail summary item 5008, and fourth e-mail summaryitem 5009. In FIG. 5AY, e-mail summary item 5008 includes unread mailindicator 5020.

In FIG. 5AZ, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5122 on touch screen 112. Third e-mailsummary item 5008 is visually distinguished (e.g., highlighted, asshown) to indicate that e-mail summary item 5008 is selected and/or todistinguish selected e-mail summary item 5008 from non-selectedfirst-email summary item 5004.

A characteristic intensity of contact 5122 increases from below a hintintensity threshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFIG. 5AZ, to a characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a lightpress intensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124of FIG. 5BA. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5122 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in FIG. 5BA, selected e-mail summary item 5008 isshown un-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of userinterface 5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5122 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BA, toabove IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BB. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5122 increases above IT_(L), asshown in FIG. 5BB, the device produces tactile output 5126 (e.g.,MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5126-a andwaveform 5126-b) to indicate that the threshold intensity for displayinga preview associated with e-mail summary 5008 is met by the input. Inaddition, the device displays preview 5128 of the e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5008.

In Figure SBC, while preview 5128 is displayed, contact 5122 moves alonga path as indicated by arrow 5130 (e.g., while preview 5128 is displayedunderneath of contact 5122).

In FIG. 5BD, contact 5122 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5130. As contact 5122 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5130,preview 5128 continues to move in response to the movement of thecontact 5122, gradually revealing (e.g., from beneath preview 5128)content-marking indicator 5132. Contact 5122 continues to move along apath over preview 5128 as indicated by arrow 5134.

In FIG. 5BE, contact 5122 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5134. As contact 5122 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5134,preview 5128 continues to move in response to the movement of thecontact 5122, continuing to reveal content-marking indicator 5132.Contact 5122 continues to move along a path over preview 5128 asindicated by arrow 5136.

In FIG. 5BF, contact 5122 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5136. As contact 5122 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5136,movement of contact 5122 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5122 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or pasta threshold position) for triggering the operation for changing theread/unread status of the e-mail item. When movement of contact 5122meets the movement threshold criteria, the device produces tactileoutput 5138 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated byindicator 5138-a and waveform 5138-b) to indicate that the movementthreshold criteria are met. In addition, the device changes theappearance of content-marking indicator 5132 (e.g., the coloration ofcontent-marking indicator 5132 is inverted) to indicate that, onlift-off of the contact, the status of the e-mail that corresponds toe-mail summary item 5008 will change from “unread” to “read.”

In FIG. 5BG, in response to lift-off of contact 5122 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5122 has met the movement thresholdcriteria, as described above with regard to FIG. 5BF, preview 5128 isreleased. In FIGS. 5BG-5BI, display of preview 5128 is replaced by thelist of e-mail summary items (e.g., preview 5128 continues sliding tothe right until preview 5128 is no longer visible in user interface 5002and the list of e-mail summary items is re-displayed).

In FIG. 5BI, the unread mail indicator 5020 is no longer displayed inthird e-mail summary 5008.

FIGS. 5BJ-5BR illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5008 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input) and for changing the read/unreadstatus of the e-mail in response to a second portion of the input.During the process, the device generates tactile output in conjunctionwith displaying visual feedback when the threshold for displaying thepreview is met, and when the threshold for triggering the change of theread/unread status of the e-mail is met.

In FIG. 5BJ, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5140 on touch screen 112. A characteristicintensity of contact 5140 increases from below a hint intensitythreshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BJ, toa characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a light pressintensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFigure SBK. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5140 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in Figure SBK, selected e-mail summary item 5008is shown un-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of userinterface 5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5140 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of Figure SBK,to above IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BL.When the characteristic intensity of contact 5140 increases aboveIT_(L), as shown in FIG. 5BL, the device produces tactile output 5142(e.g., MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5142-aand waveform 5142-b) and the device displays a preview 5128 of thee-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5008. Contact 5140 movesalong a path on preview panel 5128 as indicated by arrow 5144.

In FIG. 5BM, while preview 5128 is displayed, contact 5140 moves along apath over preview 5128 as indicated by arrow 5144.

In FIG. 5BN, contact 5140 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5144. As contact 5140 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5144,preview 5128 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5140,gradually revealing (e.g., from beneath preview 5128) content-markingindicator 5132. Contact 5140 continues to move along a path over preview5128 as indicated by arrow 5146.

In FIG. 5B0, contact 5140 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5146. As contact 5140 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5146,movement of contact 5140 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5140 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or movespast a threshold position in the user interface) for triggering theoperation to change the read/unread status of the email. When movementof contact 5140 meets the movement threshold criteria, the deviceproduces tactile output 5148 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, asillustrated by indicator 5148-a and waveform 5148-b) to indicate thatthe threshold for displaying the preview corresponding to e-mail summary5008 is met. In addition, the device changes the appearance ofcontent-marking indicator 5132 (e.g., the coloration of content-markingindicator 5132 is inverted) to indicate that, on lift-off, the status ofthe e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5008 will change from“read” to “unread.”

In FIG. 5BP, in response to lift-off of contact 5140 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5140 has met the movement thresholdcriteria, as described above with regard to FIG. 5B0, preview 5128 isreleased. In FIGS. 5BP-5BS, display of preview 5128 is replaced by thelist of e-mail summary items (e.g., preview 5128 continues sliding tothe right until preview 5128 is no longer visible in user interface5002, as shown in FIG. 5BQ, and the list of e-mail summary items isre-displayed, as shown in FIG. 5BR).

In FIG. 5BR, the unread mail indicator 5020 is displayed in third e-mailsummary 5008.

FIGS. 5BS-5CA illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5008 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input) and for archiving the e-mail inresponse to a second portion of the input. During the process, thedevice generates tactile output in conjunction with displaying visualfeedback when the threshold for displaying the preview is met, and whenthe threshold for triggering the operation for archiving the e-mail ismet.

In FIG. 5BS, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5008,such as touch-down of contact 5150 on touch screen 112. A characteristicintensity of contact 5150 increases from below a hint intensitythreshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BS, toa characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a light pressintensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFIG. 5BT. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5150 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in FIG. 5BT, selected e-mail summary item 5008 isshown un-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of userinterface 5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5150 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BT, toabove IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5BU. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5150 increases above IT_(L), asshown in FIG. 5BU, the device produces tactile output 5152 (e.g.,MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5152-a andwaveform 5152-b) and the device displays preview 5128 of the e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5008. While preview 5128 isdisplayed, contact 5150 moves along a path indicated by arrow 5157.

In FIG. 5BV, while preview 5128 is displayed, contact 5150 moves along apath over preview 5128 as indicated by arrow 5154.

In FIG. 5BW, contact 5150 has moved along a path indicated by arrow5154. As contact 5150 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5154,preview 5128 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5150,e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5154, gradually revealing (e.g.,from beneath preview 5128) archiving indicator 5132. Contact 5150continues to move along a path over preview 5128 as indicated by arrow5158.

In FIG. 5BX, contact 5150 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5158. As contact 5150 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5158,preview 5128 continues to move in response to the movement of thecontact 5150, e.g., along the path indicated by arrow 5158, continuingto reveal archiving indicator 5156. Contact 5150 continues to move alonga path on preview 5128 as indicated by arrow 5160.

In FIG. 5BY, contact 5150 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5160. As contact 5150 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5160,movement of contact 5150 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5150 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or movespast a threshold position in the user interface). When movement ofcontact 5150 meets the movement threshold criteria, the device producestactile output 5162 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustratedby indicator 5162-a and waveform 5162-b). In addition, the devicechanges the appearance of archiving indicator 5156 (e.g., the colorationof archiving indicator 5132 is inverted) to indicate that, on lift-offof contact 5150, the e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5008will be archived.

In FIG. 5BZ, in response to lift-off of contact 5150 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5150 has met the movement thresholdcriteria, as described above with regard to FIG. 5BY, preview 5128 isreleased. In FIGS. 5BZ-5CA, display of preview 5128 is replaced by thelist of e-mail summary items (e.g., preview 5128 continues sliding tothe right until preview 5128 is no longer visible in user interface5002, as shown in FIG. 5BZ). In FIGS. 5CA-5CC, the list of e-mailsummary items is animated to indicate a gap in the former location ofe-mail summary item 5008 that gradually closes to indicate that e-mailsummary item 5008 has been archived. In FIG. 5CB, e-mail summary item5004 is located next to fourth e-mail summary item 5009.

FIGS. 5CC-5CM illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5004 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input), for meeting an operation triggeringthreshold in response to a second portion of the input (e.g., a draginput in a first direction) and subsequently meeting an operationcancellation threshold in response a third portion of the input (e.g., adrag input in a second direction). During the process, the devicegenerates tactile output in conjunction with displaying visual feedbackwhen the threshold for displaying the preview is met, when the thresholdfor triggering the operation for changing the read/unread status of thee-mail is met, and when the threshold for canceling the operation forchanging the read/unread status of the e-mail is met.

In FIG. 5CC, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5004,such as touch-down of contact 5164 on touch screen 112.

A characteristic intensity of contact 5164 increases from below a hintintensity threshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFIG. 5CC, to a characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a lightpress intensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124of FIG. 5CD. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5164 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in FIG. 5CD, selected e-mail summary item 5004 isshown un-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of userinterface 5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5164 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5CD, toabove IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5CE. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5164 increases above IT_(L), asshown in FIG. 5CE, the device produces tactile output 5166 (e.g.,MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5166-a andwaveform 5166-b) and the device displays preview 5129 of the e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5004.

In FIG. 5CF, while preview 5129 is displayed, contact 5164 moves along apath over preview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5168.

In FIG. 5CG, contact 5164 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5168. As contact 5164 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5168,preview 5129 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5164,gradually revealing (e.g., from beneath preview panel 5128)content-marking indicator 5132. Contact 5164 continues to move along apath over preview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5170.

In FIG. 5CH, contact 5164 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5170. As contact 5164 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5170,movement of contact 5164 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5164 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or movespast a threshold position in the user interface). When movement ofcontact 5164 meets the movement threshold criteria, the device producestactile output 5172 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustratedby indicator 5172-a and waveform 5172-b) to indicate that the movementthreshold criteria for trigging the change of read/unread status of thee-mail are met. In addition, the device changes the appearance ofcontent-marking indicator 5132 (e.g., the coloration of content-markingindicator 5132 is inverted) to indicate that, on lift-off of thecontact, the status of the e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summaryitem 5004 will change from “unread” to “read.” Contact 5164 continues tomove along a path over preview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5174.

In FIG. 5CI, when movement of contact 5164 has met movement thresholdcriteria as described with regard to FIG. 5CH, contact 5164 reversesdirection and moves along a path indicated by arrow 5176.

In FIG. 5CJ, contact 5164 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5176. As contact 5164 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5176,preview 5129 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5164.Contact 5164 continues to move along a path over preview 5128 asindicated by arrow 5178.

In FIG. 5CK, contact 5164 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5178. As contact 5164 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5178,movement of contact 5164 meets reversal criteria (e.g., reverse movementof contact 5164 exceeds a reverse movement threshold or passes athreshold position in the user interface). When movement of contact 5164meets reversal criteria, the device provides tactile output 5180 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.55, as illustrated by indicator 5180-a andwaveform 5180-b) to indicate that the threshold for cancelling theoperation for changing the read/unread status of the e-mail has beenmet. In addition, the device changes the appearance of content-markingindicator 5132 (e.g., the coloration of content-marking indicator 5132is inverted) to indicate that the status of the e-mail (e.g., “read” or“unread”) will not be changed on lift-off of contact 5164.

In FIG. 5CL, in response to lift-off of contact 5164 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5164 has met reversal criteria describedabove with regard to FIG. 5CK, preview 5129 is released. In FIGS.5CL-5CM, display of preview 5129 is replaced by the list of e-mailsummary items (e.g., preview 5129 continues sliding to the left untilpreview 5129 is no longer visible in user interface 5002 and the list ofe-mail summary items is re-displayed).

In FIG. 5CM, display of the unread mail indicator 5020 is maintained infirst e-mail summary 5004.

FIGS. 5CN-5CY illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5004 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input), for meeting an operation triggeringthreshold in response to a second portion of the input (e.g., a draginput in a first direction) and subsequently meeting an operationcancellation threshold in response a third portion of the input (e.g., adrag input in a second direction). During the process, the devicegenerates tactile output in conjunction with displaying visual feedbackwhen the threshold for displaying the preview is met, when the thresholdfor triggering the operation for archiving the e-mail is met, and whenthe threshold for canceling the operation for archiving the e-mail ismet.

In FIG. 5CN, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5004,such as touch-down of contact 5180 on touch screen 112.

A characteristic intensity of contact 5180 increases from below a hintintensity threshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFIG. 5CN, to a characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a lightpress intensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124of FIG. 5CO. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5180 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in FIG. 5CO, selected e-mail summary item 5004 isshown un-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of userinterface 5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5180 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5CO, toabove IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5CP. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5180 increases above IT_(L), asshown in FIG. 5CP, the device produces tactile output 5182 (e.g.,MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5182-a andwaveform 5182-b) to indicate that the threshold for displaying a previewof the e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5004 is met. Inaddition, the device displays preview 5129 that corresponds to e-mailsummary item 5004.

In FIG. 5CQ, while preview 5129 is displayed, contact 5180 moves along apath over preview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5184.

In FIG. 5CR, contact 5180 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5184. As contact 5180 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5184,preview 5129 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5184,gradually revealing (e.g., from beneath preview 5129) archivingindicator 5156. Contact 5180 continues to move along a path over preview5129 as indicated by arrow 5186.

In FIG. 5CS, contact 5180 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5186. As contact 5180 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5186,preview 5129 continues to moves in response to the movement of thecontact 5186, continuing to reveal (e.g., from beneath preview 5129)archiving indicator 5156. Contact 5180 continues to move along a pathover preview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5188.

In FIG. 5CT, contact 5180 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5188. As contact 5180 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5188,movement of contact 5180 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5180 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or pasta threshold position in the user interface). When movement of contact5180 meets the movement threshold criteria, the device produces tactileoutput 5190 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated byindicator 5190-a and waveform 5190-b) to indicate that the threshold fortriggering the archiving operation is met. In addition, the devicechanges the appearance of archiving indicator 5156 (e.g., the colorationof archiving indicator 5156 is inverted) to indicate that, on lift-offof the contact, the e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5004will be archived. Contact 5180 continues to move along a path overpreview 5129 as indicated by arrow 5192.

In FIG. 5CU, when movement of contact 5180 has met movement thresholdcriteria as described with regard to FIG. 5CT, contact 5180 reversesdirection and moves along a path over preview 5129 as indicated by arrow5194.

In FIG. 5CV, contact 5180 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5194. As contact 5180 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5194,preview 5129 moves in response to the movement of the contact 5180.Contact 5180 continues to move along a path over preview 5129 asindicated by arrow 5196.

In FIG. 5CW, contact 5180 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5196. As contact 5180 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5196,movement of contact 5180 meets reversal criteria (e.g., reverse movementof contact 5180 exceeds a reverse movement threshold or thresholdposition in the user interface). When movement of contact 5180 meetsreversal criteria, the device provides tactile output 5198 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.55, as illustrated by indicator 5198-a andwaveform 5198-b) to indicate that the threshold for cancelling thearchiving operation is met. In addition, the device changes theappearance of archiving indicator 5156 (e.g., the coloration ofarchiving indicator 5156 is inverted) to indicate that the e-mail willnot be archived on lift-off of contact 5180.

In FIG. 5CX, in response to lift-off of contact 5180 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5180 has met reversal criteria describedabove with regard to FIG. 5CW, preview 5129 is released. In FIGS.5CX-5CY, display of preview 5129 is replaced by the list of e-mailsummary items (e.g., preview 5129 continues sliding to the right untilpreview 5129 is no longer visible in user interface 5002 and the list ofe-mail summary items is re-displayed).

FIGS. 5CZ-5DD illustrate a process for displaying a preview of an e-mailcorresponding to e-mail summary item 5200 in response to a first portionof an input (e.g., a press input that meets the light press intensitythreshold IT_(L)), and for displaying the e-mail in response to a secondportion of the input (e.g., a deep press input that meets the deep pressintensity threshold ITS). During the process, the device generatestactile output in conjunction with displaying the preview when thethreshold for displaying the preview is met, and in conjunction withdisplaying the content of the email when the threshold for displayingthe e-mail is met.

In FIG. 5CZ, a list of e-mail summaries including e-mail summary 5200 isdisplayed in user interface 5002.

In FIG. 5DA, the device detects an input on e-mail summary item 5200,such as touch-down of contact 5202 on touch screen 112.

A characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increases from below a hintintensity threshold IT_(H), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 ofFIG. 5DA, to a characteristic intensity above IT_(H) and below a lightpress intensity threshold IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124of FIG. 5DB. When the characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increasesabove IT_(H), as shown in FIG. 5DB, e-mail summary item 5200 is shownun-blurred while at least a portion of the remainder of user interface5002 is blurred.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increases from above IT_(H)and below IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5DB, toabove IT_(L), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5DC. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increases above IT_(L), asshown in FIG. 5DC, the device produces tactile output 5204 (e.g.,MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5204-a andwaveform 5204-b) and the device displays preview 5131 of the e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5200.

The characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increases from above IT_(L)and below IT_(D), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5DC, toabove IT_(D), as shown in intensity level meter 5124 of FIG. 5DD. Whenthe characteristic intensity of contact 5202 increases above IT_(D), asshown in FIG. 5DD, the device produces tactile output 5205 (e.g.,FullTap (150 Hz), gain: 1.0, as illustrated by indicator 5205-a andwaveform 5205-b) and the device ceases to display preview 5131 anddisplays the e-mail 5201 that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5200.

FIGS. 5DE-5DK illustrate a process for providing a tactile output inresponse to a drag input by a contact that passes a threshold positionin the user interface. The tactile output is provided in conjunctionwith visually indicating that the threshold for refreshing a list ofe-mail summary items has been reached and that the e-mail list will berefreshed (e.g., upon termination of the input, or upon crossing of thethreshold position).

In FIG. 5DE, the device detects an input, such as a downward swipegesture by contact 5206 on touch screen 112, on a list of e-mail summaryitems on user interface 5002. The list of e-mail summary items on userinterface 5002 includes e-mail summary items 5208, 5210, and 5212. Thelist of e-mail summary items may include additional information such asthread information 5214. A current status of the list of e-mail summaryitems (e.g., “Updated Just Now”) is indicated at status indicator field5224. Contact 5206 moves along a path on the list of e-mail summaryitems as indicated by arrow 5216.

In FIG. 5DF, contact 5206 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5216. As contact 5206 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5216, thelist of e-mail summary items moves in response to the movement ofcontact 5206 (e.g., the list of e-mail summary items moves downward inresponse to the downward swipe gesture), revealing progress indicator5218. Progress indicator 5218 indicates, e.g., whether the movement ofcontact 5206 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g., movement past athreshold position in the user interface) for refreshing a list and/orwhether a refresh process to download and present newly received e-mailsis ongoing. For example, when the movement of contact 5206 meets themovement threshold criteria, a full ring of progress indicator spokes isdisplayed, as indicated in 5DG. The contact 5206 continues to move alonga path over the list of e-mail summary items as indicated by arrow 5222.

In FIG. 5DG, contact 5206 has moved along the path indicated by arrow5222. As contact 5206 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5222,movement of contact 5206 meets movement threshold criteria (e.g.,contact 5206 moves by a distance exceeding a movement threshold or pasta threshold position in the user interface). When movement of contact5206 meets the movement threshold criteria, the device produces tactileoutput 5226 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.6, as illustrated byindicator 5226-a and waveform 5226-b) and initiates a content refreshprocess (e.g., to check for recently received e-mail). In someembodiments, the status indicated in status indicator field 5224 isupdated to indicate that the content refresh process is initiated (e.g.,“Checking for Mail . . . ”).

In FIG. 5DH, in response to lift-off of contact 5206 from touch screen112 when movement of contact 5206 has met the movement thresholdcriteria described above with regard to FIG. 5DG, the list of e-mailsummary items is released and gradually returns to its initial position(e.g., moves upward), as illustrated at FIGS. 5DH-DK. In FIG. 5DI,status indicator field 5224 is updated to indicate that a new e-mail isbeing downloaded. In FIG. 5DJ, an e-mail summary item 5228 thatcorresponds to a downloaded recently received e-mail is shown in thee-mail summary list. In FIG. 5DK, the e-mail summary list, including thenew e-mail summary item 5228, is returned to its original position, andstatus indicator field 5224 is updated to indicate that the e-mailsummary list has been updated (e.g., “Updated Just Now”).

FIGS. 6A-6Z illustrate example user interfaces for providing tactileoutputs that correspond to switching between content that correspond todifferent indices during navigation of indexed content. The userinterfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processesdescribed below, including the processes in FIGS. 22A-22E. Forconvenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will be discussedwith reference to operations performed on a device with atouch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focusselector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, arepresentative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g.,a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with arespective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected onthe touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operationsare, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separatetouch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on thetouch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shownin the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

FIG. 6A illustrates a user interface 6002 for navigating an indexed listof names (e.g., contacts) in an address book. The user interface 6002includes index scrubber 6004 and name list 6006. The name entries inname list 6006 are categorized into groups according to a letter in theidentifying information for a name. Name list 6006 includes an “A” groupof names (e.g., names that start with the letter “A”) that includesnames 6008, 6010, 6012, and 6014; a “B” group of names (e.g., names thatstart with the letter “B”) that includes names 6016 and 6018; and a “C”group of names (e.g., names that start with the letter “C”) thatincludes name 6020. The name list 6006 includes group indices that arelocated adjacent to (e.g., preceding) the groups. For example, the “A”group of names is preceded by “A” group index 6022, the “B” group ofnames is preceded by “B” group index 6024, and the “C” group of names ispreceded by “C” group index 6026. Index scrubber 6004 includes a listingof all of the group indices (in some embodiments, only a subset of groupindices are displayed (e.g., some intermediate group indices may not bedisplayed due to space constraints in the index scrubber 6004)) for thename list 6006. For example, index scrubber 6004 includes index marker6028 for index “A,” index marker 6030 for index “B,” and index marker6032 for index “C.”

FIGS. 6B-6H illustrate input to navigate between groups of name entriesin name list 6006 using index scrubber 6004.

FIGS. 6B-6E illustrates movement of contact 6034 in the downwarddirection along index scrubber 6004.

In FIG. 6B, at an initial time T=T₀, the device detects an input, suchas touch-down of contact 6034 on touch screen 112. Contact 6034 movesdownward along index 6004 as indicated by arrow 6036.

In FIG. 6C, at a time T=T₀+t₁, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6036 to a location on touch screen 112 thatcorresponds to index marker 6028 for index value “A” on index scrubber6004. When contact 6034 moves to the location of index marker 6028 forindex value “A” on index scrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on thedisplay such that “A” group index 6022 is located at upper edge 6040 ofthe region in which name list 6006 is displayed and the device producestactile output 6038 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustratedby indicator 6038-a and waveform 6038-b). Contact 6034 continues to movedownward along index 6004 as indicated by arrow 6042.

In FIG. 6D, at a time T=T₀+t₁+t₂, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6042 to a location of index marker 6030 for indexvalue “B” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₂ is greater than orequal to a threshold amount of time. When contact 6034 moves to alocation of index marker 6030 for index value “B” on index scrubber6004, name list 6006 is shifted on the display such that “B” group index6024 is located at upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006is displayed and the device produces tactile output 6044 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6044-a and waveform6044-b). Contact 6034 continues to move downward along index 6004 asindicated by arrow 6048.

In this example, the movement of contact 6034 along index scrubber 6004is “slow” movement, during which the device provides tactile outputevery time contact 6034 reaches a next index marker along index scrubber6004. In some embodiments, when movement of the contact 6034 is “fast”movement (e.g., the contact 6034 moves from an index marker tosubsequent index markers at time intervals that are shorter than thethreshold amount of time), the device does not provide tactile outputsevery time contact 6034 reaches a next index marker along index scrubber6004 (e.g., some tactile outputs are skipped), as described furtherbelow with regard to FIGS. 6I-6L.

In FIG. 6E, at a time T=T₀+t₁+t₂+t₃, contact 6034 has moved along thepath indicated by arrow 6048 to a location of index marker 6032 forindex value “C” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₃ is greater thanor equal to the threshold amount of time described above with regard toFIG. 6D. When contact 6034 moves to a location of index marker 6032 forindex value “C” on index scrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on thedisplay such that “C” group index 6026 is located at upper edge 6040 ofthe region in which name list 6006 is displayed and the device producestactile output 6050 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustratedby indicator 6050-a waveform 6050-b).

FIGS. 6F-6H illustrates movement of contact 6034 in the upward directionalong index scrubber 6004.

In FIG. 6F, at a time T=T₀ (T₀ in FIGS. 6F-6H is different from T₀ inFIGS. 6B-6E), contact 6034 is a location of index marker 6032 for indexmarker “C” on index scrubber 6004. Contact 6034 moves upward along index6004 as indicated by arrow 6054.

In FIG. 6G, at a time T=T₀+t₄, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6054 to a location of index marker 6030 for indexvalue “B” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₄ is greater than orequal to the threshold amount of time since when the device generatedthe last tactile output (e.g., tactile output 6050). When contact 6034moves to a location of index marker 6030 for index marker “B” on indexscrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on the display such that “B”group index 6024 is located at upper edge 6040 of the region in whichname list 6006 is displayed and the device produces tactile output 6056(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6056-aand waveform 6056-b). Contact 6034 continues to move upward along indexscrubber 6004 as indicated by arrow 6060.

In FIG. 6H, at a time T=T₀+t₄+t₅, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6060 to a location of index marker 6028 for indexvalue “A” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₅ is greater than orequal to the threshold amount of time described above with regard toFIG. 6D. When contact 6034 moves to a location of index marker 6028 forindex value “A” on index scrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on thedisplay such that “A” group index 6022 is located at upper edge 6040 ofthe region in which name list 6006 is displayed and the device producestactile output 6062 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustratedby indicator 6062-a and waveform 6062-b).

FIGS. 6I-6L illustrate an input (e.g., with “fast” movement) to navigatebetween groups of name entries in name list 6006 using index scrubber6004.

In FIG. 6I, at an initial time T=T₀ ((To in FIGS. 6I-6L is differentfrom T₀ in FIGS. 6B-6E and 6F-6H)), the device detects an input, such astouch-down of contact 6034 on touch screen 112. Contact 6034 movesdownward along index scrubber 6004 as indicated by arrow 6066.

In FIG. 6J, at a time T=T₀+t₆, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6066 to a location of index marker 6030 for indexvalue “B” on index scrubber 6004. The time T is greater than thethreshold amount of time since the device generated the last tactileoutput (e.g., tactile output 6062). When contact 6034 moves to alocation of index marker 6028 for index value “B” on index scrubber6004, name list 6006 is shifted on the display such that “B” group index6024 is located at upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006is displayed and the device produces tactile output 6068 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6068-a and waveform6068-b). Contact 6034 continues to move downward along index 6004 asindicated by arrow 6072.

In the following example, the movement of contact 6034 along indexscrubber 6004 is “fast” movement (e.g., faster than the “slow” movementdescribed with regard to FIGS. 6B-6H), during which the device does notprovides tactile output every time contact 6034 reaches a next indexmarker along index scrubber 6004 (e.g., some tactile outputs areskipped).

In FIG. 6K, at a time T=T₀+t₆+t₇, contact 6034 has moved along the pathindicated by arrow 6072 to a location of index marker 6032 for indexvalue “C” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₇ is less than thethreshold amount of time described above with regard to FIG. 6D. Whencontact 6034 moves to a location of index marker 6032 for index value“C” on index scrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on the displaysuch that “C” group index 6026 is located at upper edge 6040 of theregion in which name list 6006 is displayed, but the device does notproduce a tactile output (e.g., the tactile output is “skipped” becausethe movement of the contact is “fast” movement, and the threshold amountof time has not expired since the device generated the last tactileoutput (e.g., tactile output 6068). Contact 6034 continues to movedownward along index 6004 as indicated by arrow 6074.

In FIG. 6L, at a time T=T₀+t₆+t₇+t₅, contact 6034 has moved along thepath indicated by arrow 6074 to a location of index marker 6076 forindex value “D” on index scrubber 6004. Time interval t₇+t₅ is more thanthe threshold amount of time described above with regard to FIG. 6D. Inother words, the threshold amount of time has expired since thegeneration of the last tactile output (e.g., tactile output 6068). Whencontact 6034 moves to a location of index marker 6076 for index value“D” on index scrubber 6004, name list 6006 is shifted on the displaysuch that “D” group index 6079 is located at upper edge 6040 of theregion in which name list 6006 is displayed and the device produces atactile output 6078 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustratedby indicator 6078-a and waveform 6078-b).

FIGS. 6M-6Z illustrate a process for swiping on name list 6006 tonavigate between groups of name entries. Tactile outputs are optionallygenerated when each group of names passes a threshold position in theuser interface.

In FIG. 6M, the device detects an input, such as touch-down of contact6082 at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to name list6006. Contact 6082 moves downward in name list 6006 as indicated byarrow 6084.

In FIG. 6N, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6084. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082(e.g., name list 6006 is “attached” to contact 6082 such that the namelist 606 moves along the path indicated by arrow 6084). When name list6006 has scrolled such that “C” group index 6026 has moved across upperedge 6040 of a region in which name list 6006 is displayed, the deviceproduces tactile output 6090 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, asillustrated by indicator 6090-a and waveform 6090-b). Contact 6082continues to move downward in name list 6006 as indicated by arrow 6094.

In FIG. 6O, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6094. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6094such that “B” group index 6024 is partially displayed but has not yetfully crossed upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed. Contact 6082 continues to move downward in name list 6006 asindicated by arrow 6096.

In FIG. 6P, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6096. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082.When name list 6006 has scrolled such that “B” group index 6024 hasmoved across upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed, the device produces tactile output 6098 (e.g., MicroTap (270Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6098-a and waveform 6098-b).Contact 6082 continues to move downward in name list 6006 as indicatedby arrow 6102.

In FIGS. 6Q-6R, contact 6082 moves downward in name list 6006 asindicated by arrows 6104 and 6106. Name list 606 scrolls downward inresponse to movement of contact 6082, revealing names in the “B” group.

In FIG. 6S, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6106. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082such that “A” group index 6022 is partially displayed but has not yetfully crossed upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed. Contact 6082 continues to move downward in name list 6006 asindicated by arrow 6108.

In FIG. 6T, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6108. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082.When name list 6006 has scrolled such that “A” group index 6022 hasmoved across upper edge 6040 of a region in which name list 606 isdisplayed, the device produces tactile output 6110 (e.g., MicroTap (270Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6110-a and waveform 6110-b).Contact 6082 continues to move downward in name list 6006 as indicatedby arrow 6114.

In FIG. 6U, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6114. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6094,revealing names in the “A” group. Movement of contact 6082 reversesdirection and contact 6082 moves upward in name list 6006 as indicatedby arrow 6116.

In FIG. 6V, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6116. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082,revealing an additional name from the “D” group. Contact 6082 continuesto move upward in name list 6006 as indicated by arrow 6118.

In FIG. 6W, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6118. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082such that “A” group index 6022 is partially obscured but has not yetfully crossed upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed. Contact 6082 continues to move upward in name list 6006 asindicated by arrow 6120.

In FIG. 6X, contact 6082 has moved along the path indicated by arrow6120. Name list 6006 moves in response to the movement of contact 6082.When name list 6006 has scrolled such that “A” group index 6022 hasmoved across upper edge 6040 of a region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed, the device produces tactile output 6122-a (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz), gain: 0.5, as illustrated by indicator 6122-a and waveform6122-b).

FIGS. 7A-7Q illustrate example user interfaces for providing tactileoutputs during variable rate scrubbing in accordance with someembodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustratethe processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 24A-24G.For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will bediscussed with reference to operations performed on a device with atouch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focusselector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, arepresentative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g.,a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with arespective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected onthe touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operationsare, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separatetouch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on thetouch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shownin the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

FIGS. 7A-7D illustrate initiating playing of content in a content playerat a regular playback speed.

FIG. 7A displays a user interface 702 for a media content player thatincludes: a slider control 704; an adjustable progress indicator 706 inthe slider control that indicates a current position in the contentbeing played on the device; and other media content player controls,such as a play/pause icon 714.

In FIG. 7B, the device detects an input on the play/pause icon 714, suchas a tap gesture by contact 716, which initiates playback of the contentat a regular playback speed, as shown in FIGS. 7C-7D.

FIGS. 7E-7K illustrate movement 720 of contact 718 (e.g., in a draggesture) from the progress indicator 706, away from the slider control704, and across boundaries 708, 710, and 712. In some embodiments,boundaries 708, 710, and 712 are visually marked in user interface 702.In some embodiments, boundaries 708, 710, and 712 are invisibleboundaries. In some embodiments, each boundary is optionally displayedbriefly when it is crossed by a contact. In some embodiments, theboundaries separate areas that correspond to different scrubbing ratesfor adjusting the position of the progress indicator 706 in slidercontrol 704. In some embodiments, while contact 718 (which started onprogress indicator 706) is above boundary 708, the position of theprogress indicator 706 in the slider control 704 moves by the sameamount as the horizontal component of movement of contact 718 on thedisplay, parallel to the slider control (so-called “full-speedscrubbing”). While contact 718 is between boundary 708 and boundary 710,the position of the progress indicator 706 in the slider control 704moves by an amount that is just a fraction (e.g., ½ or equivalently 50%)of the horizontal component of movement of contact 718 on the display,parallel to the slider control (so-called “half-speed scrubbing”). Whilecontact 718 is between boundary 710 and boundary 712, the position ofthe progress indicator 706 in the slider control 704 moves by an amountthat is an even smaller fraction (e.g., ¼ or equivalently 25%) of thehorizontal component of movement of contact 718 on the display, parallelto the slider control (so-called “quarter-speed scrubbing”). Whilecontact 718 is below boundary 712, the position of the progressindicator 706 in the slider control 704 moves by an amount that is astill smaller fraction (e.g., ⅛ or equivalently 12.5%) of the horizontalcomponent of movement of contact 718 on the display, parallel to theslider control (so-called “fine-speed scrubbing”). The fractionalscrubbing rates used here (50%, 25%, and 12.5%) are just examples.Different scrubbing rates that progressively decrease as the verticaldistance between the contact and the slider control increases could alsobe used.

The device provides tactile outputs (e.g., a MicroTap medium (150 Hz),Gain max: 0.8, Gain min: 0.0) to help a user adjust the scrubbing rateand quickly and precisely adjust the position of the progress indicator706. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are triggered when the contact718 crosses each of boundaries 708, 710, and 712. For example, tactileoutput 726 (FIG. 7G) is produced when contact 718 crosses boundary 708;tactile output 728 (FIG. 7I) is produced when contact 718 crossesboundary 710; and tactile output 730 (FIG. 7K) is produced when thecontact 718 crosses boundary 712. These tactile outputs provide feedbackto the user that the scrubbing rate is changing, which helps the user toselect and use the desired scrubbing rate (e.g., initially usingfull-speed scrubbing to move the progress indicator quickly and thenusing slower scrubbing speeds to more precisely adjust the position ofthe progress indicator).

In some embodiments, crossing boundaries 708, 710, and 712 also triggersconcurrent changes in visual feedback to the user. For example, thedisplayed text “Full-Speed Scrubbing” (e.g., as shown by scrubbing speedindicator 722-a in FIGS. 7E-7F) is changed to “Half-Speed Scrubbing”(e.g., as shown by scrubbing speed indicator 722-b in FIG. 7G) when thecontact 718 crosses boundary 708; the displayed text “Half-SpeedScrubbing” (e.g., as shown by scrubbing speed indicator 722-b in FIGS.7G-7H) is changed to “Quarter-Speed Scrubbing” (e.g., as shown byscrubbing speed indicator 722-c in FIG. 7I) when the contact 718 crossesboundary 710; and the displayed text “Quarter-Speed Scrubbing” (e.g., asshown by scrubbing speed indicator 722-c in FIGS. 7I-7J) is changed to“Fine-Speed Scrubbing” (e.g., as shown by scrubbing speed indicator722-a in FIG. 7K) when the contact 718 crosses boundary 712. Providingconcurrent visual feedback enhances the overall feedback to the userthat the scrubbing rate is changing, which helps the user to select anduse the desired scrubbing rate.

FIGS. 7L-7Q illustrate movement 720 of the contact 718 (e.g., in acontinuation of the drag gesture in FIGS. 7E-7K) back towards the slidercontrol 704, first across boundary 712, then across boundary 710, andthen across boundary 708. In some embodiments, the device providestactile outputs when the contact 718 crosses each of boundaries 712,710, and 708, and concurrently adjusts the scrubbing rate (e.g., fromfine-speed scrubbing to quarter-speed scrubbing, to half-speedscrubbing, and then to full-speed scrubbing).

In some embodiments, the characteristics of a given tactile outputdepend on the characteristics of the movement of the contact 718. Insome embodiments, the device determines the velocity of the contact 718at the time that a given boundary (or other threshold) is crossed. Insome embodiments, the tactile output pattern is adjusted in accordancewith the velocity of the contact when the boundary is crossed. In someembodiments, a gain factor applied to the amplitude of the tactileoutput pattern increases as the velocity of the contact at the boundaryincreases. For example, in FIG. 7G, the velocity of movement 720-c ofthe contact 718-c at boundary 708 is between a medium speed thresholdV_(M) and a fast speed threshold V_(F) and a medium gain is applied intactile output 726 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain: 0.5). The sametactile output pattern occurs in FIG. 7N (e.g., for tactile output 732),70 (e.g., for tactile output 734), and 7P (e.g., for tactile output 736)because the velocity of movement 720 of the contact 718 at the boundarycrossings in these figures is between V_(M) and V_(F). In contrast, inFIG. 7I, the velocity of movement 720-e of the contact 718-e at boundary710 is above the fast speed threshold V_(F) and a large gain is appliedin tactile output 728 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain: 0.8). Conversely,in FIG. 7K, the velocity of movement 720-g of the contact 718-g atboundary 712 is between the medium speed threshold V_(M) and a low speedthreshold Vo and a small gain is applied in tactile output 730 (e.g.,MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain: 0.3). This increase in gain/amplitude withvelocity increases feedback to the user, which the user might otherwisemiss because of the rapid contact movement. In some embodiments, thegain factor increases with the total velocity of the contact at theboundary (or other threshold). In some embodiments, the gain factorincreases with the vertical component of the velocity of the contact atthe boundary (or other threshold).

FIGS. 8A-8N, 9A-9V, and 10A-10I illustrate example user interfaces forproviding tactile outputs for slider controls in accordance with someembodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustratethe processes described below, including the processes in FIGS. 26A-26E.For convenience of explanation, some of the embodiments will bediscussed with reference to operations performed on a device with atouch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focusselector is, optionally: a respective finger or stylus contact, arepresentative point corresponding to a finger or stylus contact (e.g.,a centroid of a respective contact or a point associated with arespective contact), or a centroid of two or more contacts detected onthe touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogous operationsare, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 and a separatetouch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts on thetouch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the user interfaces shownin the figures on the display 450, along with a focus selector.

FIGS. 8A-8E illustrate slowly adjusting a slider control for displaybrightness to a minimum brightness value, which does not produce atactile output because of the slow adjustment speed at the minimumbrightness value.

FIG. 8A displays user interface 810 that includes a control panel with aplurality of device control affordances, including slider control 812for adjusting the brightness of the display. The slider control 812includes first end 816 that corresponds to a first value (e.g., aminimum brightness); second end 818 that corresponds to a second value(e.g., a maximum brightness); and movable indicator 814 (e.g., a bubble,thumb or other moveable icon) that indicates a current value in the(continuous) range of values between the first value and the secondvalue.

In FIGS. 8B-8D, the device detects an input on the movable indicator814, e.g., a slow drag gesture by contact 820 with movement 822, whichslowly adjusts the brightness of the display down to the minimum value.The rate of movement 822 (e.g., movement 822-c in FIG. 8D) of thecontact 820 and the indicator 814 when the indicator 814 reaches theminimum value 816 is below a threshold speed, so no tactile output isproduced. There is also no tactile output when contact 820 lifts off(FIG. 8E), leaving the display brightness set to its minimum end 816.

In FIGS. 8F-8H, the device detects a faster input on movable indicator814, e.g., a flick gesture by contact 824 with movement 826, whichquickly adjusts the brightness of the display down toward the minimumvalue. After the flick gesture (e.g., after lift-off of contact 824),movable indicator 814 continues to move with simulated inertia at a rateof movement 827. The rate of movement 827 (e.g., movement 827-b in FIG.8H) when moveable indicator 814 reaches the minimum end 816 is above thethreshold speed, so device generates tactile output 828 (e.g., MicroTap(150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.3) with a tactile output pattern(e.g., amplitude of the tactile output pattern) that is configured basedon the speed of indicator 814 when indicator 814 reaches the minimum end816 of slider control 812. For example, at above the threshold speed, agreater gain factor is applied to a baseline tactile output pattern fora greater speed of the indicator when the indicator reaches the minimumend of the slider control.

Although not shown in FIGS. 8A-8H, when indicator 814 is dragged tominimum end 816 of slider control 812 with more than the thresholdspeed, the device generates a tactile output as well. The tactile outputpattern of the tactile output that is generated is also configuredaccording to the speed of indicator 814 when indicator 814 reaches theminimum end 816 of slider control 812. For example, a greater speed ofmoveable indicator 814 corresponds to a greater gain factor that isapplied to a baseline tactile output pattern.

These tactile outputs provide feedback to the user that the minimum endof the slider control has been reached. Stronger tactile outputs areprovided as faster, less precise inputs are used. Conversely, in somecases, tactile outputs are not provided, to avoid distracting the user,when the user is carefully adjusting the indicator with a drag gestureat a slower speed to the minimum value of the slider control.

In FIGS. 81-8K, the device detects an input on movable indicator 814,e.g., a drag gesture by contact 830 with movement 832, which adjusts thebrightness of the display up toward maximum end 818 of slider control812. Tactile output 834 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gainmin: 0.3) is generated when indicator 814 reaches maximum end 818 ofslider control 812. The tactile output pattern of tactile output 834 isconfigured based on the rate of movement of indicator 814 when theindicator 814 reaches maximum end 818 of slider control 812 (e.g.,tactile output 834 has a gain of 0.5).

In FIGS. 8L-8M, the device detects a faster input on the movableindicator 814, e.g., a flick gesture by contact 836 with movement 838,which quickly adjusts the brightness of the display up toward themaximum end 818. After the flick gesture (e.g., after lift-off ofcontact 836), indicator 814 continues to move with simulated inertia.The rate of movement 839 by indicator 814 reduces gradually as indicator814 continues to move along slider control 812. Tactile output 840 isproduced (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.3) with atactile output pattern that is configured based on the speed 839-b ofindicator 814 when indicator 814 reaches maximum end 818 of slidercontrol 812. Since speed 839-b of indicator 814 is slower in FIG. 8Nthan the speed of the indicator 814 in FIG. 8K, a smaller gain factor(e.g., a gain of 0.3) is applied to the baseline tactile output patternto generate tactile output 840, as compared to the gain factor (e.g., again of 0.5) used in the generation of tactile output 843.

These tactile outputs provide feedback to the user that the maximumvalue has been reached in the slider control. Stronger tactile outputsare provided as faster, less precise inputs are used.

In some embodiments, visual feedback is also displayed when indicator814 reaches an end of slider control 812, such as having indicator 814bounce off of and away from the end of slider control 812, and thenhaving indicator 814 return to the end of the slider control. Providingconcurrent visual and haptic feedback enhances the overall feedback tothe user that the end of the slider control has been reached andimproves the operability of the slider control.

FIGS. 9A-9V illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing tactileoutputs while moving an indicator in a circular slider control, inaccordance with some embodiments.

FIGS. 9A-9V display exemplary user interface 900 for a sleep timer,which includes circular slider control 902 positioned around clock face904 (e.g., a slider control where the first end is connected to thesecond end, for example, at 12:00). Clock face 904 includes major tickmarks 908-1 to 908-12 which correspond to a first set of predefinedvalues in hour increments, on the hour, in circular control slider 902.Clock face 904 also includes minor tick marks 910-1 to 910-36 whichcorrespond to a second set of predefined values in 15 minute increments,off the hour, in circular slider control 902. Moveable indicator 906 isdisplayed along circular slider 902 and can be moved around the outsideof clock face 904. Moveable indicator 906 corresponds to a user-definedtimer period, as bound by first end 901 and second end 903. For example,a user may set a bed-time with first end 901 and a wake-time with secondend 903. User interface 900 provides tactile feedback when an end ofmoveable indicator 906 reaches an end of the slider (e.g., 12:00), aswell as when moving over a major tick mark 908 or minor tick mark 910,assisting the user determine the set points of the slider control.

FIGS. 9A-9F illustrate an exemplary embodiment where the devicegenerates tactile outputs to indicate predetermined times, when settingthe starting and ending points of a user-defined time period on thesleep timer. The tactile outputs are generated when an end of theindicator moves over a tick mark on the clock face (e.g., as shown inFIGS. 9C and 9E), and differ depending on whether the end slides over aminor tick mark or a major tick mark. No tactile output is generatedwhen an end of the indicator is passing a location between two tickmarks (e.g., as shown in FIG. 9D). In some embodiments, the deviceimposes a limit on the maximum rate at which tactile outputs aregenerated, so if the indicator moves very quickly around the click face,some tactile outputs may be skipped. For example, if an end of theindicator moves past a tick mark and a threshold amount of time (e.g.,0.05 s) has not expired since when the device last generated a tactileoutput (e.g., at an earlier time when an end of the indicator passed atick mark), the device forgoes generation of the current tactile output.

FIG. 9A illustrates a sleep alarm set for an eight-hour sleep time,between 11:00 PM and 7:00 AM, as indicated by the position of moveableindicator 906 (first end 901 is positioned at major tick mark 908-11,corresponding to 11:00 PM, and second end 903 is positioned at majortick mark 908-7, corresponding to 7:00 AM). In FIG. 9B, device 100detects a drag gesture. The device rotates movable indicator 906 aroundslider control 902, in accordance with movement 914 of contact 912, inFIGS. 9B-9E.

While rotating indicator 906, the device generates first tactile output916 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.0) when firstend 901 passes over minor tick mark 910-34 and second end 903 passesover minor tick mark 910-22, in FIG. 9C. While continuing to rotateindicator 906, the device generates second tactile output 918 (e.g.,MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 1.0, Gain min: 0.3) when first end 901passes over major tick mark 908-12 and second end 903 passes over majortick mark 908-8, in FIG. 9E. Second tactile output 918 (e.g., MicroTap(150 Hz) with a gain of 1.0 in FIG. 9E) is stronger than first tactileoutput 916 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.6 in FIG. 9C)because the ends of indicator 906 were over a major tick mark in FIG. 9Eand a minor tick mark in FIG. 9C. FIG. 9F shows lift-off of the contact,ending rotation of the indicator 906.

FIGS. 9F-9J illustrate an exemplary embodiment where the devicegenerates tactile output to indicate predetermined times, when shrinkingthe user-defined time period indicator by moving a single end of amovable indicator towards the other end of the indicator. The tactileoutput is generated when the end of the indicator moves over a tick markon the clock face (e.g., as shown in FIG. 9H). No tactile output isgenerated when an end of the indicator is passing a location between twotick marks (e.g., as shown in FIG. 9I).

FIG. 9F illustrates a sleep alarm set for an eight-hour sleep time,between 12:00 PM (e.g., midnight) and 8:00 AM, as indicated by theposition of moveable indicator 906 (first end 901 is positioned at majortick mark 908-12, corresponding to 12:00 PM, and second end 903 ispositioned at major tick mark 908-8, corresponding to 8:00 AM). In FIG.9G, device 100 detects a drag gesture. In FIGS. 9G-91, movement 922 ofcontact 920 causes only second end 903 of movable indicator 906 torotate around circular slider control 902, because contact 920 was firstdetected at the end of the indicator. This causes movable indicator 906to shrink from an eight-hour time period, in FIG. 9G, to a four-hour andforty-minute time period, in FIG. 9I. In contrast, the series of FIGS.9A-9F illustrated an embodiment where the entire movable indicator isrotated around the circular slider control because the contact wasdetected in the middle of the indicator, rather than on the end.

While moving second end 903 of indicator 906 around the clock face, thedevice generates third tactile output 924 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gainmax: 1.0, Gain min: 0.3) when second end 903 passes over major tick mark910-22, corresponding to 7:00 AM, in FIG. 9H. Third tactile output 918(e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 1.0 in FIG. 9H) is stronger thanfirst tactile output 916 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.6 inFIG. 9C) because the end of indicator 906 was over a major tick mark inFIG. 9H and a minor tick mark in FIG. 9C. As illustrated in FIG. 9I,while continuing to rotate second end 903, no tactile output isgenerated when the second end passes over the clock value correspondingto 4:40 AM, because the value is not contained in either the first setof values (e.g., every fifteen minutes) or the second set of values(e.g., every hour) predefined to correspond to a tactile output. FIG. 9Jshows lift-off of the contact, ending rotation of second end 903 ofindicator 906.

FIGS. 9K-9N illustrate an embodiment where the device generates tactileoutput to indicate predetermined times, when either end of a movableindicator moves over a tick mark on the clock face. The tactile outputis generated even if the other end of the indicator does concurrentlycross over a tick mark on the clock face. This series of figures alsoillustrates an exemplary embodiment where the device generates a smallertactile output while rotating a smaller movable indicator, as comparedto the series of FIGS. 9A-9F, which illustrate a larger tactile outputfor similar triggering events.

FIG. 9K illustrates a sleep alarm set for a four-hour and forty-minutesleep time, between 12:00 PM (e.g., midnight) and 4:40 AM, as indicatedby the position of moveable indicator 906 (first end 901 is positionedat major tick mark 908-12, corresponding to 12:00 PM, and second end 903is positioned at a position corresponding to 4:40 AM). In FIG. 9K,device 100 detects a drag gesture. The device rotates movable indicator906 around slider control 902, in accordance with movement 928 ofcontact 926, in FIGS. 9K-9M.

While rotating indicator 906, the device generates fourth tactile output930 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.0) when firstend 901 passes over minor tick mark 908-3, in FIG. 9L, even thoughsecond end 903 is not concurrently passing over a tick mark. Whilecontinuing to rotate indicator 906, the device generates fifth tactileoutput 931 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 1.0, Gain min: 0.3) whensecond end 901 passes over major tick mark 908-6, in FIG. 9M, eventhough first end 901 is not concurrently passing over a tick mark. Fifthtactile output 931 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.5 in FIG.9M) is stronger than fourth tactile output 930 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz)with a gain of 0.3 in FIG. 9L) because the end of indicator 906 was overa major tick mark in FIG. 9M and a minor tick mark in FIG. 9L. FIG. 9Nshows lift-off of the contact, ending rotation of indicator 906.

FIGS. 9L and 9M illustrate tactile inputs generated in response to oneend of the indicator passing over minor and major tick marks, as alsoillustrated in FIGS. 9C and 9E, respectively. However, because indicator906 is smaller in FIGS. 9L and 9M, than in FIGS. 9C and 9E, therespective tactile outputs generated in FIG. 9L (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz)with a gain of 0.3) and FIG. 9M (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of0.5) are smaller than the corresponding tactile outputs in FIG. 9C(e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) and FIG. 9E (e.g., MicroTap(150 Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

FIGS. 9O-9Q illustrate an exemplary embodiment where the devicegenerates tactile output to indicate predetermined times, when expandingthe user-defined time period indicator by moving a single end of amovable indicator away from the other end of the indicator. The tactileoutput is generated when the end of the indicator moves over a tick markon the clock face.

FIG. 9O illustrates a sleep alarm set for a four-hour and forty-minutesleep time, between 1:20 AM and 6:00 AM, as indicated by the position ofmoveable indicator 906 (first end 901 is positioned at a positioncorresponding to 1:20 AM, and second end 903 is positioned at major tickmark 908-6, corresponding to 6:00 AM). In FIG. 9O, device 100 detects adrag gesture. In FIGS. 9O-9P, movement 934 of contact 932 causes onlyfirst end 901 of movable indicator 906 to rotate around circular slidercontrol 902, because contact 932 was first detected at the end of theindicator. This causes movable indicator 906 to expand from a four-hourand forty-minute time period, in FIG. 9O, to a five-hour andthirty-minute time period, in FIG. 9P.

While rotating indicator 906, the device generates sixth tactile output936 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.0) when end 903passes over minor tick mark 908-1, corresponding to 12:30 AM, in FIG.9P. FIG. 9Q shows lift-off of the contact, ending rotation of theindicator 906.

FIGS. 9R-9V illustrate an embodiment where the device suppresses atactile output when triggered at the same time another tactile output istriggered. The also illustrate an embodiment where the device generatesa tactile output after a gesture ends, while the movable indicatorcontinues to move with simulated inertia from the gesture.

FIG. 9R illustrates a sleep alarm set for a five-hour and thirty-minutesleep time, between 12:30 AM and 6:00 AM, as indicated by the positionof moveable indicator 906 (first end 901 is positioned at minor tickmark 910-2, corresponding to 12:30 AM, and second end 903 is positionedat major tick mark 908-6, corresponding to 6:00 AM. In FIG. 9R, device100 detects a drag gesture. The device rotates movable indicator 906around slider control 902, in accordance with movement 940 of contact938, in FIGS. 9R-9T.

While rotating indicator 906, the device generates sixth tactile output942 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.0) when firstend 901 passes over minor tick mark 910-1 and second end passes overminor tick mark 910-18, in FIG. 9S. Because the first end and second endpass over tick marks at the same time, the device suppresses one of thetactile outputs that would have been generated. Both events would havegenerated the same type of tactile output because both ends were passingover minor tick marks. Both events would have generated the same type oftactile output with the same magnitude because both ends were passingover minor tick marks with the same speed. For example, tactile output942 is a MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.6. In some embodiments, notshown in FIG. 9S, the device superimposes the tactile outputs that wouldbe generated for each end that is passing a tick mark, and generate acombined tactile output (e.g., with the same waveform and double theamplitude as that shown in FIG. 9S). In some embodiments, the deviceuses independent moveable masses to generate tactile outputs for eachend that is passing a tick mark.

While continuing to rotate indicator 906, the device generates seventhtactile output 944 (e.g., MicroTap Medium (150 Hz), Gain max: 1.0, Gainmin: 0.3) when first end 901 passes over major tick mark 908-12 andsecond end 903 passes over minor tick mark 910-17, in FIG. 9T. Becausethe first end and second end pass over tick marks at the same time, thedevice suppresses the tactile output that would have been generated bysecond end 903 passing over minor tick mark 910-17, in favor ofgenerating the tactile output generated by first end 901 passing overmajor tick mark 908-12. Because the event caused by the first end 901generates a bigger tactile output than the event caused by the secondend 903, the tactile output generated by the event caused by the firstend 901 takes priority over the other potential tactile output. Forexample, tactile output 942 is a MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.9.In some embodiments, not shown in FIG. 9T, the device superimposes thetactile outputs that would be generated for each end that is passing atick mark, and generate a combined tactile output (e.g., with the samewaveform and higher amplitude than that shown in FIG. 9T). In someembodiments, the device uses independent moveable masses to generatetactile outputs for each end that is passing a tick mark.

FIG. 9T also illustrates lift-off of contact 938. However, movableindicator 906 continues to rotate around slider control 902 withsimulated inertia 945.

While indicator 906 continues to rotate with simulated inertia 945, thedevice generates eighth tactile output 946 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz),Gain max: 0.6, Gain min: 0.0) when first end 901 passes over minor tickmark 910-35 and second end 903 passes over major tick mark 908-5, inFIG. 9U. Because the first end and second end pass over tick marks atthe same time, and because second end 903 is passing over a higherpriority tick mark than is first end 901, the device suppresses thetactile output that would have been generated by first end 901, in favorof generating the tactile output generated by second end 903 passingover major tick mark 908-5. FIG. 9V illustrates indicator 906 coming torest over a time period spanning from 11:20 PM to 4:50 AM. No furthertactile outputs are generated because the ends of the indicator arepositioned between tick marks.

The tactile outputs, described above for FIGS. 9A-9V, provide feedbackto the user that an end of the indicator has reached a predeterminedvalue (e.g., time) on the circular slider control, e.g., every fifteenminutes. Greater tactile outputs are provided so that the user candistinguish a sub-set of predetermined values (e.g., times on the hour)from the larger set of predetermined values (e.g., fifteen-minuteincrements). This allows a user to more easily set a value (e.g., timeor period of time) on the circular slider, by providing concurrentvisual and haptic feedback, which enhances the overall feedback to theuser and improves the operability of the slider control. Conversely, insome embodiments, tactile outputs are dampened or not provided, to avoiddistracting the user. In addition, when the device detects touch inputon a touch screen display, haptic feedback is also helpful to conveyinformation to the user when the user's finger or stylus obscures a keyportion of the user interface.

FIGS. 9A-9V display exemplary user interface 900 for a sleep timer,which includes clock 902. The clock includes a timer handle 906, havinga first end 901 that defines a first (e.g., starting) time in auser-defined time period and a second end 903 that defines a second(e.g., ending) time in the user-defined time period; and a clock face904, representing a continuous range of values (e.g., times from 12:00to 11:59), including major tick marks 908-1 to 908-12 which correspondto a first set of predefined values in the continuous range of values(e.g., in hour increments, on the hour) and minor tick marks 910-1 to910-36 which correspond to a second set of predefined values in thecontinuous range of values (e.g., 15 minute increments, off the hour).

Timer handle 906 corresponds to a user-defined timer period, as bound byfirst end 901 and second end 903. Timer handle 906 is movable (e.g.,rotatable) around clock face 904, responsive to user input gesturesinitiated in the middle (e.g., not on the ends) of the handle, e.g., asillustrated in sets of FIGS. 9B-9E, 9K-9M, and 9R-9V. Timer handle 906is contractible (e.g. as illustrated in series of FIGS. 9G-9J) andexpandable (e.g., as illustrated in series of FIGS. 9O-9Q), responsiveto user input gestures initiated on either end. While rotating,contracting, or expanding, device 100 generates tactile outputs wheneither end 901 and 903 passes over a tick mark on the face of the clock.

FIGS. 10A-10I illustrate example user interfaces for providing tactileoutputs for an image picker slider while choosing an image from aplurality of images (e.g., choosing one or more images from a series ofimages taken in a burst mode of a digital camera).

FIG. 10A displays a user interface 1002 that enables a user to manuallychoose one or more images from a sequence of images, which includes: animage slider 1003 that includes reduced-scale representations 1006(e.g., thumbnail images) of a plurality of images 1004 in a sequence ofimages; a pointer 1008 that points to a given reduced scalerepresentation (e.g., 1006-4) whose corresponding (larger) image (e.g.,1004-4) is being is displayed; a (larger) image 1004 that corresponds tothe reduced-scale representation 1006 that pointer 1008 is currentlypointing to; indicator 1010 that indicates an image that automaticanalysis of the sequence of images (e.g., automatic analysis ofsharpness, clarity, and/or motion blur) finds to be a better image inthe sequence of images; a check box area 1011 for image 1004 that whenactivated (e.g., by a tap gesture) places a check or other mark toindicate that the user has chosen that image; a cancel icon that whenactivated (e.g., by a tap gesture) exits the image choosing mode withoutchoosing any of the images in the sequence of images; and a done iconthat when activated (e.g., by a tap gesture) exits the image choosingmode and displays an options menu that enables the user to pick whetherthe user wants to keep all of images in the sequence of images or justthe user-chosen image(s).

In some embodiments, user interface 1002 is displayed in response todetecting an input (e.g., a tap gesture) on a selection icon thatcorresponds to the sequence of images 1004.

In FIGS. 10B-10C, the device detects an input on the image slider 1003,such as a drag, swipe, or flick gesture by contact 1012 with movement1014, which horizontally scrolls the reduced-scale representations 1006in the image slider 1003 rightward and concurrently changes thecorresponding image 1004 that is displayed. For example, in FIG. 10B,the pointer 1008 points to reduced-scale representation 1006-4 and thecorresponding (larger) image 1004-4 is displayed, whereas in FIG. 10C,the pointer 1008 points to reduced-scale representation 1006-2 and thecorresponding (larger) image 1004-2 is displayed.

In FIG. 10D, the pointer 1008 points to a reduced-scale representationat a terminus of the image slider 1003, namely reduced-scalerepresentation 1006-1 at the beginning of the image slider 1003, whichtriggers tactile output 1015 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8,Gain min: 0.0). The tactile output 1015 is optionally produced with atactile output pattern that is based on the speed of the image slider1003 when a reduced-scale representation at a terminus of the imageslider 1003 reaches the pointer 1008. For example, as the speed of theimage slider 1003 increases, the gain of the tactile output patternincreases. These tactile outputs provide feedback to the user that aterminus of the image slider has been reached, with greater tactileoutputs being provided as faster, less precise inputs are used.Conversely, in some cases, tactile outputs are not provided, to avoiddistracting the user, when the user is carefully adjusting the imageslider 1003 with a drag gesture at a slower speed.

In some embodiments, the tactile output 1015 is triggered when thepointer 1008 is over the center of the reduced-scale representation1006. In some embodiments, the tactile output 1015 is triggered when thepointer 1008 is over the right hand edge of the reduced-scalerepresentation 1006. In some embodiments, the tactile output 1015 istriggered when the pointer 1008 is over the left hand edge of thereduced-scale representation 1006.

In some embodiments, visual feedback is also provided when a terminus ofthe image slider 1003 is reached, such as a “rubber band” effect. Forexample, in response to a fast input by contact 1012, the image slider1003 continues to scroll horizontally rightward such that the pointer1008 is no longer pointing to the reduced-scale representation 1006-1 atthe terminus of the image slider 1003, as shown in FIG. 10E. Then, afterscrolling horizontally rightward such that the pointer 1008 is no longerpointing to the reduced-scale representation 1006-1, the image slider1003 scrolls horizontally leftward such that the pointer 1008 points tothe reduced-scale representation 1006-1 at the terminus of the imageslider 1003, as shown in FIG. 10F. Providing concurrent visual andhaptic feedback enhances the overall feedback to the user that an end ofthe image slider has been reached and improves the operability of theimage slider control.

In FIGS. 10G-10H, the device detects an input on the image slider 1003,such as a drag, swipe, or flick gesture by contact 1016 with movement1018, which horizontally scrolls the reduced-scale representations 1006in the image slider 1003 leftward.

In FIG. 10H, the pointer 1008 points to reduced-scale representation1006-4, whose corresponding (larger) image 1004-4 was originallydisplayed upon entering the image choosing mode (FIG. 10A), whichtriggers tactile output 1020 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8,Gain min: 0.0). The tactile output 1020 is optionally produced with atactile output pattern that is based on the speed of the image slider1003 when the reduced-scale representation 1006-4, whose corresponding(larger) image 1004-4 was originally displayed upon entering the imagechoosing mode, reaches the pointer 1008. For example, as the speed ofthe image slider 1003 increases, the gain of the tactile output patternincreases. For example, tactile output 1020 in FIG. 10H has a higheramplitude (e.g., with a gain of 0.8) than tactile output 1015 in FIG.10D (e.g., with a gain factor of 0.6), since movement speed of thereduced-scale representations 1006 is higher in FIG. 10H than in FIG.10D.

These tactile outputs provide feedback to the user that the image 1004that was originally displayed upon entering the image choosing mode(e.g., 1004-4) is once again being displayed, with greater tactileoutputs being provided as faster, less precise inputs are used. Thisfeedback helps the user navigate through the sequence of images back tothe originally displayed image. Conversely, in some cases, tactileoutputs are not provided, to avoid distracting the user, when the useris carefully adjusting the image slider 1003 with a drag gesture at aslower speed.

In FIG. 10I, the image slider continues to scroll horizontally leftwardwith simulated inertia after the input by contact 1016 ends, withcorresponding changes to the displayed image 1004.

FIGS. 11A-11L, 12A-120, and 13A-13L illustrate example user interfacesfor providing tactile outputs with visual rubber band effects inaccordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figuresare used to illustrate the processes described below, including theprocesses in FIGS. 28A-28E. For convenience of explanation, some of theembodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed ona device with a touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments,the focus selector is, optionally: a respective finger or styluscontact, a representative point corresponding to a finger or styluscontact (e.g., a centroid of a respective contact or a point associatedwith a respective contact), or a centroid of two or more contactsdetected on the touch-sensitive display system 112. However, analogousoperations are, optionally, performed on a device with a display 450 anda separate touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting thecontacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 while displaying the userinterfaces shown in the figures on the display 450, along with a focusselector.

FIGS. 11A-11E illustrate a rubber band effect applied to a list of items(e.g., a list of emails in a thread in an email application), with oneor more tactile outputs.

FIG. 11A displays a user interface 1110 that includes: a list 1111 ofemails 1112; a region 1115 adjacent to the list 1111 (e.g., whichincludes information about emails “Updated Just Now 8,168 Unread” and anicon that when activated (e.g., by a tap gesture) displays a userinterface for preparing a new email); and a threshold position at thetop edge of region 1115 (e.g., dashed line 1114, which is typically notdisplayed as a separate user interface element).

In FIGS. 11B-11D, the device detects an input on list 1111, namely adrag gesture by contact 1116 with movement 1118, which scrolls the list1111 of emails 1112 upward in accordance with the movement of contact1116.

In FIG. 11C, an outer edge 1120 of the list 1111 of emails (whichcorresponds to the bottom edge of email 1112-6) is at the thresholdposition 1114. In some embodiments, tactile output 1121 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when the outer edge 1120 crosses thethreshold position 1114. This tactile output 1121 provides feedback tothe user that an end of the list has been reached.

In some embodiments, a characteristic of tactile output 1121 (e.g., anamplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed of theinput (e.g., an average speed of the contact) at a time when the outeredge 1120 of the list 1111 moves across the threshold position 1114 inthe user interface 1110. For example, a greater gain of the tactileoutput is used for a greater speed of the contact when the outer edge1120 crosses threshold position 1114, which helps make the hapticfeedback apparent to the user when faster inputs are made.

In some embodiments, a characteristic of tactile output 1121 (e.g., anamplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed of arelevant user interface element (e.g., an average speed of the edge1120) at a time when the outer edge 1120 of the list 1111 moves acrossthe threshold position 1114 in the user interface 1110. For example, agreater gain of the tactile output is used for a greater speed of theedge 1120 when the outer edge 1120 crosses threshold position 1114,which helps make the haptic feedback apparent to the user when fasterinputs are made.

In FIGS. 11D-11E, an area 1122 is displayed and expands between theouter edge 1120 of list 1111 and the threshold position 1114 as the list1111 continues to move upwards in accordance with the movement 1118-c ofcontact 1116-c.

In FIG. 11E, the device detects termination of the contact (e.g.,lift-off of contact 1116-d). In some embodiments, tactile output 1124(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), Gain: 0.3) is triggered when the devicedetects termination of the contact. In some embodiments, acharacteristic of the tactile output 1124 (e.g., an amplitude, duration,frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile output pattern that makes up thetactile output and/or audio that accompanies the tactile output) isconfigured based on an extent by which the outer edge 1120 of the list1111 has moved beyond the threshold position 1114 in the user interface(e.g., at the time when termination of the input is detected). Forexample, a greater gain of the tactile output is used for a greaterextent by which the outer edge 1120 of the list 1111 has moved beyondthe threshold position 1114, which makes the haptic feedback increase asthe visual rubber band effect feedback increases.

In response to detecting termination of the contact 1116-d (FIG. 11E),the device scrolls the list 1111 downward until the outer edge 1120 ofthe list returns to the threshold position 1114, as shown in FIGS.11F-11G.

As shown in FIGS. 11D-11G, the display of the area 1122 beyond the outeredge 1120 of the list as the list continues to scroll in a firstdirection (e.g., upwards) in accordance with the movement 1118 of thecontact 1116 (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 11D-11E), followed by, in responseto detecting termination of the contact, scrolling the list in theopposite direction (e.g., downwards) until the area 1122 ceases to bedisplayed (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 11E-11G) is one example of a rubberband effect.

Tactile output 1124 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically displays asmuch of the bottom portion of the list as possible after lift-off, aftershowing the user that the bottom edge of the list is being viewed.Providing concurrent visual and haptic feedback enhances the overallfeedback to the user that the end of the list has been reached andimproves the efficiency of the scrolling process. In some embodiments,only one of tactile output 1121 and tactile output 1124 is produced, toavoid providing excessive haptic feedback.

In FIGS. 11H-11I, the device detects another input on list 1111, namelya drag gesture by contact 1126 with movement 1128, which scrolls thelist 1111 of emails 1112 upward in accordance with the movement ofcontact 1126. No tactile output is generated when the edge 1120 of list1111 passes the threshold position 1114, because the input did not causeany scrolling of the list before the edge 1120 passes the thresholdposition 1114.

In FIGS. 11H-11J, area 1122 is displayed and expands between the outeredge 1120 of list 1111 and the threshold position 1114 as the list 1111continues to move upwards in accordance with the movement 1128-b ofcontact 1126-b.

In FIG. 11J, the device detects termination of the contact (e.g.,lift-off of contact 1126-c). In some embodiments, tactile output 1130(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when the devicedetects termination of the contact.

In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output 1130 (e.g.,an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is different from a corresponding characteristic ofthe tactile output 1124 because of the extent by which the outer edge1120 of the list 1111 has moved beyond the threshold position 1114 atthe time when termination of the input is detected is greater for theinput by contact 1126 than for the input by contact 1116. For example,the gain of the tactile output increases as the extent by which theouter edge 1120 of the list 1111 has moved beyond the threshold position1114 increases. In such cases, tactile output 1130 (e.g., a gain of 0.6in FIG. 11J) would have greater gain than tactile output 1124 (e.g., again of 0.3 in FIG. 11E) because the input by contact 1126 moved theouter edge 1120 beyond the threshold position 1114 by a greater amountthan the input by contact 1116 (as indicated by the greater area 1122 inFIG. 11J as compared to FIG. 11E).

In response to detecting termination of the contact 1126-c (FIG. 11J),the device scrolls the list 1111 downward until the outer edge 1120 ofthe list returns to the threshold position 1114, as shown in FIGS.11K-11L.

In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated upon starting to movethe position of the outer edge of the list 1111 back towards thethreshold position 1114 (e.g., when the list 1111 starts to bounce back,the device generates a tactile output indicating that the list 1111 hasstarted to bounce back). This tactile output upon starting to bounceback is optionally in place of or in addition to tactile output 1121(which starts upon outer edge 1120 crossing threshold 1114) and/ortactile output 1124 (which starts upon detecting termination of theinput).

FIGS. 12A-12F illustrate a rubber band effect applied to a digital image(e.g., a screen capture of a MacBook advertisement) after a zoom-outoperation, with one or more tactile outputs.

FIG. 12A displays a user interface 1210 for editing a digital image thatincludes: a digital image 1212 displayed at a first size such that thewidth of the image matches the width of the user interface, with theleft edge 1216 of image 1212 at a threshold position 1214 in the userinterface (e.g., the left edge of user interface 1210) and with theright edge 1220 of image 1212 at a threshold position 1218 in the userinterface (e.g., the right edge of user interface 1210); and affordancesthat when activated (e.g., by a tap gesture) enable various imageediting functions, such as red-eye removal, auto-enhance, crop/rotate,filter, adjustments to light, color, and black & white, revert, andcancel.

In FIGS. 12B-12D, the device detects an input on image 1212, namely apinch gesture by contacts 1222 and 1224 with movements 1226 and 1228,respectively, which zoom out the image 1212 in accordance with themovements of contacts 1222 and 1224. In FIGS. 12B-12D, the left edge1216 of image 1212 moves away from threshold position 1214 and the rightedge 1220 of image 1212 moves away from threshold position 1218 as thepinch gesture and the zoom out operation progress, with (background)areas beyond the left edge 1216 and the right edge 1220 of the imagedisplayed.

In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile output 1230 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when the zoom out starts.Tactile output 1230 provides feedback to the user that the width of thedisplayed image has been reduced below the width of the user interface(which is optionally the default minimum displayed size for the image),which will lead to a rubber band effect after lift-off of at least oneof contacts 1222 and 1224. In some embodiments, a tactile output istriggered when an outer edge of the image (e.g., left edge 1216 and/orright edge 1220) crosses a threshold position in the user interface(e.g., threshold position 1214 and/or threshold position 1218).

In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output 1230 (e.g.,an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed of theinput (e.g., a speed of contact 1224 and/or contact 1226) at a time whenan outer edge of the image 1212 moves across a threshold position in theuser interface 1210. For example, the gain of the tactile outputincreases as the pinching speed of contacts 1224 and 1226 increases whenthe outer edge of image 1212 crosses a threshold position in the userinterface 1210, which helps make the haptic feedback apparent to theuser when faster inputs are made.

In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output 1121 (e.g.,an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed of anouter edge if the image 1212 at a time when the outer edge of the image1212 moves across a threshold position in the user interface 1210. Forexample, the gain of the tactile output increases as the speed of anouter edge (e.g., left edge 1216 and/or right edge 1220) increases whenthe outer edge crosses a threshold position (e.g., threshold position1214 and/or threshold position 1218), which helps make the hapticfeedback apparent to the user when faster inputs are made.

In FIG. 12D, the device detects termination of at least one of thecontacts (e.g., lift-off of contact 1222-c and/or 1224-c). In someembodiments, the device generates tactile output 1232 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when the device detects termination ofat least one of the contacts. In some embodiments, a characteristic oftactile output 1232 (e.g., an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/orwaveform of a tactile output pattern that makes up the tactile outputand/or audio that accompanies the tactile output) is configured based onan extent by which the outer edges 1216 and 1220 of the image 1212 havemoved beyond the threshold positions 1214 and 1218 in the user interface(e.g., at the time when termination of the input is detected). Forexample, the gain of the tactile output increases as the amount of zoomout (demagnification) of image 1212 upon detecting terminationincreases, which makes the haptic feedback increase as the visual rubberband effect feedback increases.

In response to detecting termination of at least one of the contacts(e.g., lift-off of contact 1222-c and/or 1224-c, FIG. 12D), the deviceincreases the size of image 1212 until the width of the image once againmatches the width of the user interface, as shown in FIGS. 12E-12F. InFIG. 12F, the left edge 1216 of image 1212 has returned to the thresholdposition 1214 in the user interface (e.g., the left edge of userinterface 1210) and the right edge 1220 of image 1212 has returned tothe threshold position 1218 in the user interface (e.g., the right edgeof user interface 1210).

The display of the (background) areas beyond the left and right edges ofthe image 1212 as the image zooms out in accordance with the movements1226 and 1228 of contacts 1222 and 1224, respectively, followed by, inresponse to detecting termination of at least one of the contacts,magnifying the image until the width of the image once again matches thewidth of the user interface is another example of a rubber band effect.

Tactile output 1232 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically fills thedisplay with the full width of the image after lift-off, after showingthe user that the entire image is being viewed. Providing concurrentvisual and haptic feedback enhances the overall feedback to the userthat the entire image is being viewed and fills the display, whichimproves the efficiency of viewing images. In some embodiments, only oneof tactile output 1230 and tactile output 1232 is produced, to avoidproviding excessive haptic feedback.

FIGS. 12G-12J illustrate a rubber band effect applied to a digital image(e.g., a screen capture of a MacBook advertisement) after translation,with a tactile output.

In FIG. 12G, the device detects an input on image 1212, namely a draggesture by contact 1238 with movement 1240, which translates the image1212 (e.g., upward) in accordance with the movement of contact 1238. InFIG. 12G, the bottom edge 1236 of image 1212 moves away from thresholdposition 1234 as the drag gesture and the scrolling progress, with more(background) area displayed below the bottom edge 1236.

In FIG. 12H, the device detects termination of the contact (e.g.,lift-off of contact 1238-b). In some embodiments, a tactile output 1242(e.g., MicroTap High (270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when the devicedetects termination of the contact. In some embodiments, acharacteristic of the tactile output 1242 (e.g., an amplitude, duration,frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile output pattern that makes up thetactile output and/or audio that accompanies the tactile output) isconfigured based on an extent by which the bottom edge 1236 of the image1212 has moved beyond the threshold position 1234 in the user interface(e.g., at the time when termination of the input is detected). Forexample, the gain of the tactile output increases as the amount oftranslation of image 1212 upon detecting termination increases, whichmakes the haptic feedback increase as the visual rubber band effectfeedback increases.

In response to detecting termination of the contact 1238-b (FIG. 12H),the device translates the image 1212 (e.g., downward) until the bottomedge 1236 of the image returns to the threshold position 1234, as shownin FIGS. 12I-12J.

The display of more (background) area below the bottom edge 1236 of theimage as the image translates upwards in accordance with the movement1240 of the contact 1238, followed by, in response to detectingtermination of the contact, translating the image in the oppositedirection (e.g., downwards) until the additional (background) areaceases to be displayed, thereby returning the image to its original,centered position, is another example of a rubber band effect.

Tactile output 1242 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically re-centers theimage in the user interface after translation. Providing concurrentvisual and haptic feedback enhances the overall feedback to the userthat the image is being centered and improves the efficiency of thetranslation process.

FIGS. 12K-120 illustrate a rubber band effect applied to a digital image(e.g., a screen capture of a MacBook advertisement) after a zoom-inoperation, with one or more tactile outputs.

In FIGS. 12K-12N, the device detects an input on image 1212, namely adepinch gesture by contacts 1244 and 1246 with movements 1248 and 1250,respectively, which zoom in (magnify) the image 1212 in accordance withthe movements of contacts 1244 and 1246. In FIGS. 12K-12N, decreasingportions of the image 1212 are displayed at increasing magnifications inresponse to detecting the depinch gesture. In FIG. 12L, the image 1212-bpasses through a zoom-in amount (magnification) that corresponds to apredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) for the image afterthe input terminates (e.g., after lift-off of at least one of contacts1244 and 1246).

In some embodiments, device 100 generates tactile output 1252 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz), Gain: 0.6) is triggered when image 1212-b passesthrough the zoom-in amount (magnification) that corresponds to thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) for the image afterthe input terminates (e.g., image 1212-b with the magnification shown inFIG. 12L). Tactile output 1252 provides feedback to the user that thezoom-in amount (magnification) of the image 1212 is being increasedabove the predefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) for theimage after the input terminates (which is optionally the defaultmaximum magnification for the image), which will lead to a rubber bandeffect after lift-off of at least one of contacts 1244 and 1246. In someembodiments, a tactile output is triggered when an outer edge of theimage (e.g., beyond the portion of image 1212-b displayed on touchscreen 112 in FIG. 12L) crosses a threshold position in the userinterface (e.g., also beyond the portion of image 1212-b displayed ontouch screen 112 in FIG. 12L).

In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output 1252 (e.g.,an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed of theinput (e.g., a speed of contact 1244 and/or contact 1246) at a time whenthe image 1212-b passes through the zoom-in amount (magnification) thatcorresponds to the predefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) forthe image after the input terminates. For example, the gain of thetactile output increases as the depinching speed of contacts 1244 and1246 increases when the image 1212-b passes through the zoom-in amount(magnification) that corresponds to the predefined maximum zoom-inamount (magnification) for the image after the input terminates, whichhelps make the haptic feedback apparent to the user when faster inputsare made.

In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output 1252 (e.g.,an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of a tactile outputpattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audio that accompaniesthe tactile output) is configured based on a characteristic speed ofzooming in at a time when the image 1212-b passes through the zoom-inamount (magnification) that corresponds to the predefined maximumzoom-in amount (magnification) for the image after the input terminates.For example, the gain of the tactile output increases as the speed ofzooming in increases when the image 1212-b passes through the zoom-inamount (magnification) that corresponds to the predefined maximumzoom-in amount (magnification) for the image after the input terminates,which helps make the haptic feedback apparent to the user when fasterinputs are made.

In FIG. 12N, the device detects termination of at least one of thecontacts (e.g., lift-off of contact 1244-d and/or 1246-d). In someembodiments, a tactile output 1254 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz), Gain: 0.6)is triggered when the device detects termination of at least one of thecontacts. In some embodiments, a characteristic of the tactile output1254 (e.g., an amplitude, duration, frequency, and/or waveform of atactile output pattern that makes up the tactile output and/or audiothat accompanies the tactile output) is configured based on an extent bywhich the image 1212 has been zoomed in (magnified) beyond thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) for the image afterthe input terminates (e.g., at the time when termination of the input isdetected). For example, the gain of the tactile output increases as theamount of zoom in (magnification) of image 1212 upon detectingtermination increases, which makes the haptic feedback increase as thevisual rubber band effect feedback increases.

In response to detecting termination of at least one of the contacts(e.g., lift-off of contact 1244-d and/or 1246-d, FIG. 12N), the devicedecreases the size of image 1212 to the predefined maximum zoom-inamount (magnification) 1212-b, as shown in FIG. 12O.

The display of the image 1212 at magnifications greater than thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) as the image zooms inin accordance with the movements 1248 and 1250 of contacts 1244 and1246, respectively, followed by, in response to detecting termination ofat least one of the contacts, demagnifying the image until the imagemagnification matches the predefined maximum zoom-in amount(magnification) is another example of a rubber band effect.

Tactile output 1254 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically displays theimage at the predefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) afterlift-off. Providing concurrent visual and haptic feedback enhances theoverall feedback to the user that the image is being viewed at thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification), which improves theefficiency of zooming images. In some embodiments, only one of tactileoutput 1252 and tactile output 1254 is produced, to avoid providingexcessive haptic feedback.

Turning to FIGS. 13A-13L, these figures illustrate exemplary web browserinterface for providing tactile outputs on zooming (magnifying ordemagnifying) beyond a predefined web browser boundary, in accordancewith some embodiments. FIGS. 13A-13G illustrate zooming in (magnifying)on an exemplary webpage and the tactile output generated in connectionwith the webpage expansion. FIGS. 13H-13L illustrate zooming out(de-magnifying) an exemplary webpage and the tactile output generated inconnection with the shrinking of the webpage.

In FIG. 13A, an exemplary web browser interface 1310 is displayed ontouch screen display 112. In some embodiments, the browser interface1310 includes content display region 1326 that displays a webpage (e.g.,webpage 1324). For example, in FIG. 13A, webpage 1324 corresponds to theweb address “apple.com” displayed in the address bar above contentdisplay region 1322. In FIG. 13A, boundary 1322 of webpage 1324coincides with the boundary of content display region 1326 of browserinterface 1310.

In FIG. 13B, the device detects an input, such as a depinch gesture bytwo contacts 1302 and 1304 moving away from each other across thetouch-sensitive surface 112, as indicated by movement 1306 and 1308. Inresponse to detecting the depinch gesture by two contacts 1302, 1304,the device expands the webpage 1324, such that the position of boundary1322 of webpage 1324 is pushed outside of content display region 1326(e.g., outside of the displayed region of the web browser interface1310). As a result, only a portion of webpage 1324 is visible on touchscreen display 112. As contacts 1302 and 1304 move further apart, inFIG. 13C, the expansion of webpage 1324 continues in accordance withmovements 1306 and 1308 of contacts 1302 and 1304.

In FIG. 13D, the device detects lift-off of contacts 1302 and 1304, yetwebpage 1324 continues to expand due to simulated inertia after lift-offof the contacts, in accordance with some embodiments. While expansion ofwebpage 1324 continues, the device detects that boundary 1322 of webpage1324 moving past a threshold position outside the content display region1326 of the web browser interface 1310, where the threshold positioncorresponds to a predetermined maximum size of the expanded webpage in astable state, as shown in FIG. 13E. In response to detecting that theexpansion has passed this predetermined maximum size, the devicegenerates tactile output 1320 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of0.6) to indicate that the maximum stable size of the webpage has beenreached, and that the webpage will shrink back to this stable maximumsize once the influence of the simulated inertia ends. FIG. 13Fillustrates the continued expansion of webpage 1324 under the influenceof simulated inertia. FIG. 13G illustrates that after webpage 1324shrink back to the predetermined maximum size and remains at thatpredetermined maximum size after the influence of simulated inertia isended.

The display of the webpage 1324 at magnifications greater than thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) as the webpage zoomsin in accordance with the movements due to simulated inertia, followedby, in response to detecting termination of simulated inertia,demagnifying the image until the image magnification matches thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) is another example ofa rubber band effect.

Tactile output 1320 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically displays thewebpage at the predefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification) afterlift-off. Providing concurrent visual and haptic feedback enhances theoverall feedback to the user that the webpage is being viewed at thepredefined maximum zoom-in amount (magnification), which improves theefficiency of zooming webpages.

In FIG. 13H, exemplary web browser interface 1310 is displayed on touchscreen display 112. In FIG. 13I, the device detects an input, such as apinch gesture by two contacts 1312 and 1314 moving toward each otheracross the touch-sensitive surface 112, as indicated by movements 1316and 1318. In response to detecting the pinch gesture by contacts 1312and 1314, the device shrinks webpage 1324, such that the position of anouter edge 1322 of webpage 1324 is pulled inside the boundary of contentdisplay region 1326. As a result, a smaller version of webpage 1324 isdisplayed within content display region 1326 with space around webpage1324.

In some embodiments, the previous stable size of webpage 1324 is theoriginal size of webpage 1324 prior to detection of the pinch gesture.In some embodiments, the tactile output is not generated until thedevice detects a termination of the pinch gesture (e.g., lift-off of atleast one of contacts 1312 and 1314 is detected). For example, in FIGS.13I-13J, as contacts 1312 and 1314 move closer to each other, webpage1324 continues to shrink in accordance with the movements 1316 and 1318of contacts 1312 and 1304. In FIG. 13J, in response to detecting thelift-off of contacts 1312 and 1314, the device generates tactile output1326 (e.g., MicroTap High (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate thatthe current size of the webpage is an unstable size, and that a rubberband effect will be applied to expand the webpage to a stable size(e.g., the original size which is also the predetermined minimum size ofthe webpage). As shown in FIGS. 13K-13L, the device restores the size ofwebpage 1324 by expanding webpage 1324 until boundary 1322 of thewebpage coincides with the boundary of the content display region 1326again (FIG. 13L).

The display of the (background) areas beyond the boundary 1322 ofwebpage 1324 as the webpage zooms out in accordance with the movementsof contacts 1312 and 1314, respectively, followed by, in response todetecting termination of at least one of the contacts, magnifying theimage until the boundary 1322 of the webpage once again matches theboundary of content display region 1326 is another example of a rubberband effect.

Tactile output 1236 reinforces the visual feedback to the user that arubber band effect is being applied, which automatically fills thedisplay with the original size of the webpage after lift-off, aftershowing the user that the entire webpage is being viewed. Providingconcurrent visual and haptic feedback enhances the overall feedback tothe user that the entire webpage is being viewed and fills the contentdisplay region of the browser interface, which improves the efficiencyof viewing webpages.

FIGS. 14A-14T, 15A-15L, and 16A-16K illustrate providing tactile outputto indicate creation, picking up, dragging, and dropping of an object,in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in thesefigures also illustrate providing tactile output to indicate otherchanges in the user interface, such as snapping to predetermined snappositions, moving cross boundaries in the user interface, shifting tonew areas of the user interface, etc. The examples in these figures areused to illustrate the processes described below with respect to FIGS.30A-30G.

FIGS. 14A-14T illustrate exemplary calendar user interfaces forproviding various tactile outputs while performing various calendarevent creation and editing functions, in accordance with someembodiments.

FIGS. 14A-14D illustrate exemplary calendar user interfaces forproviding tactile outputs during creation of a new calendar entry. InFIG. 14A, a week view calendar interface 1410 is displayed on touchscreen display 112. Calendar interface 1410 includes a plurality ofpredetermined object snap positions. In some embodiments, the pluralityof predetermined object snap positions are exact locations on the userinterface (e.g., locations that correspond to certain predefined points,lines, cells, and/or areas) that an object would to settle into when theobject is released (e.g., dropped, or otherwise freed from factors thatinfluence the object's movement) within a threshold range of the exactlocations. For example, in calendar interface 1410, date lines in thecalendar grid define object snap positions for a calendar entry, apredefined snap position corresponds a respective date, and a calendarentry would settle between two adjacent date lines when the calendarentry is dropped in proximity to a region between the two adjacent datelines.

In addition to vertical date lines, calendar interface 1410 alsoincludes horizontal lines dividing a day by hour or a fraction of anhour, such that a cell in calendar interface 1410 represents a time slotin a particular day. In some embodiments, the horizontal lines are notthe only object snap position, i.e., the object may snap to invisiblesnap positions between adjacent hour lines (e.g., invisible snappositions correspond to 15 minute intervals away from the hour lines).In some embodiments, calendar interface 1410 also includes a horizontalline with a dot 1405 indicating current time and date to facilitateevent marking.

In FIG. 14A, calendar interface 1410 initially contains one existingcalendar entry (e.g., “Have Lunch”) scheduled for Sunday, August 31. Insome embodiments, a user may initiate a new event creation by an inputon the touch screen display 112, as shown in FIG. 14B. In someembodiments, the device detects a long press input by contact 1412 onthe touch screen 112 (e.g., a contact over the displayed calendarinterface 1410 with intensity exceeding IT_(L) for a predeterminedthreshold amount of time, e.g., 300 ms) to initiate the creation of anew calendar entry. In some embodiments, the device detects a deep pressinput having an intensity exceeding ITS on the displayed calendarinterface 1410 to initiate creation of a new calendar entry.

Also shown in FIG. 14B, in response to detecting the input by contact1412, an object 1404 with label “New Event” is displayed. Object 1404 isdisplayed in a selected state (e.g., as indicated by resize handle 1405on object 1404) in calendar interface 1410. In some embodiments, thedevice displays an animation showing the object being lifted up from thecalendar interface toward the surface of the display (e.g., jumping upto contact 1412).

In conjunction with visually indicating the selection of object 1404(and lifting up of object 1404 toward contact 1412, the device generatestactile output 1440 (e.g., MicroTap High (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.8) toindicate that a new calendar entry is created. Subsequently, in FIG.14C, a new event information entry interface 1411 is displayed forentering event information, e.g., title “Go to Gym” and/or location forthe new calendar entry. In some embodiments, if movement is detectedbefore lift-off of contact 1412, the device optionally generates anothertactile output to indicate that the new calendar entry is moved. Thetactile output signals to the user that the calendar entry is moved to alocation different from its initial location, in case this movement iscaused inadvertently by an unintentional movement of contact 1412 beforelift-off. No tactile output is generated when no movement of the contact1412 was detected prior to lift-off of contact 1412, and object 1412will remain at its original location. Once the event information isentered in interface 1411, the user may select the “Add” affordance tosave and return to calendar interface 1410, as shown in FIG. 14D. InFIG. 14D, the title of the new event has been updated to “Go to Gym.”Object 1406 is now an existing calendar entry, and appears in anunselected state.

FIGS. 14E-14J illustrate exemplary user interfaces for providing tactileoutputs during picking up, dragging and dropping of an existing calendarentry, in accordance with some embodiments. The picking up, dragging,and dropping of the existing calendar entry are performed in response tovarious portions of an input by contact 1413.

FIG. 14E illustrates picking up an existing calendar entry 1408 inresponse to a first portion of the input by contact 1413. As shown inFIG. 14E, the device detects a long press input by contact 1413, andchanges the appearance of calendar entry 1408 to indicate its selectedstate. In conjunction with visually indicating the selection and liftingup of calendar entry 1408, the device 100 generates tactile output 1442(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0). Tactile output 1442 forpicking up an existing object in FIG. 14E (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) witha gain of 1.0) has a higher frequency and amplitude (and/or gain factor)than tactile output 1440 for creating a new object in FIG. 14B (e.g.,MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.8).

FIGS. 14F-14I illustrate dragging the item in response to a secondportion of the input by contact 1413. In some embodiments, the secondportion of the input by contact 1413 includes movement of contact 1413across the touch screen display 112. In some embodiments, the selectedobject 1408 is dragged by contact 1413 during movement 1414 of contact1413. During movement of contact 1414, the object 1408 snaps to one ormore snap positions (e.g., the date line between Tuesday and Wednesday)when the object and contact 1413 are near these snap positions.

In FIG. 14F, the device detects movement of contact 1413 to a locationwithin a threshold range of date boundary between Tuesday, September 2and Wednesday, September 3. In FIG. 14G, in accordance with the movementof contact 1413, the device moves the selected object 1408 from Tuesday,September 2 to a time slot on Wednesday, September 3, and displays aghost image 1416 of the moving object 1408 at its pre-movement objectsnap position, e.g., 11 AM-12 PM, Tuesday, September 2.

In some embodiments, the selected object 1408 stays at one object snapposition (e.g., Tuesday, September 2) until contact 1413 has moved outof the threshold range associated with the current object snap position(e.g., Tuesday, September 2), and reached the threshold range associatedwith the next snap position (e.g., Wednesday, September 3) such that itappears as though object 1408 slides under the contact and springs tothe next snap position (e.g., Wednesday, September 3).

In conjunction with moving object 1408 to the next predetermined objectsnap position, the device generates tactile output 1444 (e.g., aMicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4). In some embodiments, tactileoutput 1444 for indicating object snapping into a new position has loweramplitude than tactile output 1442 (FIG. 14E) for indicating objectbeing picked up (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0).

After object 1408 snaps to a time slot on Wednesday, September 3, inFIG. 14H, contact 1413 moves in a vertical direction as indicated bymovement 1414. In accordance with the contact's movement, the devicemoves object 1408 to a different time of the day, e.g., from starting at11 AM to starting at 11:15 AM, as shown in FIG. 14I. no tactile outputis generated by the device in conjunction with moving the event objectto a different time.

In FIG. 14J, the device detects a third portion of the input by contact1413 and determines that drop-off criteria are met (e.g., lift-off ofcontact 1413 is detected, and object 1408 is stationary). In response todetermining that drop-off criteria are met, the device 100 visuallyindicates deselection of the object by ceasing to display the ghostobject 1416 and/or changing the appearance of the object 1408 to anunselected state. In addition, the device generates tactile output 1446(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate that the object1416 been dropped and has settled into a time slot. In some embodiments,there is a delay between the start of the drop-off and the time when theobject finally settles into a snap position, and the device generatestactile output 1416 at a time that is synchronized with the finalsettling of the object into the snap position. FIG. 14J shows object1416 in the snap position associated with the drop-off, e.g., the timeslot corresponding to 11:15 AM-12:15 PM, Wednesday, September 3, in theunselected state, when tactile output 1446 is generated.

FIGS. 14K-14M illustrate providing tactile output when a previouslyundisplayed portion of the calendar interface is displayed in responseto a calendar entry being moved to a boundary of the calendar interface,in accordance with some embodiments. The process includes first pickingup the object and then dragging the object to the edge of the calendarinterface.

FIG. 14K illustrates that an existing calendar entry 1420 is picked upby a long press input by contact 1415, and in conjunction with showingthe selection and lift-up of calendar entry 1420, the device generatestactile output 1448 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0) toindicate selection of calendar entry 1420.

In FIG. 14L, the device detects movement of contact 1415, and inresponse to detecting movement of contact 1415, the device movescalendar entry 1420 with the movement of contact 1415. The devicegenerates a respective tactile output (e.g., tactile output 1450(MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4) each time when calendar entry1420 snaps into a new time slot (e.g., time slot on September 4) in thecalendar interface 1410 when contact 1415 (and calendar entry 1420)moves within the threshold range of the new time slot. During themovement of calendar entry 1420, a ghost image 1406 of the calendarentry is displayed at the original location of calendar entry 1420.

In FIG. 14M, as calendar entry 1420 is dragged close to the edge of thecalendar interface 1410, the device shifts the calendar interface 1410such that a previously undisplayed portion of the calendar interface(e.g., the column corresponds to September 7) is displayed underneathcalendar entry 1420 near the edge of the calendar interface. Forexample, while calendar entry 1420 remains stationary at the edge of thecalendar interface 1410, the calendar interface slides leftwardunderneath calendar entry 1420 such that the next day (September 7) isdisplayed under calendar entry 1420. The device also generates tactileoutput 1452 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4) in conjunctionwith shifting calendar interface 1410 relative to calendar entry 1420.In some embodiments, as contact 1415 is maintained at the edge ofcalendar interface 1410, the device periodically shifts the calendarinterface leftward to reveal additional days until lift-off of contact1415 is detected. In some embodiments, the device generates acorresponding tactile output each time the calendar interface shifts bya day.

FIGS. 14N-14T illustrate exemplary calendar user interfaces forproviding tactile outputs when a calendar entry is flicked acrossmultiple snap positions and settling into a final position in thecalendar interface, in accordance with some embodiments.

Similar to moving a calendar entry by dragging as described above withreference to FIGS. 14N-14M, calendar entry 1430 is first selected duringa first portion of an input by contact 1431 (e.g., a press input bycontact 1431), as shown in FIG. 14N. In response to visually indicatingselection of calendar entry 1430 by contact 1431, the device generatestactile output 1454 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0) toindicate selection of calendar entry 1430.

In FIG. 14O, the device detects the second portion of the input bycontact 1431 that includes a fast movement 1432 of contact 1431 (e.g., afling or flick gesture) across the touch screen display 112 followed bylift-off of contact 1431 (e.g., at a location between September 2 columnand September 3 column).

FIGS. 14P-14S shows that, calendar entry 1430 continues to move to theright across multiple days under the influence of simulated inertia. thedevice snaps calendar entry 1430 to a time slot in each day thatcalendar entry 1430 passes, and generates a corresponding tactile output(e.g., tactile output 1456 and tactile output 1458, respectively (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4) to indicate that calendar entry1430 has moved to a new snap position.

In FIG. 14S, when calendar entry 1430 has slowed down enough (e.g., thespeed of calendar entry 1430 drops to zero or a threshold speed) afterthe termination of the input by contact 1431, the device determines thatdrop-off criteria are met. As shown in FIGS. 14S-14T, when the speed ofcalendar entry 1430 drops below the threshold speed and calendar entry1430 is within a threshold range of a predetermined snap position (e.g.,a slot on September 5), the device snaps calendar entry 1430 to thepredetermined snap position in the calendar interface 1410 (FIG. 14T).When calendar entry 1430 settles into the snap position, the devicegenerates tactile output 1460 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of0.6) as shown in FIG. 14T. In FIGS. 14Q and 14S, before calendar entry1430 snaps into any snap position (e.g., when calendar entry 1430 isbetween date lines), no tactile output is generated.

In FIG. 14T, after calendar entry 1430 settles into the final snapposition, the device visually indicates deselection of calendar entry1430 and ceases to display the ghost image 1434.

FIGS. 15A-15L illustrate providing various tactile outputs whenre-arranging weather items in a listing of weather items, in accordancewith some embodiments. The re-arrangement of the weather items isperformed in accordance with picking up one of the weather items andmoving the weather item either by a drag gesture or by a flick gesture.Movement of the weather item in accordance with a drag gesture is shownin FIGS. 15B-15E, and movement of the weather item in accordance with aflick gesture is shown in FIGS. 15F-15L.

In this example, tactile outputs are generated when a weather item ispicked up from a snap position and dropping off at another snapposition. Additional tactile outputs are generated in conjunction withautomatic movements of other weather items that are not picked up, e.g.,other items snapping into nearby snap positions to make room for theitem that is being dragged or flicked, and other items bumping into oneanother as they move to make room for the item that is being dragged orflicked, as explained in greater detail below.

In FIG. 15A, a weather forecast interface 1510 is displayed on touchscreen display 112. Weather forecast interface 1510 includes a pluralityof weather items arranged in a list. Each weather item provides anindication of weather at a respective geographical location. Forexample, a listing of weather items 1502 (1502-1 through 1502-7)correspond to weather forecasts for a plurality of cities. For example,item 1502-1 provides current weather conditions for the city ofCupertino, item 1502-2 for the city of Sunnyvale, item 1502-3 for Xi'an,1502-4 for Shenzhen, 1502-5 for Beijing, 1502-6 for Shanghai, and 1502-7for a different city etc. In the weather forecast interface 1510, theseitems 1502 are located next to one another, i.e., occupying adjacentslots (e.g., snap positions 1504). Boundary lines between adjacentweather items define snap positions 1504 for these weather items 1502.For example, Shenzhen weather item 1502-4, Beijing weather item 1502-5,and Shanghai weather item 1502-6 occupy three adjacent slots. Theboundary line between adjacent weather items for Shenzhen 1502-4 andBeijing 1502-5, and the boundary line between adjacent weather items forBeijing 1502-5 and Shanghai 1502-6 define a slot that correspond to snapposition 1504-4. In some embodiments, a weather item may settle into aslot defined by a pair of adjacent boundary lines when the weather itemmoves into the slot.

In FIG. 15B, similar to selecting an existing calendar entry, Beijingweather item 1502-5 is selected in response to a first portion of aninput by contact 1512 (e.g., a long press or a deep press). In responseto the selection of weather item 1502-5, the device visually indicatesthat Beijing weather item 1502-5 is selected, e.g., highlighted,enlarged and/or focused, as opposed to dimmed, shrank, and/or blurred ofthe unselected items 1502-1, 1502-2, 1502-3, 1502-4, 1502-5, and 1502-6.In conjunction with visually indicating the selection of item 1502-5,the device generates tactile output 1520 (e.g., MicroTap High (270 Hz)with a gain of 1.0) to indicate selection of item 1502-5.

In FIG. 15C, while Beijing weather item 1502-5 is selected, movement1514 of contact 1512 is detected. In response to detecting the upwardmovement 1514 of contact 1512, the device moves the selected item 1502-5in accordance with the movement of contact 1512, as shown in FIGS.15C-15D.

In FIG. 15D, as Beijing weather item 1502-5 moves further upward towardssnap position 1504-3, where unselected weather item for Shenzhen 1502-4is located, the slot 1504-4 that corresponds to Beijing weather item1502-5's pre-movement position 1504-4 becomes vacant. To make room forBeijing weather item 1502-5 and to fill the vacant slot, Shenzhenweather item 1504-3 moves downward toward the vacant slot. As Shenzhenweather item 1504-3 moves into the vacant slot at snap position 1504-4,the device generates tactile output 1522 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with again of 1.0) to indicate the movement of weather item 1504-3 into thevacant slot at snap position 1504-4.

In FIG. 15F, after the Beijing weather item 1502-5 is picked up bycontact 1512 (in FIG. 15B), the device detects a flick gesture bycontact 1512 (e.g., contact 1512 quickly moves before lift-off). Asshown in FIG. 15G, Beijing weather item 1502-5 continues to move upwardafter the lift-off of contact 1512 with gradually decreasing speed.While the weather item 1502-5 continues to move, first the slotcorresponding to snap position 1504-3 is vacated. To make room for themoving item 1502-5 and to fill the vacant slot at snap position 1504-3,the device moves Xi'an weather item 1502-3 at snap position 1504-2toward snap position 1504-3, as shown in FIG. 15G. When Xi'an weatheritem 1502-3 settles into snap position 1504-3, the device generatestactile output 1524 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0) toindicate that item 1502-3 has settled into snap position 1504-3, and theslot corresponding to snap position 1504-2 has become vacant, as shownin FIG. 15H.

Similarly, as Beijing weather item 1502-5 moves pass snap position1504-2 and within a threshold range of snap position 1504-1 (FIG. 15I),the device moves Sunnyvale weather item 1502-2 at snap position 1504-1toward snap position 1504-2. When Sunnyvale weather item 1502-2 settlesinto snap position 1504-2, the device generates tactile output 1526(e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 1.0), as shown in FIG. 15J.

Also shown in FIG. 15I, the speed of weather item 1502-5 has slowed to apoint that drop-off criteria are met and weather item 1502-5 is within athreshold range of snap position 1504-1. In FIG. 15K, the device snapsweather item 1502-5 to the slot at snap position 1504-1. In FIG. 15L,because the drop-off criteria are met, i.e., the movement speed ofweather item 1502-5 is below the threshold speed after weather item1502-5 reaches within the threshold range of the snap position 1504-1,the device visually indicates deselection of weather item 1502-5 (e.g.,by shrinking the weather item Beijing 1502-5 to a pre-selection size anddrops it into the slot at snap position 1504-1). In addition, the devicegenerates tactile output 1528 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of0.6) to indicate that weather item 1502-5 has settled into the slot atsnap position 1504-1.

In some embodiments, when weather items snap into adjacent slots to makeroom for the moving item, e.g., as shown in FIGS. 15E, 15H, and 15J, thedevice generates tactile outputs that are MicroTaps (150 Hz) with a gainof 0.4. In some embodiments, if multiple items are moving and snappinginto positions in a short amount of time, the device may optionally skipone or more tactile outputs if the tactile outputs generation rate isgoing to exceed a threshold rate (e.g., one tactile output per 0.05seconds) for tactile output generation.

FIGS. 16A-16K illustrate providing various tactile outputs whenre-arranging icons on a home screen user interface, in accordance withsome embodiments. The re-arrangement of icons is performed due tomovement of one icon in accordance with movement of contact, e.g.,flicking an icon out of the dock (FIGS. 16B-16E) or dragging an iconinto the dock (FIGS. 16F-16K).

In FIG. 16A, a home screen user interface 1610 is displayed on touchscreen display 112. Home screen 1610 includes a plurality of applicationlaunch icons that correspond to different applications, e.g., a“calendar” icon corresponds to a calendar application, a “photos” iconcorresponds to a photo browsing/editing application etc. The applicationlaunch icons are displayed at a plurality of predetermined snappositions, such as snap positions 1602 in a general area of the homescreen or in dock at the bottom of the home screen user interface. Insome embodiments, a moving application icon settles into a predeterminedsnap position when the moving icon is within a threshold range of thepredetermined snap position.

In some embodiments, the snap positions are dynamically determined basedon the number of icons on the user interface (either in the general areaof the home screen or within the dock) and display settings (e.g., theicon size and the area for displaying the icons), such that iconsdisplayed at these snap positions appear to be adjacent to one anotherin an evenly spaced grid.

In FIG. 16A, the area outside the dock is divided into a four by fourgrid, while the area in the dock is divided into a single row with fourcells for displaying four adjacent icons (FIG. 16A) or three cells fordisplaying three adjacent icons (FIG. 16F). When an icon outside thedock is added to the dock or an icon in the dock is removed from thedock, the device recalculates the snap positions, re-arranges othericons in the dock into the new snap positions, and generates a tactileoutput in conjunction with the icon re-arrangement, as explained ingreater detail below with reference to FIG. 16J.

In some embodiments, sequence numbers or the like are assigned to thesepredetermined snap positions, e.g., 1602-1 . . . 1602-16 in FIG. 16A,such that the predetermined snap positions are filled up in sequence andthe icons are displayed adjacent to one another. When the regioncorresponds to a snap position is empty (e.g., due to a movement of theicon out of that region, FIG. 16G), an icon at an adjacent higher (orlower) numbered snap position automatically moves in to fill the emptyslot. For example, in FIGS. 16G-16H, when the “Safari” icon 1608 movesout of the snap position 1602-13, the “calculator” icon 1604automatically moves from the snap position 1602-14 to 1602-13 to fillthe empty slot. In such embodiments, a moving application icon settlesinto the highest (or lowest) numbered vacant snap position, e.g., thepredetermined snap position 1602-14 as shown in FIGS. 16B-16E.

Referring to FIG. 16B, calculator icon 1604 in the dock is selected inresponse to a first portion of an input by contact 1612 (e.g., a longpress or a deep press by contact 1612). In response to the selection oficon 1604, the device visually indicates that calendar icon 1604 isselected (e.g., icon 1604 is highlighted and enlarged). In conjunctionwith visually indicating the selection of icon 1604, the devicegenerates tactile output 1626 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of1.0) to indicate selection of icon 1604.

In FIG. 16C, while calculator icon 1604 is selected, a second portion ofinput by contact 1604 is detected as indicated by the movement 1614 ofcontact 1612. In response to detecting the movement 1614 of contact1612, the device moves the selected calculator icon 1604 in accordancewith the movement 1614 of contact 1612 out of the dock.

In FIG. 16D, the device detects fast finger movement and subsequentlylift-off of contact 1612. In response, the device continues to movecalculator icon 1604 after detecting the lift-off of contact 1612. Thecalculator icon 1604 moves with gradually decreasing speed after thecontact lift-off due to simulated inertia. When the simulated inertialmovement of calculator icon 1604 stops after the contact lift-off, thedevice moves calendar icon 1604 towards a vacant region in the userinterface that corresponds to the next available predetermined snapposition 1602-14.

In FIG. 16E, the drop-off criteria are met, e.g., the movement speed ofthe object drops below a threshold speed after calculator icon 1604 iswithin proximity of the snap position 1602-14. In response, the devicemoves calculator icon 1604 into the snap position 1602-14, visuallyindicates deselection of calculator 1604 (e.g., by shrinking calculatoricon to a pre-selection size) and generates tactile output 1628 (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate that calculator icon1604 has settled into a snap position 1602-14.

Though not shown in FIG. 16E, in some embodiments, as the device detectsremoval of an icon from the dock, the device calculates snap positionsand moves the remaining icons (e.g., icons 1622, 1624, and 1620) in thedock to the new snap positions so that these icons are displayeduniformly in the dock. In conjunction with re-arranging the remainingicons, in some embodiments, the device generates a tactile output (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4) to simulate icons snapping intotheir new positions.

In FIG. 16F, Safari icon 1608 located outside of the dock is selected inresponse to a first portion of an input by contact 1616 (e.g., a longpress or a deep press by contact 1616). In response to the first portionof the input, the device visually indicates that Safari icon 1608 isselected (e.g., icon 1608 is highlighted and enlarged). In conjunctionwith visually indicating the selection of icon 1608, the devicegenerates tactile output 1630 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of1.0) to indicate selection of icon 1608.

In FIG. 16G, while Safari icon 1608 is selected, the device detectsmovement 1618 of contact 1616. In response to detecting movement 1618 ofcontact 1616, the device moves the selected Safari icon 1608 inaccordance with the movement 1618, e.g., first moving icon 1608 out ofthe snap position 1602-13, then closer to the dock (FIG. 16H), and theninto the dock (FIG. 16I).

In FIG. 16J, as the device detects that icon 1608 has entered the dock,the device calculates snap positions to accommodate icon 1608 inside thedock. The device then moves other icons (e.g., icons 1620, 1622, and1624) in the dock to the new snap positions to make room for Safari icon1608. In conjunction with re-arranging other icons, in some embodiments,the device generates tactile output 1632 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with again of 0.4).

In FIG. 16K, drop-off criteria are met (e.g., the movement speed ofSafari icon 1608 drops below a threshold speed after the object iswithin proximity of a snap position in the dock). In response todetermining that the drop-off criteria are met, the device 100 movesSafari icon 1608 into the snap position in the dock, visually indicatesdeselection of Safari icon 1608 (e.g., by shrinking Safari icon to apre-selection size) and generates tactile output 1634 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) to indicate that Safari icon 1608 hassettled into the snap position in the dock.

FIGS. 17A-17H and 18A-18E illustrate providing tactile outputs onsatisfaction of device orientation criteria, in accordance with someembodiments. FIGS. 17A-17H and 18A-18E are used to illustrate theprocesses described below with respect to FIGS. 32A-32C.

FIGS. 17A-17H illustrate exemplary compass user interface and varioustactile outputs generated when changing the orientation of the device100 based on alignment of the device with a nearby magnetic field (e.g.,the Earth's magnetic field), in accordance with some embodiments.

In FIG. 17A, a compass interface 1700 is displayed on touch screendisplay 112. The compass user interface 1700 includes a compass face1710 with a plurality of major markings 1704 (e.g., the bold line at 0degree, 30 degree, 60 degree, North, East etc.) that correspond to aplurality of major directions relative to a magnetic field near thedevice (e.g., every 30 degrees away from true North). In someembodiments, the compass face 1710 further includes, between each pairof adjacent major markings of the plurality of major markings 1704, aplurality of minor markings 1706 that correspond to a plurality of minordirections (e.g., 1 degree, 32 degree etc.). On the compass interface1700, the device also displays an indicator of device orientation 1702that indicates the current orientation of the electronic device 100,e.g., the indicator 1702 coincides with a minor marking at 36 degree inbetween two major markings North and East indicating the currentorientation of the electronic device is 36 degree north east. Inaddition, compass interface 1700 includes orientation value indicator1708 that textually specifies the current orientation of the device 100.

In FIG. 17B, as the device reorients (e.g., rotates counterclockwise),the compass face rotates clockwise until indicator 1702 coincides with amajor marking, e.g., 30 degree marking, the device determines that thedevice has reached a predetermined direction, e.g., every 30 degree awayfrom North, and generates tactile output 1712 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz)with a gain of 0.8).

In FIG. 17C, as the device reorients further (e.g., rotatescounterclockwise), the compass face rotates clockwise further past themajor marking (e.g., 30 degree) until the indicator 1702 coincides witha minor marking (e.g., 29 degree marking). The device determines thatthe device has not reached a predetermined direction, e.g., every 30degrees away from North, thus does not generate any tactile output.Similarly, in FIG. 17D, when the device rotates to four degrees fromNorth, compass face 1710 rotates clockwise further to indicate thecurrent orientation as four degrees away from North. The devicedetermines that the device has not reached a predetermined direction,and does not generate any tactile output.

The reorientation of device 100 continues, and as shown in FIGS.17E-17H, the compass face 1710 rotates clockwise further. In accordancewith a determination that the device has reached the predetermineddirections at 0 degree to North (FIG. 17E) and 330 degree away fromNorth (FIG. 17H), the device generates tactile outputs 1714 and 1716(e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.8), respectively. In contrast,no tactile output is generated when the device has not reached anypredetermined direction (e.g., 358 degrees away from North in FIG. 17For 331 degrees away from North in FIG. 17G).

FIGS. 18A-18E illustrate an exemplary level user interface and tactileoutput generated when the device is level and stable based on analignment of the device with a plane normal to the Earth's gravitationalfield, in accordance with some embodiments.

In FIG. 18A, a level interface 1810 is displayed on touch screen display112. The level user interface 1810 includes an alignment indicator thatindicates a current degree of deviation from a level state, e.g., twointersecting circles 1804 and 1806. The overlap portion 1802 between theintersecting circles 1804 and 1806 and the number (e.g., −10 degrees)within the overlap portion 1802 indicate how much the device deviatesfrom the level state (e.g., by 10 degrees in FIG. 18A).

FIGS. 18B-18D illustrate that in accordance with adjusting the levelnessof device 100, the alignment indicator is updated in real time toindicate that the device is approaching a level state, e.g., firstdeviating from a level state by 1 degree (FIG. 18B), then deviating froma level state by a fraction of a degree as indicated by the number 0 andthe two circles 1806 and 1804 being almost concentric.

In FIG. 18E, in accordance with a determination that the device is leveland stable, e.g., the deviation from the level state remains below athreshold amount (e.g., less than 1 degree) for at least a thresholdamount of time (e.g., one second), the device changes the levelinterface 1810, e.g., to a different color or shade, to indicate thatthe current orientation of the device is level and stable, and generatesa tactile output 1804 (e.g., MicroTap (150 Hz) with a gain of 0.8).

FIGS. 19A-19T illustrate generating tactile outputs when a moveablecomponent moves through a sequence of selectable values or options in avalue picker, in accordance with some embodiments. These figures areused to illustrate the processes described below with respect to FIGS.34A-34D.

In this example, a time picker user interface 1910 is illustrated. Timepicker user interface 1910 includes first moveable component 1950 (e.g.,a rotatable minute wheel) for selecting a minute value from a sequenceof sixty minute values (e.g., 0-59). Time picker user interface 1910further includes second moveable component 1948 (e.g., a rotatable hourwheel) for selecting an hour value from a sequence of twenty four hourvalues (e.g., 0-23). Moveable component 1950 moves through a minutevalue when the minute value is presented within a stationary selectionwindow 1912 in front of moveable component 1950. Similarly, moveablecomponent 1948 moves through an hour value when the hour value ispresented within stationary selection window 1912 in front of moveablecomponent 1948. Though exemplary interface 1910 is a time picker, timepicker user interface 1910 can be a date picker or alike, e.g., a datepicker that includes movable components for choosing a year, a month,and a date value from a plurality of year, month, and date values,respectively.

FIGS. 19A-19J illustrate moving minute wheel 1950 through a sequence ofminute values and generating tactile outputs in connection with theminute wheel moving through one or more of the sequence of minutevalues. FIGS. 19K-19T illustrate moving both the hour wheel and theminute wheel at the same time and generating respective tactile outputsin connection with the dual movements.

In FIG. 19A, the device detects a scroll input directed to minute wheel1950 that includes downward movement 1902 of contact 1904 at a locationthat corresponds to minute wheel 1950.

In FIG. 19B, in response to detecting the scroll input by contact 1904,the device rotates minute wheel 1950 such that respective markers forminute values passes through stationary selection window 1912. Forexample, in accordance with the downward movement 1902 of contact 1904,minute wheel has moved through value “0” and is moving through value“59” in FIG. 19B. In conjunction with showing minute wheel 1950 movingthrough value “59” (e.g., the currently selected minute value for thetime picker is “59”), the device generates tactile output 1920 (e.g.,MicroTap High (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.9 and a threshold minimuminterval of 0.05 seconds since the last tactile output that wasgenerated by the same tactile output generator or by the device) toindicate that a new minute value has been selected by movement of minutewheel 1950. In addition, the device also generates haptic audio output1921 to accompany tactile output 1920. The haptic audio output 1921 hasa haptic audio output pattern (e.g., frequency, amplitude, duration,and/or timing) that is selected in accordance with the tactile outputpattern (e.g., frequency, amplitude, duration, and/or timing) of tactileoutput 1920.

After detecting movement 1902 of contact 1904, the device detectslift-off of contact 1904 (not shown). As shown in FIGS. 19B-19J, afterthe lift-off the contact 1904, the minute wheel continues to rotate dueto simulated inertia, and the continued movement slows down graduallyuntil the movement of minute wheel 1950 stops. As minute wheel 1950moves through a sequence of minute values, a tactile output and anaccompanying haptic audio output are generated for the selection of eachvalue, except when a threshold amount time (e.g., 0.05 seconds) has notexpired since the time when a tactile output was last generated (e.g.,for the selection of a previous minute value in the time picker). Inother words, when the minute wheel is moving through multiple values ina very short amount of time (e.g., when the wheel is spinning at a fastspeed right after lift-off of contact 1904), the threshold rate forgenerating tactile outputs is reached, and some tactile outputs that aredue to be generated are skipped. In some embodiments, when a particulartactile output is skipped due to the constraint on tactile outputgenerate rate, the device optionally continues to play the haptic audiooutput that was supposed to accompany the skipped tactile output, inorder to provide non-visual feedback to the user in the absence of theparticular tactile output.

As shown in FIGS. 19B-19J, respective tactile outputs (e.g., tactileoutputs 1920, 1922, 1924, 1926, 1928, and 1930) are generated whenminute value “59” (FIG. 19B), minute value “45” (FIG. 19D), minute value“37” (FIG. 19F), minute value “34” (FIG. 19G), minute value “30” (FIG.19I), and minute value “29” (FIG. 19J) each become the currentlyselected minute value in the time picker. As shown in these Figures, theamplitudes of these tactile outputs are gradually decreased (e.g., withgain factors reducing from 0.9 to 0.3) as the speed of minute wheel 1950gradually slows down. In some embodiments, the amplitude is adjustedsmoothly with decreasing speed of the wheel. In some embodiments, theamplitude is adjusted at discrete steps with threshold ranges of speedcorresponding to each discrete amplitude or gain value. The waveformsand frequencies of these tactile outputs are kept constant (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz)). In addition to the tactile outputs (e.g., tactileoutputs 1920, 1922, 1924, 1926, 1928, and 1930) that are generated, thedevice also generate a respective haptic audio output (e.g., hapticaudio outputs 1921, 1923, 1925, 1927, 1929, and 1931, respectively) toaccompany each of the tactile outputs (e.g., each of tactile outputs1920, 1922, 1924, 1926, 1928, and 1930) that are generated. In someembodiments, the frequencies of the haptic audio outputs (e.g., hapticaudio outputs 1921, 1923, 1925, 1927, 1929, and 1931) are graduallydecreased as the speed of minute wheel 1950 gradually slows down. Bydecreasing the frequencies of the haptic audio outputs and keeping thefrequencies of the tactile outputs constant, the functional requirementsplaced on the tactile output generator(s) is reduced, thereby loweringmanufacturing cost of the tactile output generator(s) and the device,without seriously compromising the quality of haptic feedback providedto the user.

In some embodiments, a threshold maximum rate for tactile outputgeneration is imposed on the tactile output generator used to generatetactile outputs in response to detecting the minute wheel passingthrough minute values in the time picker. For example, in someembodiments, a maximum rate of one tactile output per 0.05 seconds isimposed, and if the device or the tactile output generator of the devicehas provided a tactile output, the device or tactile output generator ofthe device will skip a next tactile output if the next tactile output isdue to be generated before the expiration of the threshold time intervalof 0.05 seconds. As shown in FIGS. 19B-19J, the device skipped tactileoutputs when minute value “52” (FIG. 19C) and minute value “40” (FIG.19E) are being passed through in the time picker because the thresholdtime interval has not expired when these tactile outputs were due to begenerated. In some embodiments, haptic audio outputs that accompanythese skipped tactile outputs are also skipped. In some embodiments, thehaptic audio output that is to accompany a particular skipped tactileoutput is still generated even when that particular tactile output isskipped.

In FIG. 19H, no tactile output or haptic audio output is generated whentime wheel 1950 is in between minute values (e.g., no minute value iscurrently selected in the selection window 1912).

In another example, in FIG. 19K, the device detects another scroll inputdirected to minute wheel 1950 that includes a slow movement 1922 ofcontact 1924 on the touch-sensitive surface 112 at a location thatcorresponds to minute wheel 1950 and subsequent lift-off of contact1924. In response to detecting the slow and brief scroll input bycontact 1924, the device rotates minute wheel 1950 through a sequenceminute values (e.g., minute values “29” through “23”, as shown in FIGS.19K-19T). The speed of minute wheel slows down gradually over time.Because the scroll input is slow, tactile outputs are not skipped due tothe threshold rate of tactile output generation. For example, as shownin FIGS. 19L and 19M, two consecutive tactile outputs 1932 and 1934 aregenerated when minute wheel 1950 passes through consecutive minutevalues “28” and “27” over a period of time greater than the thresholdtime interval for generating tactile outputs (e.g., 0.05 seconds). InFIGS. 19L and 19M, since the speed of minute wheel 1950 is low, tactileoutputs 1932 and 1934 have relatively low amplitudes (e.g., with a gainof 0.4). In addition, the device also generates corresponding hapticaudio outputs 1933 and 1935 to accompany tactile outputs 1932 and 1935respectively. In some embodiments, haptic audio output 1935 has a lowerfrequency than haptic audio output 1933, while the amplitudes andfrequencies of tactile outputs 1932 and 1934 are the same (e.g.,MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4).

In some embodiments, a particular tactile output may be skipped orcombined with another tactile output, if the other tactile output (e.g.,a stronger tactile output, or a tactile output with a higher frequency)is also due to be generated at the same time (e.g., the minute and hourwheels may be moving through a respective value at the same time), asillustrated in FIGS. 19M-19T.

In FIGS. 19M-19N, while minute wheel 1950 continues to rotate due tosimulated inertia (e.g., or due to additional scroll inputs), the devicedetects another scroll input directed to hour wheel 1948 that includesmovement 1928 of contact 1926 at a location that corresponds to hourwheel 1948. In response to detecting the scroll input by contact 1926,the device rotates the hour wheel, e.g., in a direction opposite therotation of the minute wheel 1950.

In some embodiments, similar to generating a tactile output inconnection with the minute wheel moving through a minute value, as thehour wheel moves through an hour value, the device also generates atactile output to indicate that a new hour value is selected in the timepicker. In some embodiments, the device also generates a haptic audiooutput to accompany the tactile output.

In some embodiments, the tactile output generator of the device uses twodifferent movable masses to independently generate respective tactileoutputs that correspond to the minute wheel and the hour wheel. In someembodiments, when a single movable mass is used, the device optionallycombines the tactile output patterns for the respective tactile outputsthat are due to be generated for the minute wheel and the hour wheel atthe same time, and generate a tactile output based on the combinedtactile output pattern. In some embodiments, the device skips one of thetwo tactile outputs (e.g., the weaker tactile output (e.g., loweramplitude, lower frequency, or both) that are due to be generated at thesame time). In some embodiments, the device skips one of the tactileoutputs that are due to be generated within the threshold time interval(e.g., 0.05 seconds), e.g., when the minute wheel passes through arespective minute value within the threshold time interval after thetime when the hour wheel passes through respective hour value, thedevice skips the tactile output for the minute wheel.

In FIG. 19N, the device generates tactile output 1936 (e.g., MicroTap(270 Hz) with a gain of 0.4) with haptic audio output 1937, as minutewheel 1950 moves through minute value “26”. No tactile output isgenerated for hour wheel 1948 at this time, as hour wheel 1948 is inbetween hour values “1” and “2”.

In FIG. 19O, when hour wheel 1948 moves through hour value “4” at thesame time as minute wheel 1950 moves through minute value “25”, thedevice generates tactile output 1938 in conjunction with both wheelsmoving through a respective value. In some embodiments, tactile output1938 (MicroTap (270 Hz)) has a stronger amplitude that is selected basedon a combination of the amplitudes for respective tactile outputs thatare due to be generated for each of the two wheels. In some embodiments,tactile output 1938 is the same tactile output that would be generatedfor one of the wheels (e.g., the faster moving wheel of the two wheels,or the heavier wheel of the two) while the other wheel were not moving.In this example, tactile outputs 1938 and 1940 (and accompanying hapticaudio outputs 1939 and 1941) are both generated in accordance withmovement of the hour wheel through a respective hour value (e.g., with again selected in accordance with the speed of hour wheel 1948 in FIGS.19O and 19P). For example, tactile output 1938 has a gain of 0.7, whiletactile output 1940 has a gain of 0.6.

In FIGS. 19Q and 19T, tactile outputs 1942 and 1946 (e.g., MicroTap (270Hz) with a gain of 0.4 and 0.3, respectively) and corresponding hapticaudio outputs 1943 and 1947 are generated in conjunction with minutewheel 1950 moving through minute values “24” and “23” respectively. InFIG. 19S, tactile output 1944 (e.g., MicroTap (270 Hz) with a gain of0.5) and corresponding haptic audio output 1945 are generated inconjunction with hour wheel 1948 moving through hour value “10”.Relative to tactile outputs 1942 and 1946, tactile output 1944 has ahigher amplitude due to the faster speed of hour wheel 1948 than minutewheel 1950.

In FIG. 19R, no tactile output is generated because neither the hourwheel nor the minute wheel is passing through a respective value in thetime picker.

FIGS. 20A-20G are flow diagrams illustrating a method 2000 of providingtactile outputs to reveal a hidden threshold for content management, inaccordance with some embodiments. The method 2000 is performed at anelectronic device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunctiondevice 100, FIG. 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and oneor more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. Insome embodiments, the electronic device includes one or more sensors todetect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In someembodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and thetouch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In someembodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.Some operations in method 2000 are, optionally, combined and/or theorder of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 2000 provides an intuitive way to providehaptic feedback indicating crossing of a threshold for triggering orcanceling an operation associated with a user interface item. In someembodiments, the threshold for triggering or canceling an operation,such as a threshold position or a threshold amount of movement by afocus selector on a user interface, is not visually marked on the userinterface. In such cases, haptic feedback indicating the crossing ofsuch a threshold is particularly helpful to the user when deciding howto proceed with the current input upon receiving such a feedback, e.g.,to decide whether to terminate the current input in order to completethe operation or to reverse the current input to cancel the operation.Haptic feedback is advantageous over conventional visual feedback inthat it is easier to notice and less distracting than conventionalvisual feedback (e.g., animation, visual effects on user interfaceelements, etc.) in many cases. For example, the user is not required tobe fixated on the user interface while providing an input (e.g., a swipegesture) in order to achieve a result outcome. Additionally, tactilefeedback provides valuable information to the user for touch screen userinterfaces where the user's finger is obscuring corresponding visualfeedback. Providing this improved nonvisual feedback enhances theoperability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

The device displays (2002) on display 112, a user interface 5002 thatincludes a first item (e.g., an email item in a listing of emails, anews article item in a listing of news articles, a preview of an emailthat is displayed in response to a deep press input on an email item ina listing of emails, etc.). For example, the user interface 5002includes a list of e-mail summary items (e.g., including e-mail summaryitems 5004, 5006, and 5008), as indicated in FIG. 5A, and the first itemis e-mail summary item 5006.

While displaying the user interface 5002 that includes the first item,the device detects (2004) a first portion of an input by a first contact(e.g., contact 5052 as indicated in FIG. 5Q-5U) on the touch-sensitivesurface 112, wherein the detecting the first portion of the input by thefirst contact includes detecting the first contact at a location on thetouch-sensitive surface 112 that corresponds to the first item, anddetecting a first movement of the first contact (e.g., a movement ofcontact 5052 on e-mail summary item 5006, as indicated by arrows 5054,5062, 5064, and 5066 in FIGS. 5Q-5T) on the touch-sensitive surface 112.

Additional examples of a first contact include, e.g., contact 5022 asindicated in FIGS. 5B-5F, contact 5038 as indicated in FIGS. 5J-5N,contact 5070 as indicated in FIGS. 5X-5AE, contact 5090 as indicated inFIGS. 5AG-5AN, contact 5110 as indicated in FIGS. 5AQ-5AS, contact 5122as indicated in FIGS. 5AZ-5BF, contact 5140 as indicates in FIGS.5BJ-5BO, contact 5150 as indicated in FIGS. 5BS-5BY, contact 5164 asindicated in FIGS. 5CC-5CK, contact 5180 as indicated in FIGS. 5CN-5CW,contact 5202 as indicated in FIGS. 5DA-5DD, and contact 5206 asindicated in FIGS. 5DE-5DG.

For example, detecting the first portion of the input includes detectingtouch-down of the first contact (e.g., contact 5052) on thetouch-sensitive surface 112 while the first item (e.g., e-mail summaryitem 5006) is displayed, as illustrated in FIG. 5Q, followed bydetecting a first movement of the first contact (e.g., a movement one-mail summary item 5006 as illustrated in FIGS. 5Q-5U) in a firstdirection (e.g., leftward). In some embodiments, the first portion ofthe input occurs after a light press input (e.g., as described withregard to FIGS. 5BS-5BU) by the same first contact (e.g., contact 5150)had caused the display of the first item (e.g., a preview of an emailmessage, such as the preview illustrated in preview panel 5128 of FIG.5BU) in the user interface 5002, and detecting the first portion of theinput includes detecting a subsequent movement of the first contact(e.g., as described with regard to FIGS. 5BB-5BY) in a first direction(e.g., leftward) while the first item is displayed.

In response to detecting the first portion of the input that includesthe first movement of the first contact (2006), in accordance with adetermination that the first movement of the first contact meets firstmovement-threshold criteria that are a precondition for performing afirst operation (e.g., movement of contact 5052, as illustrated at5Q-5U, exceeds a threshold movement distance), the device generates(2006-a) a first tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5068 asillustrated in FIG. 5U), wherein the first tactile output indicates thatthe first movement-threshold criteria for the first operation have beenmet. In accordance with a determination that the first movement of thefirst contact does not meet the first movement-threshold criteria forthe first operation, the device forgoes (2006-b) generation of the firsttactile output. For example, the first tactile output serves as an alertto the user that a first operation corresponding to a selectable option(e.g., an archive content option for archiving an e-mail thatcorresponds to e-mail summary item 5006, as illustrated at FIGS. 5Q-5W)will be performed upon liftoff of the contact, provided that nocancelation of the operation (e.g., a cancellation as described withregard to FIGS. 5AG-5AP) takes place before the liftoff of the contact.In some embodiments, the selectable option is last one of multipleselectable options that have been revealed in response to a swipe inputby the first contact that is directed to the first item (e.g., asillustrated in FIG. 5T, the selectable option is an archive contentaffordance 5060 that is the last one of multiple selectable options(menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060). In some embodiments, the first movement-thresholdcriteria require that the first movement of the contact exceeds a firstdistance or location threshold in a first direction. For example, afirst distance is a distance halfway between edges of the display. Forexample, a location threshold is a threshold distance away from an edgeof the display.

In some embodiments, after generating the first tactile output inaccordance with the determination that the first movement of the firstcontact meets the first movement-threshold criteria, the device detects(2008) a second portion of the input by the first contact, wherein thesecond portion of the input includes a second movement of the firstcontact. For example, FIG. 5AJ illustrates a tactile output 5098 thatoccurs in response to the leftward movement by contact 5090 illustratedin FIGS. 5AG-5AJ. After the device generates tactile output 5090, arightward movement by contact 5090 is detected, as illustrated in FIGS.5AK-5AN.

In response to detecting the second portion of the input by the firstcontact, in accordance with a determination that the second movement ofthe first contact meets reversal criteria for cancelling the firstoperation (e.g., movement, such as movement in the opposite direction ofthe first movement, that exceeds a threshold distance and/or that movesto a threshold location for canceling the first operation), the devicegenerates (2010) a second tactile output, wherein the second tactileoutput indicates that the reversal criteria for cancelling the firstoperation have been met; and in accordance with a determination that thesecond movement of the first contact does not meet the reversalcriteria, the device forgoes generation of the second tactile output.For example, after leftward movement of contact 5090, as illustrated byFIGS. 5AG-5AK, rightward movement of contact 5090, as illustrated at5AK-5AN, exceeds a threshold movement distance. In accordance with adetermination that the rightward movement of contact 5090 exceeds thethreshold movement distance, a second tactile output is generated asillustrated at 5106 of Figure AM. The second tactile output (e.g., 5106)serves as an alert to the user that the first operation corresponding toone of the selectable options (e.g., the last selectable option that hasbeen revealed, such as archive content affordance 5060) will no longerbe performed upon liftoff of the contact, provided that the firstmovement-threshold criteria are not met for a second time by furthermovement of the first contact before the liftoff of the first contact.For example, due to the cancellation input illustrated in FIGS. 5AK-5AN(the rightward movement of contact 5090 on e-mail summary item 5008),the e-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5008 is not archivedon liftoff of the contact 5070.

In some embodiments, it is helpful to provide haptic feedback for bothcrossing a threshold for triggering an operation, and for subsequentlycrossing a threshold for canceling the operation, because, without thehaptic feedback for the latter, the user would feel unsure of theoutcome upon termination of the current input. Thus, providing hapticfeedback for the satisfaction of the reversal criteria enhances theoperability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments (2012), the first tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5098, as illustrated in FIG. 5AJ) and the second tactile output(e.g., tactile output 5106, as illustrated in FIG. 5AM) have differenttactile output patterns (e.g., different characteristic values for atleast a first output characteristic). An output characteristic is, e.g.,a characteristic amplitude, frequency, duration, waveform, and/or numberof cycles across a neutral position, etc.). For example, the firsttactile output is a MiniTap (270 Hz), gain: 1.0 (e.g., as illustrated at5098-b), and the second tactile output is a MicroTap (270 Hz), gain:0.55 (e.g., as illustrated at 5106-b). In some embodiments, the tactileoutput pattern includes the characteristics of a given tactile output,such as the amplitude of the output, the shape of a movement waveform inthe output, the duration of the output (e.g., a discrete tap output or acontinuous ongoing output), the characteristics of objects beingsimulated by the output (e.g., the size, material, and/or mass ofsimulated objects, such as a simulated ball rolling on a simulatedsurface), the number of objects being simulated by the output, and/orcharacteristics of the movements of the simulated objects.

In some embodiments, by providing different tactile outputs for thecrossing of the operation-triggering threshold and the crossing of theoperation-cancelation threshold, the device succinctly alerts the userof two very different outcomes in which the user's input would result.Even if the user may have crossed the operation-trigger and theoperation-cancellation thresholds multiple times, the user would stillbe able to tell the outcome of his/her current input. Thus, providingdifferent haptic feedback signals for the crossing of theoperation-triggering threshold and the operation-cancelation thresholdenhances the operability of the device and makes the user-deviceinterface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide properinputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with thedevice) which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments (2014), the first tactile output and the secondtactile output have the same frequencies and different amplitudes (e.g.,the first tactile output 5098 has a frequency of 270 Hz and a gain of1.0, and the second output 5106 has a frequency of 270 Hz and a gain of0.55).

For example, in some embodiments, the haptic feedback for theoperation-cancelation threshold has lower amplitude than the hapticfeedback for the operation-triggering threshold. At a time when a useris already on alert due to the haptic feedback for theoperation-triggering threshold and the current portion of the user'sinput indicates a desire to cancel the operation, it is highly likelythat the user is anticipating some feedback from the device thatconfirms cancelation of the operation; thus, the haptic feedback for thecancelation with a relatively low amplitude will be as effective as ahigh amplitude haptic feedback, but requires less power to generate andadditionally avoids overwhelming or fatiguing the user with tactileoutputs that are too strong.

In some embodiments (2016), the first tactile output and the secondtactile output have the same frequencies and different waveforms (e.g.,the first tactile output is a MiniTap (270 Hz) and the second tactileoutput is a MicroTap (270 Hz)).

In some embodiments, the discrete tactile outputs with different numberof cycles provide distinct sensations in the user's hand, such that theuser can easily tell apart whether the operation-triggering threshold orthe operation-cancelation threshold has been crossed. Thus, providingrespective tactile outputs with different waveforms and substantiallythe same duration for the crossing of the operation-triggering thresholdand the crossing of the operation-cancelation threshold enhances theoperability of the device and makes the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

In some embodiments (2018), the first movement-threshold criteria andthe reversal criteria correspond to different threshold locations on thedisplay.

In some embodiments, the device detects (2020) lift-off of the firstcontact. In response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact: inaccordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteriafor the first operation, wherein the activation criteria include thefirst movement-threshold criteria, performing the first operation; andin accordance with a determination that the input does not meet theactivation criteria for the first operation, forgoing performance of thefirst operation.

For example, an input that meets activation criteria for performing an“archive content” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5Q-5U. On liftoff ofcontact 5052, as illustrated in FIGS. 5U-5W, the “archive content”operation is performed (e.g., an e-mail corresponding to e-mail summaryitem 5006, at which contact 5052 was detected, is archived).

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “mark read” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5B-5F. Onliftoff of contact 5022, the “mark read” operation is performed, asillustrated in FIGS. 5F-5I.

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “mark unread” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5J-5N. Onliftoff of contact 5038, the “mark unread” operation is performed, asillustrated in FIGS. 5N-5P.

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “mark read” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5AZ-5BF. Onliftoff of contact 5122, the “mark read” operation is performed, asillustrated in FIGS. 5BF-5BI.

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “mark read” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5BJ-5B0. Onliftoff of contact 5140, the “mark unread” operation is performed, asillustrated in FIGS. 5B0-5BR.

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “archive content” operation is illustrated in FIGS.5BS-5BY. On liftoff of contact 5150 the “archive” operation isperformed, as illustrated in FIGS. 5BY-5CB.

In another example, an input that meets activation criteria forperforming a “list refresh” operation is illustrated in FIGS. 5DE-5DG.On liftoff of contact 5206, as illustrated in FIGS. 5DG-5DM, the “listrefresh” operation is performed.

Additional examples of a first operation include, e.g., flag e-mail,delete e-display menu, like article, dislike article, save article,share article, bookmark article, mute channel (e.g., a news channel),and/or report article. In some embodiments, the activation of the firstoperation is not reversible, and the first operation is performed assoon as the first movement-threshold criteria are met, or upon lift-offafter the first movement-threshold criteria are met. In someembodiments, the activation of the first operation are reversible, andthe first operation is only performed if cancelation criteria are notmet by additional reverse movement of the first contact after the firstmovement-threshold criteria have been met.

In some embodiments, operation cancellation occurs when the inputincludes a subsequent movement of the first contact (reverse movement)in a direction opposite the movement in the first direction and thesubsequent movement exceeds a threshold distance or location in thereverse direction. For example, operation cancellation does not occurwhen the lift-off of the contact detected after the first movement withno subsequent movement in the reverse direction, or with a subsequentmovement that does not exceed a threshold distance or location in thereverse direction.

Examples of operation cancellation are illustrated with regard to FIGS.5AX-5AF, FIGS. 5AG-5AP, FIGS. 5CC-5CM, and FIGS. 5CN-5CY.

In some embodiments, the activation criteria include (2022), in additionto the first movement-threshold criteria, a requirement that the inputdoes not include a second movement that meets cancelation criteria priorto the lift-off of the first contact.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of theinput by the first contact, the device moves (2024) the first item inaccordance with the first movement of the first contact. For example, asillustrated in FIGS. 5Q-5U, an exemplary first item (e-mail summary item5006) moves in accordance with the movement of an exemplary firstcontact (e.g., contact 5052).

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of theinput by the first contact, the device reveals (2026) one or moreselectable options that each correspond to a respective operationapplicable to the first item (e.g., flag e-mail, archive e-mail, marke-mail read, mark e-mail unread, display menu (with a selectable optionto perform operation), like article, dislike article, save article,share article, bookmark article, mute channel (e.g., a news channel),and/or report article). For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 5Q-5T, anin response to an input by contact 5052, selectable options content menuaffordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060 are revealed. In some embodiments, the one or moreselectable options include a first option (e.g., archive contentaffordance 5060) that corresponds to the first operation. In someembodiments, detecting that the first movement of the contact meets themovement-threshold criteria occurs while the first item is moving inaccordance with the first movement of the first contact. In someembodiments, an animation is displayed when the first movement-thresholdcriteria are met to show the option corresponding to the first operationto expand and cover the other options, or change color if it is the onlyoption that is displayed. For example, in FIG. 5T, selectable optionscontent menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archivecontent affordance 5060 are displayed, and in FIG. 5U, when firstmovement-threshold criteria are met, menu affordance 5056 and flagcontent affordance 5058 are covered by archive content affordance 5060.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the lift-off of the firstcontact (2028), in accordance with a determination that the input doesnot meet the activation criteria for the first operation, and thatmovement of the first contact upon lift-off of the first contact meetssecond movement-threshold criteria that are lower than the firstmovement-threshold criteria (e.g., the second movement-thresholdcriteria require that the net movement of the contact is less than afirst distance or location threshold associated with the firstmovement-threshold criteria and greater than a second distance orlocation threshold that is shorter or closer to a reference location(e.g., the right edge of the display)), the device maintains display ofthe one or more selectable options after detecting lift-off of the firstcontact (e.g., display of a menu of selectable options is maintainedsuch that a selectable option is selectable and/or the menu isdismissible by a subsequent input by another contact).

For example, in FIGS. 5AQ-5AS, an input by contact 5116 reveals contentmenu affordance 5056, flag content affordance 5058, and archive contentaffordance 5060. On liftoff of contact 5116, display is maintained ofselectable options content menu affordance 5056, flag content affordance5058, and archive content affordance 5060, as illustrated in FIGS.5AS-5AT. In FIG. 5AU, an input (e.g., a tap input) by contact 5118 isdetected at a location on touch screen 112 that corresponds to flagcontent affordance 5058. As illustrated at 5AV-5AX, the input by contact5118 selects a flag content option associated with flag contentaffordance 5058 to apply a flag 5120 to an e-mail that corresponds toe-mail summary item 5008.

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the netmovement of the first contact upon lift-off does not meet the secondmovement threshold criteria, the device restores the first item to it isoriginal location and ceases to display the one or more selectableoptions. In some embodiments, no tactile output is provided when thesecond movement-threshold criteria are met by the first contact.

In some embodiments, the first item is a preview of a second item (e.g.,an email message that corresponds to an e-mail summary item) that wasdisplayed in the user interface prior to the display of the first itemin the user interface. For example, the first item is a preview of ane-mail that corresponds to e-mail summary item 5008 (e.g., as shown inpreview panel 5128 of FIG. 5BU) and the second item is e-mail summaryitem 5008 that was displayed in user interface 5002 (e.g., as indicatedin AZ-BA) prior to display of the e-mail preview. Prior to displayingthe user interface that includes the first item, the device (2030):displays the user interface (e.g., user interface 5002 that includes alist of e-mail summary items) that includes the second item (e.g.,e-mail summary item 5008); while displaying the user interface thatincludes the second item, the device detects the first contact (e.g.,contact 5150, as shown in FIG. 5BS) on the touch-sensitive surface 112at a location that corresponds to the second item; while displaying theuser interface that includes the second item, the device detects anincrease in a characteristic intensity of the first contact (e.g., asillustrated by intensity meter 5124 of BS-BU); in response to detectingthe increase in the characteristic intensity of the first contact: inaccordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of thefirst contact meets content-preview criteria, wherein thecontent-preview criteria require that the characteristic intensity ofthe first contact meets a first intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressintensity threshold) in order for the content-preview criteria to be met(e.g., the characteristic intensity of contact 5150 increases abovelight press intensity threshold level IT_(L), as illustrated in FIG.5BU): ceasing to display the user interface that includes the seconditem, wherein the user interface that includes the second item isreplaced by the user interface that includes the first item; and, inaccordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of thefirst contact does not meet the content-preview criteria, the devicemaintains display of the user interface that includes the second item.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the increase in thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact (2032): in accordance witha determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contactmeets the content-preview criteria, generating a third tactile output(e.g., MicroTap (200 Hz), gain: 1.0), wherein the third tactile outputindicates that the content-preview criteria have been met, and inaccordance with a determination that the characteristic intensity of thefirst contact does not meet the content preview criteria, forgoinggenerating the third tactile output. For example, in Figure BU, when thecharacteristic intensity of contact 5150 meets content-preview criteria(e.g., the characteristic intensity of the contact increases aboveIT_(L), as indicated by intensity level meter 5124), the device producestactile output 5152.

In some embodiments (2034), the first tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the first movement-threshold criteria and the thirdtactile output that indicates satisfaction of the content-previewcriteria have different waveforms. For example, in BU-BY the thirdtactile output is tactile output 5152 (e.g., MicroTap (200 Hz), gain:1.0, as illustrated by waveform 5152-b) that occurs when thecharacteristic intensity of contact 5150 increases above IT_(L), asindicated by intensity level meter 5124 of Figure BU, and the firsttactile output is tactile output 5162 (e.g., MiniTap (270 Hz), gain:1.0, as illustrated by waveform 5162-b) occurs in response to movementof contact 5150 along the path indicated by arrows 5154, 5158, 5160until first movement-threshold criteria are satisfied, as indicated inFigure BY.

In some embodiments (2036), the first tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5162, as described with regard to FIG. 5BY) that indicatessatisfaction of the first movement-threshold criteria has a higherfrequency than the third tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5152, asdescribed with regard to FIG. 5BU) that indicates satisfaction of thecontent-preview criteria (e.g., the first tactile output is has afrequency of 270 Hz, and third tactile output has a frequency of 200Hz).

In some embodiments (2038), the first tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5190, as described with regard to Figure CT) that indicatessatisfaction of the first movement-threshold criteria and the thirdtactile output (e.g., tactile output 5182, as described with regard toFIG. 5CP) that indicates satisfaction of the content-preview criteriahave different waveforms (e.g., the first tactile output is MiniTap, andthird tactile output is a MicroTap).

In some embodiments (2040), the second tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5198, as described with regard to Figure CW) that indicatessatisfaction of the reversal criteria has a higher frequency than thethird tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5182, as described withregard to FIG. 5CP) that indicates satisfaction of the content-previewcriteria (e.g., the second tactile output has a frequency of 270 Hz, andthird tactile output has a frequency of 200 Hz).

In some embodiments, while displaying the user interface that includesthe first item, the device detects (2042) a second increase in thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact. For example, after afirst increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 5202 to abovelight press intensity threshold IT_(L), as illustrated in FIGS. 5DA-5DC,the characteristic intensity of contact 5202 continues to increase, asillustrated in FIG. 5DD. In response to detecting the second increase inthe characteristic intensity of the first contact, in accordance with adetermination that the characteristic intensity of the first contactmeets content-display criteria, wherein the content-display criteriarequire that the characteristic intensity of the first contact meets asecond intensity threshold (e.g., a deep press intensity threshold ITSas illustrated by intensity level meter 5124) in order for thecontent-display criteria to be met: replacing the user interface thatincludes the first item (e.g., preview platform 5128, as shown in FIG.5DC) with a user interface that includes content that corresponds to thefirst item on the display (e.g., in the context of the nativeapplication of the content, such as an e-mail displayed in a nativee-mail application) and generating a fourth tactile output (e.g.,tactile output 5205, as indicated in FIG. 5DD), wherein the fourthtactile output indicates that the content-display criteria have beenmet. For example, in accordance with a determination that thecharacteristic intensity of contact 5202 increased above deep pressintensity threshold level ITS, as illustrated in FIG. 5DD, a preview ofe-mail 5201 displayed in preview platform 5128 of FIG. 5DC is replacedwith display of the e-mail 5201 in a native e-mail application 5201 asindicated in FIG. 5DD.

In some embodiments, the fourth tactile output (e.g., tactile output5205, as indicated in FIG. 5DD) has a different tactile output pattern(for at least a first output characteristic) from the first tactileoutput (e.g., tactile output 5190, as indicated in FIG. 5CT), the secondtactile output (e.g., tactile output 5198, as indicated in FIG. 5CW),and/or the third tactile output (e.g., tactile output 5182, as indicatedin FIG. 5CP). For example, the fourth tactile output has a differentwaveform (e.g., a different number of cycles) from the first tactileoutput, the second tactile output, and the third tactile output (e.g.,the fourth tactile output is a FullTap (150 Hz), gain: 1.0. In someembodiments, the fourth tactile output has at least one characteristicvalue that is the same as a characteristic value of the first tactileoutput, the second tactile output, and/or the third tactile output.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second increase in thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact, in accordance with adetermination that the characteristic intensity of the second contactdoes not meet the content-display criteria, the device forgoes replacingthe user interface that includes the first item with the user interfacethat includes content that corresponds to the first item on the display;and forgoes generation of the fourth tactile output.

In some embodiments (2044), the third tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5182, as indicated in FIG. 5CP) that indicates satisfaction ofthe content-preview criteria has a higher frequency than the fourthtactile output (e.g., tactile output 5205, as indicated in FIG. 5DD)that indicates satisfaction of the content-display criteria (e.g., thethird tactile output for content preview has a frequency of 200 Hz, andthe fourth tactile output for content display has a frequency of 150Hz).

In some embodiments (2046), the third tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 5182, as indicated in FIG. 5CP) that indicates satisfaction ofthe content-preview criteria and the fourth tactile output (e.g.,tactile output 5205, as indicated in FIG. 5DD) that indicatessatisfaction of the content-display criteria have different waveforms(e.g., third tactile output for preview is a MicroTap, while the fourthtactile output for content display is a FullTap).

In some embodiments (2048), the first operation modifies a statusassociated with the first item (e.g. the first operation flags ane-mail, archives the e-mail, marks e-mail as read, marks an e-mail asunread, likes an article, dislikes an article, saves an article, sharesan article, bookmarks an article, mute a channel (e.g., a news channel),and/or report an article).

In some embodiments (2050), the first operation is a destructiveoperation (e.g., the first operation deletes the first item).

In some embodiments (2052), the first item is a news item thatrepresents one or more news stories and the first operation is one of:sharing the first item and marking the first item as not a favorite. Insome embodiments, movement of the contact in the first directioncorresponds to a sharing the first item and movement of the contact inthe second direction corresponds marking the news item as not afavorite. In some embodiments, the movement threshold for performing thedelete operation is higher than the movement threshold for performingthe mark as read operation. In some embodiments, the tactile outputs forindicating that movement-threshold criteria have been met and thatreversal criteria have been met are used for both the movement in thefirst direction and the movement in the second direction.

In some embodiments, the first item is an electronic message item (e.g.,e-mail summary item 5004, e-mail summary item 5006, or e-mail summaryitem 5008) that represents one or more electronic messages and the firstoperation is one of: marking the first item as read (e.g., asillustrated in FIGS. 5B-5I or as illustrated in FIGS. 5AZ-5BI) anddeleting the first item (or archiving the first item as illustrated inFIGS. 5Q-5W or as illustrated in FIGS. 5BS-5CB). In some embodiments,movement of the contact in the first direction corresponds to a deleteoperation (or an archive operation) and movement of the contact in thesecond direction corresponds marking the electronic message as read. Insome embodiments, the movement threshold for performing the deleteoperation (or an archive operation) is higher than the movementthreshold for performing the mark as read operation. In someembodiments, the tactile outputs for indicating that movement-thresholdcriteria have been met and that reversal criteria have been met are usedfor both the movement in the first direction and the movement in thesecond direction.

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 20A-20G have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200 and 3400) are also applicablein an analogous manner to method 2000 described above with respect toFIGS. 20A-20G. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interfaceobjects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, and animations describedabove with reference to method 2000 optionally have one or more of thecharacteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects,tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, and animations described hereinwith reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods 2200,2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200 and 3400). For brevity, these details arenot repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 21 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 2100 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 21 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 21, an electronic device 2100 includes a display unit2102 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2104; one or more tactile output generator units 2106 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 2108 coupled to thedisplay unit 2102, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2104, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 2106. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 2110, performing unit 2112,moving unit 2114, revealing unit 2116, and replacing unit 2118.

The processing unit 2108 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 2102), on the display unit 2102, a user interface thatincludes a first item; while displaying the user interface that includesthe first item, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2110) a firstportion of an input by a first contact on the touch-sensitive unit,wherein detecting the first portion of the input by the first contactincludes detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit 2110) the firstcontact at a location on the touch-sensitive unit that corresponds tothe first item, and detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit 2110) afirst movement of the first contact on the touch-sensitive unit; and, inresponse to detecting the first portion of the input that includes thefirst movement of the first contact: in accordance with a determinationthat the first movement of the first contact meets firstmovement-threshold criteria that are a precondition for performing afirst operation, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2106) a first tactile output, wherein the first tactile outputindicates that the first movement-threshold criteria for the firstoperation have been met; and in accordance with a determination that thefirst movement of the first contact does not meet the firstmovement-threshold criteria for the first operation, forgo generation ofthe first tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:after generating the first tactile output in accordance with thedetermination that the first movement of the first contact meets thefirst movement-threshold criteria, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit2110) a second portion of the input by the first contact, wherein thesecond portion of the input includes a second movement of the firstcontact; in response to detecting the second portion of the input by thefirst contact: in accordance with a determination that the secondmovement of the first contact meets reversal criteria for cancelling thefirst operation, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2106) a second tactile output, wherein the second tactile outputindicates that the reversal criteria for cancelling the first operationhave been met; and in accordance with a determination that the secondmovement of the first contact does not meet the reversal criteria, forgogeneration of the second tactile output.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have different tactile output patterns.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same frequencies and different amplitudes.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same frequencies and different waveforms.

In some embodiments, the first movement-threshold criteria and thereversal criteria correspond to different threshold locations on thedisplay unit 2102.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2110) lift-off of the firstcontact; in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact: inaccordance with a determination that the input meets activation criteriafor the first operation, wherein the activation criteria include thefirst movement-threshold criteria, perform (e.g., with the performingunit 2112) the first operation; and in accordance with a determinationthat the input does not meet the activation criteria for the firstoperation, forgo performance of the first operation.

In some embodiments, the activation criteria include, in addition to thefirst movement-threshold criteria, a requirement that the input does notinclude a second movement that meets cancelation criteria prior to thelift-off of the first contact.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:in respect to detecting the first portion of the input by the firstcontact, move (e.g., with the moving unit 2114) the first item inaccordance with the first movement of the first contact.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:in response to detecting the first portion of the input by the firstcontact, reveal (e.g., with the revealing unit 2116) one or moreselectable options that each correspond to a respective operationapplicable to the first item.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:in response to detecting the lift-off of the first contact: inaccordance with a determination that the input does not meet theactivation criteria for the first operation, and that movement of thefirst contact upon lift-off of the first contact meets secondmovement-threshold criteria that are lower than the firstmovement-threshold criteria, maintain display of (e.g., with the displayunit 2102) the one or more selectable options after detecting lift-offof the first contact.

In some embodiments, the first item is a preview of a second item thatwas displayed in the user interface prior to the display of the firstitem in the user interface, and the processing unit 2108 is furtherconfigured to: prior to displaying the user interface that includes thefirst item: enable display of (e.g., with the display unit 2102) theuser interface that includes the second item; while displaying the userinterface that includes the second item, detect (e.g., with thedetecting unit 2110) the first contact on the touch-sensitive unit at alocation that corresponds to the second item; while displaying the userinterface that includes the second item, detect (e.g., with thedetecting unit 2110) an increase in a characteristic intensity of thefirst contact; in response to detecting the increase in thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact: in accordance with adetermination that the characteristic intensity of the first contactmeets content-preview criteria, wherein the content-preview criteriarequire that the characteristic intensity of the first contact meets afirst intensity threshold in order for the content-preview criteria tobe met: cease to display (e.g., with the display unit 2102) the userinterface that includes the second item, wherein the user interface thatincludes the second item is replaced by the user interface that includesthe first item; and in accordance with a determination that thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact does not meet thecontent-preview criteria, maintain display of (e.g., with the displayunit 2102) the user interface that includes the second item.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:in response to detecting the increase in the characteristic intensity ofthe first contact: in accordance with a determination that thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact meets the content-previewcriteria, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s)2106) a third tactile output, wherein the third tactile output indicatesthat the content-preview criteria have been met, and in accordance witha determination that the characteristic intensity of the first contactdoes not meet the content preview criteria, forgo generating the thirdtactile output.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the first movement-threshold criteria and the thirdtactile output that indicates satisfaction of the content-previewcriteria have different waveforms.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the first movement-threshold criteria has a higherfrequency than the third tactile output that indicates satisfaction ofthe content-preview criteria.

In some embodiments, the second tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the reversal criteria and the third tactile output thatindicates satisfaction of the content-preview criteria have differentwaveforms.

In some embodiments, the second tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the reversal criteria has a higher frequency than thethird tactile output that indicates satisfaction of the content-previewcriteria.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2108 is further configured to:while displaying the user interface that includes the first item, detect(e.g., with the detecting unit 2110) a second increase in thecharacteristic intensity of the first contact; in response to detectingthe second increase in the characteristic intensity of the firstcontact: in accordance with a determination that the characteristicintensity of the first contact meets content-display criteria, whereinthe content-display criteria require that the characteristic intensityof the first contact meets a second intensity threshold in order for thecontent-display criteria to be met: replacing (e.g., with the replacingunit 2118) the user interface that includes the first item with a userinterface that includes content that corresponds to the first item onthe display unit 2102; and generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 2106) a fourth tactile output, wherein the fourthtactile output indicates that the content-display criteria have beenmet; and in accordance with a determination that the characteristicintensity of the second contact does not meet the content-displaycriteria: forgo replacing the user interface that includes the firstitem with the user interface that includes content that corresponds tothe first item on the display unit 2102; and forgo generation of thefourth tactile output.

In some embodiments, the third tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the content-preview criteria has a higher frequency thanthe fourth tactile output that indicates satisfaction of thecontent-display criteria.

In some embodiments, the third tactile output that indicatessatisfaction of the content-preview criteria and the fourth tactileoutput that indicates satisfaction of the content-display criteria havedifferent waveforms.

In some embodiments, the first operation modifies a status associatedwith the first item.

In some embodiments, the first operation is a destructive operation.

In some embodiments, the first item is a news item that represents oneor more news stories and the first operation is one of: sharing thefirst item and marking the first item as not a favorite.

In some embodiments, the first item is an electronic message item thatrepresents one or more electronic messages and the first operation isone of: marking the first item as read and deleting the first item.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 20A-20G are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.21. For example, detection operation 2004 and generating operation 2006are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer 180,and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170 detects acontact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174delivers the event information to application 136-1. A respective eventrecognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information torespective event definitions 186, and determines whether a first contactat a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to apredefined event or sub event, such as selection of an object on a userinterface. When a respective predefined event or sub-event is detected,event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with thedetection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionallyutilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update theapplication internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190accesses a respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by theapplication. Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinaryskill in the art how other processes can be implemented based on thecomponents depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 22A-22E are flow diagrams illustrating a method 2200 of providinghaptic feedback that is synchronized with visually switching throughsubsets of items in an item navigation user interface, in accordancewith some embodiments. The method 2200 is performed at an electronicdevice (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100,FIG. 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or moretactile output generators for generating tactile outputs. In someembodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and thetouch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In someembodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.Some operations in method 700 are, optionally, combined and/or the orderof some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 700 provides an intuitive way to providehaptic feedback that is synchronized with visually switching throughsubsets of items in an item navigation user interface (e.g., a contactlist, a photo browser, etc.) in response to user input directed to indexvalues that correspond to the subsets of items in the item navigationuser interface. In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated whena subset of items corresponding to an invoked index value moves to apredetermined position in the item navigation user interface. Thetactile output provides non-visual confirmation to the user that arespective index value corresponding to the subset of items has beeninvoked, while the movement of the subset of items in the itemnavigation user interface are visual changes resulted from theinvocation of the index value. In some embodiments, the haptic feedbackprovided by way of the tactile output(s) is particularly helpful becausethe index values may be densely packed into an index navigation elementwith size restriction, making it difficult to see the exact positions ofthe index value under the user's finger contact. With thesynchronization of the tactile outputs and the visual switching of thesubsets of items in the user interface, the causal link between theinput and the user interface changes is highlighted to the user.Providing this improved nonvisual feedback enhances the operability ofthe device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., byhelping the user to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakeswhen operating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

The device displays (2200) on the display, an item navigation userinterface (e.g., a user interface 6002 that includes name list 6006 asdescribed with regard to FIG. 6A, a photo browsing user interface, or anews browsing interface). The item navigation user interface includes(2202-a) a representation of a first portion of a plurality of items(e.g., names 6008, 6010, 6012, 6014, 6016, 6018, and 6020 in FIG. 6A),wherein the plurality of items are arranged into two or more groups(e.g., an “A” group of names that includes names 6008, 6010, 6012, and6014; “B” group that includes names 6016 and 6018; and a “C” group ofnames that includes name 6020) that are represented by correspondingindex values (e.g., “A” group index 6022, “B” group index 6024, and “C”group index 6026) in a plurality of index values and the first portionof the plurality of items includes a first group of the items thatcorresponds to a first index value in the plurality of index values(e.g., an alphabetical listing of contacts grouped by the first lettersof the contacts' last names, a series of image thumbnails, and/or newsitems arranged on a linear timeline and grouped by days ofcreation/publication). The item navigation user interface also includes(2202-b) an index navigation element (e.g., index scrubber 6004) thatincludes representations of three or more of the plurality of indexvalues (e.g., letters, numbers, dates, date ranges, and/or labels). Forexample, index scrubber 6004 is an index navigation element thatincludes index marker 6028 that represents “A” group index 6022, indexmarker 6030 that represents “B” group index 6024, and index marker 6032that represents “C” group index 6026.

While displaying the item navigation user interface, the device detects(2204) a first drag gesture (e.g., by a first contact 6034) on thetouch-sensitive surface 112 that includes movement from a first locationcorresponding to the representation of the first index value thatrepresents a first group of the items (e.g., index marker 6028 thatrepresents “A” group index 6022) to a second location corresponding to arepresentation of a second index value that represents a second group ofthe items (e.g., index marker 6030 that represents “B” group index6030).

In response to detecting the first drag gesture (2206): the devicegenerates (2206-a) via the one or more tactile output generators, afirst tactile output 6044-a (e.g., a MicroTap (270 Hz), gain: 0.5, asillustrated by waveform 6044-b) that corresponds to the movement to thesecond location corresponding to the second index value; and switches(2206-b) from displaying the representation of the first portion of theplurality of items (e.g., “A” group names 6008, 6010, 6012, and 6014) todisplaying a representation of a second portion of the plurality ofitems, wherein the second portion of the plurality of items include thesecond group of the items (e.g., “B” group names 6016 and 6018).

In some embodiments, switching from displaying the representation of thefirst portion of the plurality of items to displaying the representationof the second portion of the plurality of items includes (2208)replacing display of the representation of the first portion of theplurality of items with display of the representation of the secondportion of the plurality of items without scrolling the items (e.g., thesecond group of the items replaces the first group of the items abruptlyat the top end of the user interface, upon arrival of the contact at thesecond index value that represents the second group of the items).

For example, the switching between subsets of items without scrollingthe items is more congruent with the synchronization with the invocationof the index values which occur at discrete points of time during thedrag input. The synchronization between the user interface changes andthe tactile output generation agrees better with the user's expectationand enhances the operability of the device. As a result, the user-deviceinterface is made more efficient (e.g., by helping the user to provideproper inputs and reducing user mistakes when operating/interacting withthe device), and battery life of the device may be improved by enablingthe user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the representation of the first portion of theplurality of items starts (2210) with an item with a predefinedcharacteristic within the first group of the items (e.g., the “A” groupof names 6008, 6010, 6012, and 6014 starts with “A” group index 6022and/or alphabetically first name 6008); and the representation of thesecond portion of the plurality of items starts with an item with thesame predefined characteristic within the second group of the items(e.g., the “B” group of names 6016 and 6018 starts with “B” group index6024 and/or alphabetically first name 6016). For example, the item isthe alphabetically or chronologically first item in the groups, or thealphabetically or chronologically last item in the groups.

In some embodiments, switching from displaying the representation of thefirst portion of the plurality of items to displaying the representationof the second portion of the plurality of items includes (2212)displaying the representation of the second portion of the plurality ofitems at a predefined location in the item navigation user interface(e.g., the top of the second portion is displayed at the top edge of anitem display region of the item navigation user interface, such as upperedge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 is displayed).

In some embodiments, while displaying the item navigation user interface6002, the device detects (2214) a second drag gesture (e.g., by a secondcontact 6082 distinct from the first contact 6034) on thetouch-sensitive surface that includes movement from a third locationcorresponding to a third group of the items (e.g., group correspondingto the letter “D,” such as a group of names including names 6128, 6130,6132, and 6134) toward a fourth location corresponding to the fourthgroup of the items (e.g., the group of names corresponding to the letter“C,” such as a group of names including names 6020, 6124, and 6126) inthe item navigation user interface (e.g., movement on name list 6006along a path indicated by arrow 6122, as illustrated in FIGS. 6X-6Y). Inresponse to detecting the second drag gesture, the device moves thethird group of the items and the fourth group of the items in accordancewith the second drag gesture (e.g., scrolling name list 6006 upward withan upward swipe gesture, as illustrated in FIGS. 6X-6Y); and whilemoving the third group of the items and the fourth group of the items(and while maintaining the ordered arrangement of the items on the userinterface), the device detects that the fourth group of the items hasmoved across a predetermined position in the user interface (e.g., thetop of the fourth group has reached the top edge in the user interface).For example, the group corresponding to the letter “C” has reached upperedge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 is displayed, asillustrated in FIG. 6Y.

In response to detecting that the fourth group (e.g., the groupcorresponding to the letter “C”) of the items has moved across thepredetermined position (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6Y), the devicegenerates a second tactile output (e.g., tactile output 6136) inconjunction with (e.g., at the time when) the fourth group of the itemsmoves across the predetermined position in the user interface.

The device detects that the third group of the items has moved acrossthe predetermined position (e.g., the top of the third group has reachedthe top edge of the item display region in the user interface) in theuser interface. For example, the group corresponding to the letter “D”has moved along a path indicated by arrow 6138, as shown in FIG. 6Y, andreached upper edge 6040 of the region in which name list 6006 isdisplayed, as illustrated in FIG. 6Z. In response to detecting that thethird group of the items has moved across the predetermined position,the device generates a third tactile output (e.g., tactile output 6140)in conjunction with (e.g., at the time when) the third group of theitems moving across the predetermined position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, while displaying the item navigation user interface(e.g., user interface 6002), the device detects (2216) a second draggesture (e.g., a gesture along a path indicated by arrows 6122 and 6138,as illustrated in FIGS. 6X-6Z) on the touch-sensitive surface thatincludes movement from a third location corresponding to a third groupof the items (e.g., group corresponding to the letter “D”) toward afourth location corresponding to the fourth group of the items (e.g.,the group corresponding to the letter “C”). In response to detecting thesecond drag gesture, the device moves the third group of the items andthe fourth group of the items in accordance with the second drag gesture(e.g., scrolling the contact list upward with an upward swipe gesture)without generating tactile outputs when the third and fourth items moveacross the predetermined position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the first group of items and the second group ofitems are separated by one or more intermediate groups of items thatcorrespond to respective intermediate index values (2218) between thefirst index value and the second index value in the plurality of indexvalues. For example, the first group of items is the “A” group thatincludes names 6008, 6010, 6012, and 6014 (see FIG. 6A); the secondgroup of items is the “D” group that includes names 6128, 6130, 6132,and 6134 (see FIG. 6X); and the one or more intermediate groups of itemsinclude the “B” group that includes names 6016 and 6018 (see FIG. 6A)and the “C” group that includes name 6020, 6124, and 6126 (see FIG. 6X).

In some embodiments, while the first drag gesture is detected, thedevice detects movement of the first drag gesture to a location thatcorresponds to a first intermediate index value in the plurality ofindex values. For example, the first drag gesture is a movement ofcontact 6034 along a path indicated by arrow 6066 from a first locationcorresponding to index marker 6028 that represents index marker 6022that represents the “A” group index to a second location correspondingto index marker 6030 that represents the “B” group index, as illustratedin FIGS. 6I-6J In response to detecting the movement of the first draggesture to the location that corresponds to the first intermediate indexvalue (e.g., “B” group index 6030), the device generates, via the one ormore tactile output generators, a fourth tactile output (e.g., tactileoutput 6068, as indicated in FIG. 6J) that corresponds to the movementto the first intermediate value. The device displays a representation ofa third portion of the plurality of items, wherein the third portion ofthe plurality of items include a first intermediate group of the items(e.g., “B” group items including names 6016 and 6018) that correspondsto the first intermediate value. For example, the device switches fromdisplaying a representation of a respective portion of the plurality ofitems that include a group corresponding to another index value (e.g.,“A” group index 6028) immediately preceding the first intermediate indexvalue.

In some embodiments, while the first drag gesture is detected (2220):the device detects movement of the first drag gesture to a location thatcorresponds to a second intermediate index value in the plurality ofindex values. For example, the drag gesture described with regard toFIGS. 6I-6J continues along a path indicated by arrow 6072 to a locationof index marker 6032 corresponding to the “C” group index, asillustrated in FIG. 6K. In response to detecting the movement of thefirst drag gesture to the location that corresponds to the secondintermediate index value, the device determines a movementcharacteristic of the first drag gesture (e.g., a speed of the movementwhen reaching the second intermediate index value, or a time (e.g., timeinterval t₇) between the movement reaching the second intermediate indexvalues (e.g., index marker 6032 corresponding to the “C” group index)and the movement reaching an earlier index value for which a tactileoutput was generated (index marker 6030 corresponding to the “B” groupindex). In accordance with a determination that the movementcharacteristic of the first drag gesture does not meet haptic-skippingcriteria, the device generates a fifth tactile output to indicate thatthe second intermediate index value has been reached. In accordance witha determination that the movement characteristic of the first draggesture meets the haptic-skipping criteria, the device forgoesgenerating the fifth tactile output (e.g., as illustrated in FIG. 6J) toindicate that the second intermediate index value has been reached. Forexample, in some embodiments, the movement-threshold criteria requirethat the movement characteristic of the first drag gesture (e.g., aspeed of the movement of the contact) exceeds a predetermined thresholdvalue (e.g., a threshold speed) when the movement first drag gesturereaches the second intermediate index value).

In some embodiments, the haptic-skipping criteria require (2222) that aspeed of the movement exceeds a threshold speed when the movement of thefirst drag gesture reaches the second intermediate index value in theuser interface, in order for the haptic-skipping criteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the haptic-skipping criteria require (2224) that atime at which the movement of the first drag gesture reaches the secondintermediate index value (e.g., time T=T₀+t₆+t₇) in the user interfaceis less than a threshold amount of time since a tactile output wasgenerated (e.g., at time T₀+t₆) upon the movement of the first draggesture reaching another index value (e.g., the first intermediate indexvalue, or the index value that correspond to the most recently generatedtactile output) in the plurality of index values, in order for thehaptic-skipping criteria to be met. For example, in FIG. 6J, at a timeT=T₀+t₆, the device generates a tactile output 6068 upon movement of thedrag gesture by contact 6034 reaches the first intermediate index value(e.g., index marker 6030 corresponding to the “B” group index). In FIG.6K, at a time T₀+t₆+t₇, the contact has moved to the second intermediateindex value (e.g., index marker 6032 corresponding to the “C” groupindex), however, the time since tactile output 6068 was generated isless than a threshold amount of time (e.g., a minimum amount of timebetween sequential tactile outputs), so no tactile output is generated.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the movement of the firstdrag gesture to the location corresponding to the second intermediateindex value (e.g., index marker 6032 corresponding to the “C” groupindex, as shown in FIG. 6K), the device switches (2226) from displayingthe representation of the third portion of the items (e.g., the portionof “B” group items including names 6016 and 6018) to displaying arepresentation of a fourth portion of the items (e.g., “C” group itemsincluding names 6020, 6124, and 6126) that corresponds to the secondintermediate index value (e.g., regardless of whether the fifth tactileoutput is generated).

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includes (2228)representations of a plurality of address book items (e.g., a name list6006 that includes names 6008, 6010, 6012, 6014, 6016, 6018, and 6020 inFIG. 6A) arranged into two or more groups (e.g., groups that include an“A” group of names that includes names 6008, 6010, 6012, and 6014; “B”group that includes names 6016 and 6018; and a “C” group of names thatincludes names 6020, 6124, and 6126) that correspond to different indexletters (“A” group index 6022, “B” group index 6024, and “C” group index6026) of a plurality of index letters, and the index navigation element(e.g., index scrubber 6004) includes representations of two or more ofthe plurality of index letters (e.g., index marker 6028 for index “A,”index marker 6030 for index “B,” and index marker 6032 for index “C”).

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includes (2230)representations of a plurality of image items arranged into two or moregroups that correspond to different index date ranges of a plurality ofindex dates, and the index navigation element includes representationsof two or more of the plurality of index date ranges.

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includes (2232)representations of a plurality of news items arranged into two or moregroups that correspond to different index date ranges of a plurality ofindex dates, and the index navigation element includes representationsof two or more of the plurality of index date ranges

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 22A-22E have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2400, 2600, 2800. 3000, 3200, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 2200 described above withrespect to FIGS. 22A-22E. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, focus selectors, and animationsdescribed above with reference to method 2200 optionally have one ormore of the characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interfaceobjects, tactile outputs, focus selectors, and animations describedherein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., methods2000, 2400, 2600, 2800. 3000, 3200, and 3400). For brevity, thesedetails are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 23 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 2300 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 23 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 23, an electronic device 2300 includes a display unit2302 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2304; one or more tactile output generator units 2306 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 2308 coupled to thedisplay unit 2302, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2304, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 2306. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 2310, switching unit 2312,replacing unit 2314, moving unit 2316, and determining unit 2318.

The processing unit 2308 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 2302), on the display unit 2302, an item navigationuser interface that includes: a representation of a first portion of aplurality of items, wherein the plurality of items are arranged into twoor more groups that are represented by corresponding index values in aplurality of index values and the first portion of the plurality ofitems includes a first group of the items that corresponds to a firstindex value in the plurality of index values; an index navigationelement that includes representations of three or more of the pluralityof index values; while displaying the item navigation user interface,detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2310) a first drag gesture on thetouch-sensitive surface unit 2304 that includes movement from a firstlocation corresponding to the representation of the first index valuethat represents a first group of the items to a second locationcorresponding to a representation of a second index value thatrepresents a second group of the items; and in response to detecting thefirst drag gesture: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2306), via the one or more tactile output generator units, afirst tactile output that corresponds to the movement to the secondlocation corresponding to the second index value; and switch from (e.g.,with the switching unit 2312) displaying the representation of the firstportion of the plurality of items to displaying a representation of asecond portion of the plurality of items, wherein the second portion ofthe plurality of items include the second group of the items.

In some embodiments, switching from displaying the representation of thefirst portion of the plurality of items to displaying the representationof the second portion of the plurality of items includes replacing(e.g., with the replacing unit 2314) the display of the representationof the first portion of the plurality of items with the display of therepresentation of the second portion of the plurality of items withoutscrolling the items.

In some embodiments, the representation of the first portion of theplurality of items starts with an item with a predefined characteristicwithin the first group of the items; and the representation of thesecond portion of the plurality of items starts with an item with thesame predefined characteristic within the second group of the items.

In some embodiments, switching from displaying the representation of thefirst portion of the plurality of items to displaying the representationof the second portion of the plurality of items includes displaying(e.g., with the display unit 2302) the representation of the secondportion of the plurality of items at a predefined location in the itemnavigation user interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2308 is further configured to:while displaying the item navigation user interface, detect (e.g., withthe detecting unit 2310) a second drag gesture on the touch-sensitivesurface unit 2304 that includes movement from a third locationcorresponding to a third group of the items toward a fourth locationcorresponding to the fourth group of the items in the item navigationuser interface; and in response to detecting the second drag gesture:move (e.g., with the moving unit 2316) the third group of the items andthe fourth group of the items in accordance with the second draggesture; and while moving the third group of the items and the fourthgroup of the items: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2310) that thefourth group of the items has moved across a predetermined position inthe user interface; in response to detecting that the fourth group ofthe items has moved across the predetermined position, generate (e.g.,with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2306) a second tactile outputin conjunction with the fourth group of the items moving across thepredetermined position in the user interface; detect (e.g., with thedetecting unit 2310) that the third group of the items has moved acrossthe predetermined position in the user interface; and in response todetecting that the third group of the items has moved across thepredetermined position, generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 2306) a third tactile output in conjunction with thethird group of the items moving across the predetermined position in theuser interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2308 is further configured to:while displaying the item navigation user interface, detect (e.g., withthe detecting unit 2310) a second drag gesture on the touch-sensitivesurface unit 2304 that includes movement from a third locationcorresponding to a third group of the items toward a fourth locationcorresponding to the fourth group of the items; and in response todetecting the second drag gesture, move (e.g., with the moving unit2316) the third group of the items and the fourth group of the items inaccordance with the second drag gesture without generating tactileoutputs when the third and fourth items move across the predeterminedposition in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the first group of items and the second group ofitems are separated by one or more intermediate groups of items thatcorrespond to respective intermediate index values between the firstindex value and the second index value in the plurality of index values;and the processing unit 2308 is further configured to: while the draggesture is detected: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2310)movement of the drag gesture to a location that corresponds to a firstintermediate index value in the plurality of index values; and inresponse to detecting the movement of the drag gesture to the locationthat corresponds to the first intermediate index value: generate (e.g.,with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2306), via the one or moretactile output generator units, a fourth tactile output that correspondsto the movement to the first intermediate value; and enable display of(e.g., with the display unit 2302) a representation of a third portionof the plurality of items, wherein the third portion of the plurality ofitems include a first intermediate group of the items that correspondsto the first intermediate value.

In some embodiments, the processing unit is further configured to, whilethe drag gesture is detected: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit2310) movement of the drag gesture to a location that corresponds to asecond intermediate index value in the plurality of index values; and inresponse to detecting the movement of the drag gesture to the locationthat corresponds to the second intermediate index value: determine(e.g., with the determining unit 2318) a movement characteristic of thedrag gesture; in accordance with a determination that the movementcharacteristic of the drag gesture does not meet haptic-skippingcriteria, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s)2306) a fifth tactile output to indicate that the second intermediateindex value has been reached; and in accordance with a determinationthat the movement characteristic of the drag gesture meets thehaptic-skipping criteria, forgo generating the fifth tactile output toindicate that the second intermediate index value has been reached.

In some embodiments, the haptic-skipping criteria require that a speedof the movement exceeds a threshold speed when the movement of the draggesture reaches the second intermediate index value in the userinterface, in order for the haptic-skipping criteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the haptic-skipping criteria require that a time atwhich the movement of the drag gesture reaches the second intermediateindex value in the user interface is less than a threshold amount oftime since a tactile output was generated upon the movement of the draggesture reaching another index value in the plurality of index values,in order for the haptic-skipping criteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2308 is further configured to:in response to detecting the movement of the drag gesture to thelocation corresponding to the second intermediate index value, switchfrom (e.g., with the switching unit 2312) displaying the representationof the third portion of the items to displaying a representation of afourth portion of the items that corresponds to the second intermediateindex value.

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includesrepresentations of a plurality of address book items arranged into twoor more groups that correspond to different index letters of a pluralityof index letters, and the index navigation element includesrepresentations of two or more of the plurality of index letters.

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includesrepresentations of a plurality of image items arranged into two or moregroups that correspond to different index date ranges of a plurality ofindex dates, and the index navigation element includes representationsof two or more of the plurality of index date ranges.

In some embodiments, the item navigation user interface includesrepresentations of a plurality of news items arranged into two or moregroups that correspond to different index date ranges of a plurality ofindex dates, and the index navigation element includes representationsof two or more of the plurality of index date ranges.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 22A-22E are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.23. For example, detection operations 2204 and tactile feedbackoperation 2206 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, eventrecognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and eventdispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 comparesthe event information to respective event definitions 186, anddetermines whether a first contact at a first location on thetouch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event,such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respectivepredefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of theevent or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls dataupdater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internalstate 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respectiveGUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in theart how other processes can be implemented based on the componentsdepicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 24A-24G are flow diagrams illustrating a method 2400 of providinghaptic feedback during variable rate scrubbing in accordance with someembodiments. The method 2400 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100, FIG. 1A) witha display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile outputgenerators for generating tactile outputs, and optionally one or moresensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitivesurface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display andthe touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. Insome embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitivesurface. Some operations in method 2400 are, optionally, combined and/orthe order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 2400 relates to providing haptic feedbackwhen a boundary between zones associated with two different adjustmentrates of an adjustable control is crossed by a focus selector inaccordance with movement of a contact across a touch-sensitive surface.Haptic feedback indicating the crossing of the boundary between suchzones is advantageous over conventional visual feedback without hapticfeedback because it is easier to notice and less distracting than sometypes of visual feedback. Additionally, tactile feedback providesvaluable information to the user for touch screen user interfaces wherethe user's finger is obscuring corresponding visual feedback.Additionally, with haptic feedback, the boundary between adjacent zonesneed not be visually marked in the control user interface, and thechanges in the user interface that correspond to the crossing of theboundary may be made more subtle and less intrusive to avoid visuallycluttering the user interface and/or unnecessarily distracting the userfrom a task at hand. With haptic feedback, the user does not need to beas visually focused on the user interface while providing an input(e.g., a swipe gesture). Providing this improved nonvisual feedbackenhances the operability of the device (e.g., by non-visually alertingthe user that an adjustment rate has changed during an input) and makesthe user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device).

The device displays (2402) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes an adjustable control (e.g., slider control 704with adjustable progress indicator 706, FIG. 7A). In some embodiments,the adjustable control is a progress indicator with a scrubbing thumb oricon. In some embodiments, the adjustable control is an indication ofprogress along a predefine path that is configured to move along thepredefined path in the user interface. In some embodiments, theadjustable control is a position indicator or progress icon that isconfigured to move back and forth along a linear slider control (e.g.,an audio/video scrubber) in accordance with a drag input by a contact.In some embodiments, the adjustable control is a rotatable dial that isconfigured to rotate back and forth around an axis in accordance with adrag input by a contact or a rotation input by two contacts.

The device then detects (2404) a contact (or two concurrent contacts) onthe touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to theadjustable control on the display (e.g., contact 718-a, FIG. 7E), wheremovement of the contact that corresponds to movement away from theadjustable control changes an adjustment rate for adjusting theadjustable control based on movement of the contact (e.g., detectingtouch-down of a contact while a focus selector is located on theprogress indicator, or detecting touch-down of a contact on atouch-screen display at a location that corresponds to the progressindicator).

While continuously detecting (2406) the contact on the touch-sensitivesurface (e.g., the drag input or rotation input is provided by acontinuous contact moving across the touch-sensitive surface, after theprogress indicator has been selected by the focus selector upon initialdetection of the contact), the device detects (2406-a) a first movementof the contact across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a diagonalmovement, or a vertical movement followed by a horizontal movement, or ahorizontal movement followed by a vertical movement, or a series ofzigzag movement that causes both horizontal displacements and verticaldisplacements of the focus selector, a rotational movement that includesboth a radial component away from an axis and a rotational componentaround the axis, etc.). In response (2406-b) to detecting the firstmovement of the contact: in accordance with a determination that thefirst movement of the contact corresponds to more than a first thresholdamount of movement of a focus selector away from the adjustable control(2406-c) (e.g., movement 720-c of contact 718-c, FIG. 7G), where thefirst threshold amount of movement triggers a transition from a firstadjustment rate to a second adjustment rate (e.g., from full-speed tohalf-speed scrubbing rate): the device generates (2406-d) a firsttactile output 726, FIG. 7G (e.g., a MicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max:0.8, Gain min: 0.0), via the one or more tactile output devices, whenthe focus selector has reached the first threshold amount of movement,and adjusts (2406-e) the adjustable control at the second adjustmentrate in accordance with movement of the contact that is detected afterthe focus selector has moved more than the first threshold amount (e.g.,movement 720-d of contact 718-d, FIG. 7H); and in accordance with adetermination that the first movement of the contact corresponds to lessthan the first threshold amount of movement of the focus selector awayfrom the adjustable control (e.g., movement 720-a of contact 718-a, FIG.7E and movement 720-b of contact 718-b, FIG. 7F), the device adjusts(2406-f) the adjustable control at the first adjustment rate inaccordance with movement of the contact without generating the firsttactile output.

In some embodiments, while continuously detecting (2408) the contact onthe touch-sensitive surface, the device detects (2408-a) a secondmovement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., adiagonal movement, or a vertical movement followed by a horizontalmovement, or a horizontal movement followed by a vertical movement, or aseries of zigzag movement that causes both horizontal displacements andvertical displacements of the focus selector, a radial movement followedby a rotational movement, a spiral movement around a center of rotation,etc.). In response (2408-b) to detecting the second movement of thecontact: in accordance with a determination that the second movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than a second threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control (e.g.,movement 720-e of contact 718-e, FIG. 7I) (e.g., the second thresholdamount of movement corresponds to a second threshold distance or asecond threshold position away from the adjustable control in thevertical direction) (2408-c), where the second threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from the second adjustment rate to athird adjustment rate (e.g., from half-speed to quarter-speed scrubbingrate): the device generates (2408-d) a second tactile output 728, FIG.7I (e.g., a MicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8, Gain min: 0.0), viathe one or more tactile output devices, when the focus selector hasreached the second threshold amount of movement, and adjusts (2408-e)the adjustable control at the third adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected after the focus selector hasmoved more than the second threshold amount (e.g., movement 720-f ofcontact 718-f, FIG. 7J); and in accordance with a determination that thesecond movement of the contact corresponds to less than the secondthreshold amount of movement of the focus selector away from theadjustable control (e.g., movement 720-d of contact 718-d, FIG. 7H), thedevice adjusts (2408-f) the adjustable control at the second adjustmentrate in accordance with movement of the contact without generating thesecond tactile output.

In some embodiments, while continuously detecting (2410) the contact onthe touch-sensitive surface: the device detects (2410-a) a thirdmovement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., adiagonal movement, or a vertical movement followed by a horizontalmovement, or a horizontal movement followed by a vertical movement, or aseries of zigzag movement that causes both horizontal displacements andvertical displacements of the focus selector, a radial movement followedby a rotational movement, a spiral movement around a center of rotation,etc.). In response (2410-b) to detecting the third movement of thecontact: in accordance with a determination that the third movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than a third threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control (e.g.,movement 720-g of contact 718-g, FIG. 7K) (e.g., the third thresholdamount of movement corresponds to a third threshold distance or a thirdthreshold position away from the adjustable control in the verticaldirection) (2410-c), where the third threshold amount of movementtriggers a transition from the third adjustment rate to a fourthadjustment rate (e.g., from quarter-speed to fine scrubbing speed): thedevice generates (2410-d) a third tactile output 730, FIG. 7K (e.g., aMicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8, Gain min: 0.0), via the one ormore tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reached thethird threshold amount of movement, and adjusts (2410-e) the adjustablecontrol at the fourth adjustment rate in accordance with movement of thecontact that is detected after the focus selector has moved more thanthe third threshold amount (e.g., movement 720-h of contact 718-h, FIG.7L); and in accordance with a determination that the third movement ofthe contact corresponds to less than the third threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control (e.g.,movement 720-f of contact 718-f, FIG. 7J), the device adjusts (2410-f)the adjustable control at the third adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact without generating the third tactile output.

In some embodiments, while continuously detecting (2412) the contact onthe touch-sensitive surface, the device detects (2412-a) a fourthmovement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., adiagonal movement, or a vertical movement followed by a horizontalmovement, or a horizontal movement followed by a vertical movement, or aseries of zigzag movement that causes both horizontal displacements andvertical displacements of the focus selector, a radial movement followedby a rotational movement, a spiral movement around a center of rotation,etc.). In response (2412-b) to detecting the fourth movement of thecontact: in accordance with a determination that the fourth movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than a fourth threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector toward the adjustable control (e.g.,movement 720-1 of contact 718-1, FIG. 7P) (e.g., the fourth thresholdamount of movement corresponds to a fourth threshold distance or afourth threshold position away from the adjustable control in thevertical direction) (2412-c), where the fourth threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from the second adjustment rate to thefirst adjustment rate (e.g., from half-speed to full-speed): the devicegenerates (2412-d) a fourth tactile output 736, FIG. 7P (e.g., aMicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8, Gain min: 0.0), via the one ormore tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reached thefourth threshold amount of movement, and adjusts (2412-e) the adjustablecontrol at the first adjustment rate in accordance with movement of thecontact that is detected after the focus selector has moved more thanthe fourth threshold amount (e.g., movement 720 of contact 718-m, FIG.7Q); and in accordance with a determination that the fourth movement ofthe contact corresponds to less than the fourth threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector toward the adjustable control, the deviceadjusts (2412-f) the adjustable control at the second adjustment rate inaccordance with movement of the contact without generating the fourthtactile output. In some embodiments, a corresponding tactile output isgenerated when a threshold position between regions corresponding toother adjustment rates is crossed by the contact as well.

In some embodiments, adjusting the adjustable control at a respectiveadjustment rate in accordance with movement of the contact includes(2414) adjusting the adjustable control by an amount (e.g., a linearamount or an angular amount) that is proportional to the movement of thecontact in a respective direction (e.g., movement along the linearprogress bar, or movement in a direction around a rotational axis) witha proportionality constant (e.g., 1, 0.5, 0.25, etc.) that correspondsto the respective adjustment rate (e.g., the full-speed adjustment rate,the half-speed adjustment rate, the quarter-speed adjustment rate,etc.).

In some embodiments, while continuously detecting the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface: in response to detecting the first movement ofthe contact: in accordance with a determination that the first movementof the contact corresponds to more than the first threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control, thedevice switches (2416) from displaying a visual indication of the firstadjustment rate (e.g., the text “full-speed scrubbing,” 722-a in FIG.7F) to displaying a visual indication of the second adjustment rate(e.g., the text “half-speed scrubbing,” 722-b in FIG. 7G); and inaccordance with a determination that the first movement of the contactdoes not correspond to more than the first threshold amount of movementof the focus selector away from the adjustable control, the devicemaintains (2416-b) display of the visual indication of the firstadjustment rate (e.g., the text “full-speed scrubbing”).

In some embodiments, generating the first tactile output (2418), via theone or more tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reachedthe first threshold amount of movement includes determining (2418-a) amovement metric that corresponds to movement of the contact when thefocus selector reaches the first threshold amount of movement (e.g., amovement speed of the contact when the first threshold amount ofmovement is reached, such as the velocity 718 of movement 720-c ofcontact 718-c in FIG. 7G), and generating (2418-b) the first tactileoutput 726 in accordance with a tactile output pattern that is adjustedin accordance with the movement metric (e.g., a faster movement speedcorresponds to a higher gain factor that is applied to the amplitude ofthe tactile output pattern).

In some embodiments, when the first threshold amount of movement isreached, an amplitude of the tactile output pattern is adjusted (2420)in accordance with a movement speed of the focus selector when thethreshold amount of movement is reached. In some embodiments, when thefirst threshold amount of movement is movement in a respective directionrelative to (e.g., perpendicular to) the linear scrubber, the movementspeed is based on the speed of the focus selector in the respectivedirection.

In some embodiments, the adjustable control includes (2422) a movableindicator that is configured to move along a linear path in accordancewith the movement of the focus selector, and movement (2422-a) of thefocus selector (e.g., a contact) in a direction perpendicular to thelinear path is required to move the focus selector from a first regionin the user interface that corresponds to the first adjustment rate to asecond region in the user interface that corresponds to the secondadjustment rate. In some embodiments, the linear control includes alinear slider with a moveable indicator icon/knob (e.g., slider control704 with adjustable progress indicator 706, FIG. 7A). In someembodiments, the linear control includes a media progress indicator thatindicates current playback location of a media file. In someembodiments, the linear control includes a content browsing indicatorthat indicates the location of currently displayed page withinmulti-page content (e.g., an electronic book).

In some embodiments, the adjustable control includes (2424) a rotatableindicator that is configured to rotate around an axis in accordance withthe movement of the focus selector, and movement (2424-a) of the focusselector (e.g., a contact) in a radial direction away from axis isrequired to move the focus selector from a first region in the userinterface that corresponds to the first adjustment rate to a secondregion in the user interface that corresponds to the second adjustmentrate. In some embodiments, the adjustable control includes a rotatabledial with a marker that corresponds to the start position. The dial isrotated by a movement of the focus selector that is around the axis.Movement of the focus selector in the radial direction corresponds tomovement that changes the adjustment rate.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first movement of thecontact, in accordance with a determination that the first movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than the first threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control, wherethe first threshold amount of movement triggers a transition from thefirst adjustment rate to the second adjustment rate, the device adjusts(2426) the control at the first adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected before the focus selector hasmoved more than the first threshold amount (e.g., movement 720-a ofcontact 718-a in FIG. 7E and movement 720-b of contact 718-b in FIG.7F).

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first movement of thecontact: in accordance with a determination that the first movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than a second threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control (2428)(e.g., movement 720-e of contact 718-e in FIG. 7I), where the secondthreshold amount of movement triggers a transition from the secondadjustment rate to a third adjustment rate (e.g., from half-speed toquarter-speed scrubbing rate): the device generates (2428-a) a secondtactile output 728, FIG. 7I (e.g., a MicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max:0.8, Gain min: 0.0), via the one or more tactile output devices, whenthe focus selector has reached the second threshold amount of movement,and (e.g., in addition to or instead of generating the first tactileoutput) adjusts (2428-b) the adjustable control at a third adjustmentrate in accordance with movement of the contact that is detected afterthe focus selector has moved more than the second threshold amount(e.g., movement 720-f of contact 718-f in FIG. 7J. In some embodiments,the adjustable control is adjusted at the first adjustment rate inaccordance with movement of the contact that is detected before thefocus selector has moved more than the first threshold amount. In someembodiments, the adjustable control is adjusted at the second adjustmentrate in accordance with movement of the contact that is detected beforethe focus selector has moved more than the second threshold amount (buthas moved more than the first threshold amount).

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first movement of thecontact: in accordance with a determination that the first movement ofthe contact corresponds to more than a third threshold amount ofmovement of the focus selector away from the adjustable control (2430)(e.g., movement 720-g of contact 718-g in FIG. 7K), where the thirdthreshold amount of movement triggers a transition from a thirdadjustment rate to a fourth adjustment rate (e.g., from quarter-speed toa fine-speed scrubbing rate): the device generates (2430-a) a thirdtactile output 730, FIG. 7K (e.g., a MicroTap medium (150 Hz), Gain max:0.8, Gain min: 0.0), via the one or more tactile output devices, whenthe focus selector has reached the third threshold amount of movement,and (e.g., in addition to or instead of generating the first tactileoutput and/or the second tactile output) adjusts (2430-b) the adjustablecontrol at a fourth adjustment rate in accordance with movement of thecontact that is detected after the focus selector has moved more thanthe third threshold amount (e.g., movement 720-h of contact 718-h inFIG. 7L). In some embodiments, the adjustable control is adjusted at thefirst adjustment rate in accordance with movement of the contact that isdetected before the focus selector has moved more than the firstthreshold amount. In some embodiments, the adjustable control isadjusted at the second adjustment rate in accordance with movement ofthe contact that is detected before the focus selector has moved morethan the second threshold amount (but has moved more than the firstthreshold amount). In some embodiments, the adjustable control isadjusted at the third adjustment rate in accordance with movement of thecontact that is detected before the focus selector has moved more thanthe third threshold amount (but has moved more than the second thresholdamount).

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 24A-24G have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 2400 described above withrespect to FIGS. 24A-24G. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 2400optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2600, 2800, 3000,3200, and 3400). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 25 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 2500 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 25 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 25, an electronic device 2500 includes a display unit2502 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504; one or more tactile output generator units 2506 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 2508 coupled to thedisplay unit 2502, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2504, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 2506. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 2510, adjusting unit 2512,switching unit 2514, determining unit 2516, and maintaining unit 2518.

The processing unit 2508 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 2502) a user interface on the display unit 2502,wherein the user interface includes an adjustable control; detect (e.g.,with the detecting unit 2510) a contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504 at a location that corresponds to the adjustable control onthe display unit 2502, wherein movement of the contact that correspondsto movement away from the adjustable control changes an adjustment ratefor adjusting the adjustable control based on movement of the contact;while continuously detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2510) a first movementof the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 2504; and inresponse to detecting the first movement of the contact: in accordancewith a determination that the first movement of the contact correspondsto more than a first threshold amount of movement of a focus selectoraway from the adjustable control, wherein the first threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from a first adjustment rate to a secondadjustment rate: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2506) a first tactile output, via the one or more tactile outputdevices, when the focus selector has reached the first threshold amountof movement; and adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit 2512) theadjustable control at the second adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected after the focus selector hasmoved more than the first threshold amount; and in accordance with adetermination that the first movement of the contact corresponds to lessthan the first threshold amount of movement of the focus selector awayfrom the adjustable control, adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit 2512)the adjustable control at the first adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact without generating the first tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to:while continuously detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2510) a second movementof the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 2504; and inresponse to detecting the second movement of the contact: in accordancewith a determination that the second movement of the contact correspondsto more than a second threshold amount of movement of the focus selectoraway from the adjustable control, wherein the second threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from the second adjustment rate to athird adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2506) a second tactile output, via the one or more tactileoutput devices, when the focus selector has reached the second thresholdamount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit 2512) theadjustable control at the third adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected after the focus selector hasmoved more than the second threshold amount; and in accordance with adetermination that the second movement of the contact corresponds toless than the second threshold amount of movement of the focus selectoraway from the adjustable control, adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit2512) the adjustable control at the second adjustment rate in accordancewith movement of the contact without generating the second tactileoutput.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to:while continuously detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2510) a third movementof the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 2504; and inresponse to detecting the third movement of the contact: in accordancewith a determination that the third movement of the contact correspondsto more than a third threshold amount of movement of the focus selectoraway from the adjustable control, wherein the third threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from the third adjustment rate to afourth adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 2506) a third tactile output, via the one or moretactile output devices, when the focus selector has reached the thirdthreshold amount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit2512) the adjustable control at the fourth adjustment rate in accordancewith movement of the contact that is detected after the focus selectorhas moved more than the third threshold amount; and in accordance with adetermination that the third movement of the contact corresponds to lessthan the third threshold amount of movement of the focus selector awayfrom the adjustable control, adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit 2512)the adjustable control at the third adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact without generating the third tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to:while continuously detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504: detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2510) a fourth movementof the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 2504; and inresponse to detecting the fourth movement of the contact: in accordancewith a determination that the fourth movement of the contact correspondsto more than a fourth threshold amount of movement of the focus selectortoward the adjustable control, wherein the fourth threshold amount ofmovement triggers a transition from the second adjustment rate to thefirst adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2506) a fourth tactile output, via the one or more tactileoutput devices, when the focus selector has reached the fourth thresholdamount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit 2512) theadjustable control at the first adjustment rate in accordance withmovement of the contact that is detected after the focus selector hasmoved more than the fourth threshold amount; and in accordance with adetermination that the fourth movement of the contact corresponds toless than the fourth threshold amount of movement of the focus selectortoward the adjustable control, adjust (e.g., with the adjusting unit2512) the adjustable control at the second adjustment rate in accordancewith movement of the contact without generating the fourth tactileoutput.

In some embodiments, adjusting the adjustable control at a respectiveadjustment rate in accordance with movement of the contact includesadjusting the adjustable control by an amount that is proportional tothe movement of the contact in a respective direction with aproportionality constant that corresponds to the respective adjustmentrate.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to:while continuously detecting the contact on the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2504: in response to detecting the first movement of the contact:in accordance with a determination that the first movement of thecontact corresponds to more than the first threshold amount of movementof the focus selector away from the adjustable control, switch from(e.g., with the switching unit 2514) displaying a visual indication ofthe first adjustment rate to displaying a visual indication of thesecond adjustment rate; and in accordance with a determination that thefirst movement of the contact does not correspond to more than the firstthreshold amount of movement of the focus selector away from theadjustable control, maintain display of (e.g., with the maintaining unit2518) the visual indication of the first adjustment rate.

In some embodiments, generating the first tactile output, via the one ormore tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reached thefirst threshold amount of movement includes: determining (e.g., with thedetermining unit 2516) a movement metric that corresponds to movement ofthe contact when the focus selector reaches the first threshold amountof movement; and generating (e.g., with the tactile generator unit(s)2506) the first tactile output in accordance with a tactile outputpattern that is adjusted in accordance with the movement metric.

In some embodiments, when the first threshold amount of movement isreached, an amplitude of the tactile output pattern is adjusted inaccordance with a movement speed of the focus selector when thethreshold amount of movement is reached.

In some embodiments, the adjustable control includes a movable indicatorthat is configured to move along a linear path in accordance with themovement of the focus selector, and movement of the focus selector in adirection perpendicular to the linear path is required to move the focusselector from a first region in the user interface that corresponds tothe first adjustment rate to a second region in the user interface thatcorresponds to the second adjustment rate.

In some embodiments, the adjustable control includes a rotatableindicator that is configured to rotate around an axis in accordance withthe movement of the focus selector, and movement of the focus selectorin a radial direction away from axis is required to move the focusselector from a first region in the user interface that corresponds tothe first adjustment rate to a second region in the user interface thatcorresponds to the second adjustment rate.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to,in response to detecting the first movement of the contact, inaccordance with a determination that the first movement of the contactcorresponds to more than the first threshold amount of movement of thefocus selector away from the adjustable control, wherein the firstthreshold amount of movement triggers a transition from the firstadjustment rate to the second adjustment rate, adjust (e.g., with theadjusting unit 2512) the control at the first adjustment rate inaccordance with movement of the contact that is detected before thefocus selector has moved more than the first threshold amount.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to,in response to detecting the first movement of the contact: inaccordance with a determination that the first movement of the contactcorresponds to more than a second threshold amount of movement of thefocus selector away from the adjustable control, wherein the secondthreshold amount of movement triggers a transition from the secondadjustment rate to a third adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with thetactile output generator unit(s) 2506) a second tactile output, via theone or more tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reachedthe second threshold amount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with theadjusting unit 2512) the adjustable control at a third adjustment ratein accordance with movement of the contact that is detected after thefocus selector has moved more than the second threshold amount.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2508 is further configured to,in response to detecting the first movement of the contact: inaccordance with a determination that the first movement of the contactcorresponds to more than a third threshold amount of movement of thefocus selector away from the adjustable control, wherein the thirdthreshold amount of movement triggers a transition from a thirdadjustment rate to a fourth adjustment rate: generate (e.g., with thetactile output generator unit(s) 2506) a third tactile output, via theone or more tactile output devices, when the focus selector has reachedthe third threshold amount of movement; and adjust (e.g., with theadjusting unit 2512) the adjustable control at a fourth adjustment ratein accordance with movement of the contact that is detected after thefocus selector has moved more than the third threshold amount.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 24A-24G are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.25. For example, detection operations 2404 and tactile feedbackoperation 2406 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, eventrecognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and eventdispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 comparesthe event information to respective event definitions 186, anddetermines whether a first contact at a first location on thetouch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event,such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respectivepredefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of theevent or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls dataupdater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internalstate 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respectiveGUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in theart how other processes can be implemented based on the componentsdepicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 26A-26E are flow diagrams illustrating a method 2600 of providingtactile outputs for slider controls in accordance with some embodiments.The method 2600 is performed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300,FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100, FIG. 1A) with a display, atouch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators forgenerating tactile outputs, and optionally one or more sensors to detectintensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. In someembodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and thetouch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In someembodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.Some operations in method 2600 are, optionally, combined and/or theorder of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 2600 relates to providing haptic feedbackin the form of a tactile output when a moveable indicator of a slidercontrol reaches an end of the slider control, where a tactile outputpattern (e.g., including amplitude, frequency, and/or duration) of thetactile output is configured based on a movement speed of the moveableindicator when the moveable indicator reaches the end of the slidercontrol. By adjusting the tactile output pattern of the tactile outputaccording to the movement speed of the moveable indicator, the deviceappears more responsive to the changes in the user's input.Additionally, tactile feedback provides valuable information to the userfor touch screen user interfaces where the user's finger is obscuringcorresponding visual feedback. This more responsive feedback mechanismhelps to guide the user to provide proper inputs and reduce usermistakes when operating/interacting with the device, thereby enhancingthe operability of the device and making the user-device interface moreefficient. In addition, by reducing user mistakes and helping the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently, the improved hapticfeedback also reduces power usage and improves battery life of thedevice.

The device displays (2602) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a slider control that represents a continuousrange of values between a first value and a second value (e.g., a rangeof values that correspond to a continuous range of numerical values, acontinuous or discrete sequence of positions, or a listing of valuescorresponding to different states or selectable options), the slidercontrol includes a first end that corresponds to the first value and asecond end that corresponds to the second value. For example, in alinear slider control (e.g., a brightness slider control 812, FIG. 8A),the two ends of the slider control are located at different locationsand correspond to two boundary values (e.g., maximum value 818 andminimum value 816, FIG. 8A) of the range of values; in a circular slidercontrol, the two ends of the slider control are located at the samelocation and correspond to two boundary values of the range of values(e.g., hour values around a clock face, e.g., circular slider 902 withoverlapping ends at 0 and 12 hour mark as shown in FIG. 9A). The slidercontrol further includes a movable indicator that is configured to movealong the slider control between the first end and the second end of theslider control, to indicate a current value selected from the continuousrange of values represented by the slider control (e.g., movableindicator 814, FIG. 8A). In some embodiments, the moveable indicatorrepresents a continuous range of values that is a subset of valuesrepresented by the slider control (e.g., moveable indicator 906 in FIG.9A). In some embodiments, the slider control (e.g., image slider 1003)includes a sequence of slots for thumbnail representations in a photoselector, and the moveable indicator (e.g., image representations 1006)is a sequence of thumbnail representations that slide along the sequenceof slots, e.g., as shown in FIG. 10A.

The device detects (2604) a contact on the touch-sensitive surface at alocation that corresponds to the moveable indicator of the slidercontrol (e.g., contact 824, FIG. 8F; contact 830, FIG. 8J; or contact836, FIG. 8L). The device then detects (2406) movement of the contact onthe touch-sensitive surface. In response (2606-a) to detecting themovement of the contact, the device moves (2606-b) the moveableindicator along the slider control in accordance with the movement ofthe contact, and generates (2606-c) a first tactile output upon themoveable indicator reaching the first end of the slider control, whereina tactile output pattern of the first tactile output (e.g., acharacteristic value for a first output characteristic (e.g., amplitude,frequency, duration, waveform, number of oscillations across a neutralposition, etc.) of the tactile output) is configured based on a movementspeed of the movable indicator when the moveable indicator reaches thefirst end of the slider control (e.g., a higher speed of the moveableindicator corresponds to a higher amplitude of the tactile outputpattern, or a higher frequency of the tactile output pattern).

In some embodiments, the movable indicator spans a plurality of valuesin the range of values, the plurality of values include a beginningvalue represented by a first end of the moveable indicator and an endingvalue represented by a second end of the moveable indicator; and movingthe moveable indicator includes moving at least one of the first end andthe second end of the moveable indicator (2608).

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator includessimultaneously changing (2610) the beginning value and the ending valuewhile maintaining a current size of the moveable indicator. In someembodiments, the device, in response (2610-a) to detecting the movementof the contact: generates (2610-b) one or more tactile outputs thatcorrespond to movement of the first end of the moveable indicator overone or more predefined values (e.g., values indicated by markings) inthe slider control, and generates (2610-c) one or more tactile outputsthat correspond to movement of the second end of the moveable indicatorover the one or more predefined values (e.g., values indicated bymarkings) in the slider control.

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that the firstend of the movable indicator and the second end of the moveableindicator have each reached a respective one of the one or morepredefined values at the same time, the device forgoes (2612) generatinga respective tactile output that corresponds to one of the first and thesecond ends reaching the respective ones of the one or more predefinedvalues, while generating a respective tactile output that corresponds toone of the first and the second ends reaching the respective ones of theone or more predefined values.

In some embodiments, the one or more predefined values include (2614)one or more major values (e.g., hour marks) and one or more minor values(e.g., minute marks), and forgoing generating the respective tactileoutput (2614-a) that corresponds to one of the first and the second endsreaching the respective ones of the one or more predefined valuesincludes forgoing (2614-b) generating a respective tactile output thatcorresponds to one of the first and the second ends reaching a minorvalue of the one or more predefined values (e.g., while generating arespective tactile output that corresponds to one of the first and thesecond ends reaching a major value of the one or more predefinedvalues). This is illustrated in FIGS. 9C, 9E, 9M, 9S, 9T, 9U, where whenboth ends of the moveable indicator 906 moves past a tick mark on theclock face, only one tactile output is generated, and the other tactileoutput is not generated.

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator includes moving(2616) the first end of the moveable indicator, without moving thesecond end of the moveable indicator, and the device, in response(2616-a) to detecting the movement of the contact, generates (2616-b)one or more tactile outputs that correspond to movement of the first endof the moveable indicator over one or more predefined values (e.g.,values indicated by markings) in the slider control (e.g., generatingthe tactile outputs for movements of the first end without generatingtactile outputs corresponding to the second end because the second endis not moving). This is illustrated in FIGS. 9F-9J, for example.

In some embodiments, in response (2618) to detecting the movement of thecontact, the device generates (2618-a) one or more tactile outputs thatcorrespond to movement of the moveable indicator over one or morepredefined values (e.g., values indicated by markings) in the slidercontrol (e.g., the timing of the tactile outputs are synchronized withthe timing of when the predefined values are passed by the moveableindicator). In some embodiments, when the movable indicator continues tomove after lift-off of the contact due to inertia, the speed of themovable indicator gradually decreases and the time between adjacenttactile outputs increases, as the moveable indicator continues to passadditional evenly spaced tick marks on the user interface. This isillustrated in FIGS. 9S-9U, for example.

In some embodiments, the one or more predefined values include (2620)one or more major values (e.g., hour marks) and one or more minor values(e.g., minute marks), and generating one or more tactile outputs thatcorrespond to movement of the moveable indicator over the one or morepredefined values in the slider control includes (2620-a): generating(2620-b) respective tactile outputs that correspond to movement of themoveable indicators over the one or more major values with a firsttactile output pattern and generating (2620-c) respective tactileoutputs that correspond to movement of the moveable indicators over theone or more minor values with a second tactile output pattern, where thesecond tactile output pattern has a smaller amplitude and/or a shorterduration than the first tactile output pattern. This is illustrated inFIGS. 9C and 9E, for example, tactile output 916 that corresponds to anend passing a minor tick mark has a smaller amplitude than tactileoutput 918 that corresponds to an end passing a major tick mark.

In some embodiments, in response (2622) to detecting the movement of thecontact, in accordance with a determination that the moveable indicatorhas reached the second end of the slider control (e.g., a minimum valueor origin point of the slider control) in accordance with the movementof the contact (2622-a): in accordance with a determination that amovement speed of the moveable indicator at a time when the moveableindicator reaches the second end of the adjustable control meets a firstspeed threshold, the device generates (2622-b) a second tactile outputto indicate that the moveable indicator has reached the second end ofthe adjustable control; and in accordance with a determination that themovement speed of the moveable indicator at the time when the moveableindicator reaches the second end of the adjustable control does not meetthe first speed threshold (e.g., the movement speed of the moveableindicator is too slow), the device forgoes (2622-c) generation of thesecond tactile output.

For example, for the slider control 814 in FIGS. 8A-8E, the deviceforgoes generation of a tactile output when the user drags the moveableindicator of the slider control to the minimum end with a slow speed.Such embodiments take into account the deliberateness of the user'sinput and respond in a way that respects the user's desire to not bedisturbed by an unnecessary tactile output. This more responsivefeedback mechanism helps to guide the user to provide proper inputs andreduce user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device, therebyenhancing the operability of the device and making the user-deviceinterface more efficient.

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator along the slidercontrol in accordance with the movement of the contact includes (2624):moving (2624-a) the moveable indicator along the slider control, whilecontinuing to detect the contact on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g.,as shown in FIG. 8F) and continuing to move (2624-b) the moveableindicator along the slider control after lift-off of the contact isdetected (e.g., continuing to move the moveable indicator with graduallydecreasing speed after lift-off of the contact is detected, until thespeed reaches zero and/or until the moveable indicator reaches the endof the slider control, as shown in FIG. 8G-8H). In some embodiments, themoveable indicator bounces back and forth one or more times withdecreasing amplitude after reaching the end of the slider control.

In some embodiments, the moveable indicator has an adjustable size, anda tactile output pattern of the first tactile output is configured inaccordance with a current size of the moveable indicator (2626). E.g., alarger moveable indicator (e.g., a longer duration of the sleep timer)causes a stronger tactile output when moved pass tick marks on a clockface or flung against an end of a slider control. For example, in FIGS.9A-9F, moveable indicator 906 has a larger size as compared to moveableindicator 906 shown in in FIGS. 9K-9Q, and a stronger tactile output isgenerated for the larger moveable indicator 906 (e.g., tactile output918 in FIG. 9E is stronger than tactile output 931 in FIG. 9M; andtactile output 916 in FIG. 9C is stronger than tactile output 930 inFIG. 9L).

In some embodiments, the first tactile output is a discrete tactileoutput (2628); e.g., a tactile output with no more than two cycles ofoscillation about a neutral position, such as a FullTap, a MiniTap, or aMicroTap.

In some embodiments, in accordance with a determination that themoveable indicator has reached a respective predefined value in thecontinuous range of values (2630): in accordance with a determinationthat a threshold amount of time (e.g., 0.05 s) has expired sincegeneration of a last tactile output (e.g., the tactile output rate limitis not reached), the device generates (2630-a) a respective tactileoutput to indicate that the moveable indicator has reached therespective defined value; and in accordance with a determination thatthe threshold amount of time has not expired since generation of thelast tactile output (e.g., the tactile output rate limit is reached),the device forgoes (2630-b) generation of the respective tactile outputto indicate that the moveable indicator has reached the respectivedefined value.

In some embodiments, discrete tactile outputs of short durations (e.g.,a few milliseconds to tens of milliseconds) are used to indicate thatvalues of significance (e.g., values at tick marks) on the slidercontrol have been crossed by the moveable indicator. This is helpfulwhen the movement of the moveable indicator is relatively slow. However,when the moveable indicator moves past many such values in a shortamount of time, the benefit of providing a tactile output for each suchvalue of significance diminishes. Therefore, it is advantageous to skipsome tactile outputs if they would come too close to a previously playedtactile output (e.g., less than 50 milliseconds). This restriction onthe rate of tactile output generation helps to conserve power and avoidunnecessary distraction to the user. Additionally, the burden on thetactile output generators may also be lessened by the restriction on therate of the tactile output generation, which may lead to a reduction ofthe device's manufacturing and maintenance cost and extend the device'susable lifespan.

In some embodiments, the slider control is an image picker (2632) forselecting a representative image from a plurality of images (e.g., aseries of images taken in a burst mode of a digital camera, asillustrated in FIGS. 10A-10I), the moveable indicator includes (2632-a)representations of the plurality of images, the slider control includes(2632-b) an indicator located in between the first end and the secondend of the slider control (e.g., the positions of the first end and thesecond end of the slider control are determined based on the number ofimages in the plurality of images and may be located outside of theviewable region of the display, e.g., the length of the slider controlis roughly two times of the length needed to accommodate all of theimages) and the device generates (2632-c) a second tactile output upon arespective image of the plurality of images reaching the indicator. Insome embodiments, the respective image is an image that is a proposedselection from a burst of images. In some embodiments, there aremultiple images that are marked as proposed selections from a burst ofimages.

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 26A-26E have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2800, 3000, 3200, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 2600 described above withrespect to FIGS. 26A-26E. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 2600optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2800, 3000,3200, and 3400). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 27 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 2700 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 27 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 27, an electronic device 2700 includes a display unit2702 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2704; one or more tactile output generator units 2706 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 2708 coupled to thedisplay unit 2702, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2704, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 2706. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 2710, moving unit 2712, andchanging unit 2714.

The processing unit 2708 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 2702) a user interface on the display unit 2702,wherein: the user interface includes a slider control that represents acontinuous range of values between a first value and a second value, theslider control includes a first end that corresponds to the first valueand a second end that corresponds to the second value, the slidercontrol further includes a movable indicator that is configured to move(e.g., with the moving unit 2712) along the slider control between thefirst end and the second end of the slider control, to indicate acurrent value selected from the continuous range of values representedby the slider control; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2710) acontact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 2704 at a location thatcorresponds to the moveable indicator of the slider control; detect(e.g., with the detecting unit 2710) movement of the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface unit 2704; and in response to detecting themovement of the contact, move (e.g., with the moving unit 2712) themoveable indicator along the slider control in accordance with themovement of the contact; and generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 2706) a first tactile output upon the moveableindicator reaching the first end of the slider control in accordancewith the movement of the contact, wherein a tactile output pattern ofthe first tactile output is configured based on a movement speed of themovable indicator when the moveable indicator reaches the first end ofthe slider control.

In some embodiments, the movable indicator spans a plurality of valuesin the range of values, the plurality of values include a beginningvalue represented by a first end of the moveable indicator and an endingvalue represented by a second end of the moveable indicator; and move(e.g., with the moving unit 2712) the moveable indicator includes moving(e.g., with the moving unit 2712) at least one of the first end and thesecond end of the moveable indicator.

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator includessimultaneously changing (e.g., with the changing unit 2714) thebeginning value and the ending value while maintaining a current size ofthe moveable indicator; and the processing unit is further configuredto, in response to detecting the movement of the contact: generate(e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2706) one or moretactile outputs that correspond to movement of the first end of themoveable indicator over one or more predefined values in the slidercontrol; and generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s)2706) one or more tactile outputs that correspond to movement of thesecond end of the moveable indicator over the one or more predefinedvalues in the slider control.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2708 is further configured to:in accordance with a determination that the first end of the movableindicator and the second end of the moveable indicator have each reacheda respective one of the one or more predefined values at the same time:forgo generating a respective tactile output that corresponds to one ofthe first and the second ends reaching the respective ones of the one ormore predefined values, while generating a respective tactile outputthat corresponds to one of the first and the second ends reaching therespective ones of the one or more predefined values.

In some embodiments, the one or more predefined values include one ormore major values and one or more minor values, and forgoing generatingthe respective tactile output that corresponds to one of the first andthe second ends reaching the respective ones of the one or morepredefined values includes: forgoing generating a respective tactileoutput that corresponds to one of the first and the second ends reachinga minor value of the one or more predefined values.

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator includes moving(e.g., with the moving unit 2712) the first end of the moveableindicator, without moving the second end of the moveable indicator; andthe processing unit is further configured to, in response to detectingthe movement of the contact: generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 2706) one or more tactile outputs that correspond tomovement of the first end of the moveable indicator over one or morepredefined values in the slider control.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2708 is further configured to:in response to detecting the movement of the contact: generate (e.g.,with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2706) one or more tactileoutputs that correspond to movement of the moveable indicator over oneor more predefined values in the slider control.

In some embodiments, the one or more predefined values include one ormore major values and one or more minor values, and generating one ormore tactile outputs that correspond to movement of the moveableindicator over the one or more predefined values in the slider controlincludes: generating respective tactile outputs that correspond tomovement of the moveable indicators over the one or more major valueswith a first tactile output pattern; and generating respective tactileoutputs that correspond to movement of the moveable indicators over theone or more minor values with a second tactile output pattern, whereinthe second tactile output pattern has a smaller amplitude and/or ashorter duration than the first tactile output pattern.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2708 is further configured to:in response to detecting the movement of the contact, in accordance witha determination that the moveable indicator has reached the second endof the slider control in accordance with the movement of the contact: inaccordance with a determination that a movement speed of the moveableindicator at a time when the moveable indicator reaches the second endof the adjustable control meets a first speed threshold, generate (e.g.,with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2706) a second tactile outputto indicate that the moveable indicator has reached the second end ofthe adjustable control; and in accordance with a determination that themovement speed of the moveable indicator at the time when the moveableindicator reaches the second end of the adjustable control does not meetthe first speed threshold, forgo generation of the second tactileoutput.

In some embodiments, moving the moveable indicator along the slidercontrol in accordance with the movement of the contact includes: moving(e.g., with the moving unit 2712) the moveable indicator along theslider control, while continuing to detect (e.g., with the detectingunit 2710) the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 2704; andcontinuing to move (e.g., with the moving unit 2712) the moveableindicator along the slider control after lift-off of the contact isdetected.

In some embodiments, the moveable indicator has an adjustable size, andwherein a tactile output pattern of the first tactile output isconfigured in accordance with a current size of the moveable indicator.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output is a discrete tactileoutput.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2708 is further configured to:in accordance with a determination that the moveable indicator hasreached a respective predefined value in the continuous range of values:in accordance with a determination that a threshold amount of time hasexpired since generation of a last tactile output, generate (e.g., withthe tactile output generator unit(s) 2706) a respective tactile outputto indicate that the moveable indicator has reached the respectivedefined value; and in accordance with a determination that the thresholdamount of time has not expired since generation of the last tactileoutput, forgo generation of the respective tactile output to indicatethat the moveable indicator has reached the respective defined value.

In some embodiments, the slider control is an image picker for selectinga representative image from a plurality of images; the moveableindicator includes representations of the plurality of images; theslider control includes an indicator located in between the first endand the second end of the slider control and the processing unit 2708 isfurther configured to: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2706) a second tactile output upon a respective image of theplurality of images reaching the indicator.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 26A-26E are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.27. For example, detection operations 2604 and tactile feedbackoperation 2606 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, eventrecognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and eventdispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 comparesthe event information to respective event definitions 186, anddetermines whether a first contact at a first location on thetouch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event,such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respectivepredefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of theevent or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls dataupdater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internalstate 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respectiveGUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in theart how other processes can be implemented based on the componentsdepicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 28A-28E are flow diagrams illustrating a method 2800 of providingtactile outputs with visual rubber band effects in accordance with someembodiments. The method 2800 is performed at an electronic device (e.g.,device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100, FIG. 1A) witha display, a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile outputgenerators for generating tactile outputs, and optionally one or moresensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitivesurface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display andthe touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. Insome embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitivesurface. Some operations in method 2800 are, optionally, combined and/orthe order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 2800 relates to providing haptic feedbackto indicate to the user that, after an outer edge of a user interfaceelement has crossed a threshold position during resizing or movement ofthe user interface object, a rubber band visual effect will be applied.For example, in some embodiments, the rubber band effect causes theouter edge of the user interface element to move back to the thresholdposition after the termination of the resizing or drag input or afterthe user interface element has come to a stop at the end of its movementdue to inertia. The device provides a tactile output upon crossing ofthe threshold position and/or upon termination of the input. In eithercase, the tactile output comes immediately before the visual rubber bandeffect becomes noticeable to the user. The timing of the tactile outputgeneration reinforces the visual feedback to the user regarding theinitiation of the rubber band effect, and primes the user regarding thesubsequent changes that occur in the user interface. Haptic feedback iseasy to notice and less distracting than some types of visual feedback.The user does not need to be as visually focused on the user interfacewhile providing an input (e.g., a swipe gesture or a pinch gesture) inorder to know what will happen next in the user interface. Additionally,tactile feedback provides valuable information to the user for touchscreen user interfaces where the user's finger is obscuringcorresponding visual feedback. Providing this improved nonvisualfeedback enhances the operability of the device and makes theuser-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping the user toprovide proper inputs, avoid user confusion, and reducing user mistakesdue to such confusion when operating/interacting with the device).

The device displays (2802) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a first user interface element (e.g., the firstuser interface element is a list of items 1111 (FIG. 11A), or a userinterface object such as an image 1212 (FIG. 12A)). The device thendetects (2804) a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surfacethat corresponds to the first user interface element (e.g., contact1116, FIG. 11B; contact 1126, FIG. 11H; contact 1222, FIG. 12B; contact1238, FIG. 12G; contact 1244, FIG. 12K; contact 1302, FIG. 13B; orcontact 1314, FIG. 13I). The device then detects (2806) an input by thecontact (e.g., a drag input by the contact (e.g., FIGS. 11B-11E, FIGS.11H-11J, or FIGS. 12G-12H), a pinch gesture by two contacts movingtoward each other (e.g., FIGS. 12B-12D or FIGS. 13I-13J), or a depinchgesture by two contacts moving away from each other (e.g., FIGS. 12K-12Nor FIGS. 13B-13D)), including detecting a movement of the contact acrossthe touch-sensitive surface.

In response to detecting the input by the contact, the device changes(2808) a position of an outer edge of the user interface elementrelative to a first threshold position in the user interface (e.g., thefirst threshold position may be located on the edge of the userinterface, or a position outside of the currently displayed portion ofthe user interface, or a position within the currently displayed portionof the user interface) in accordance with the movement of the contact onthe touch-sensitive surface.

The device then detects (2810) that the change in the position of theouter edge of the user interface element relative to the first thresholdposition in the user interface has caused the outer edge of the userinterface element to move across the first threshold position in theuser interface. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11B-11E, a drag inputscrolls a list 1111 until the end of the list appears in the userinterface, and the drag input continues to move the list such that theend of the list is dragged past the first threshold position 1114 in theuser interface (e.g., a position within the currently displayed portionof the user interface). For example, as shown in FIGS. 12B-12D, a pinchinput shrinks an image until the edge of the image passes a thresholdposition in the user interface that corresponds to a first minimum size.For example, as shown in FIGS. 12K-12N a depinch input expands an imageuntil the edge of the image moves past a threshold position outside thecurrently displayed portion of the user interface that corresponds to afirst maximum size (e.g., the outer edge of the object may cross thefirst threshold position before the termination of the contact (e.g.,dragged by the contact), or after the termination of the input (e.g.,through movement due to simulated inertia)).

After detecting (2812) that the outer edge of the user interface elementhas moved across the first threshold position in the user interface(e.g., the object has moved pass the first edge position by a thresholdamount or reached a second threshold position in the plane of the userinterface; the image has shrunken beyond first minimum size to a secondminimum size smaller than the first minimum size; or the image hasexpanded beyond the first maximum size to a second maximum size largerthan the first maximum size (e.g., only part of the image may be visiblein the user interface when the image has expanded beyond the firstmaximum size)), the device generates (2812-a) a tactile output (e.g., toindicate that the current position of the user interface element is anunstable position, and that the user interface element will be returnedto a previous stable position, such as returning the outer edge of theuser interface element to the first threshold position) and moves(2812-b) the position of the outer edge of the user interface element tothe first threshold position (e.g., after termination of the input,and/or after the simulated inertial movement of the user interfaceelement has come to a stop), as shown in FIGS. 11C-11G, 11J-11L,12B-12F, 12H-12J, 12L-120, 13E-13H, and 13J-13L.

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element (e.g., an item list, or a content region, or an image,etc.) relative to the first threshold position in the user interface(e.g., boundary of a user interface window or display region thatcontains the user interface element) includes scrolling (2814) the userinterface element in a first direction relative to the first thresholdposition in the user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 11B-11E).

In some embodiments, in response (2816) to detecting the input by thecontact, the device scrolls (2816-a) the user interface element suchthat the outer edge of the user interface element moves across the firstthreshold position (e.g., a position within the currently displayedportion of the user interface) in the user interface and displays(2816-b) a first region (e.g., region 1122 in FIG. 11E) that extendsfrom the outer edge of the user interface element in a second directionopposite the first direction after the outer edge of user interfaceelement is moved past the first threshold position (e.g., in accordancewith the movement of the contact, and, optionally, in accordance withsimulated inertial movement of the user interface element after lift-offof the contact).

In some embodiments, moving (2818) the position of the outer edge of theuser interface element to the first threshold position includesscrolling (2818-a) the user interface element in the second directionuntil the outer edge of the user interface returns to the firstthreshold position and ceasing (2818-b) to display the first region thatextends from the outer edge of the user interface element (e.g., asshown in FIGS. 11E-11G).

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element (e.g., a content region, or an image, etc.) relativeto the first threshold position in the user interface (e.g., boundary ofa user interface window or display region that contains the userinterface element) includes expanding (2820) the user interface elementin the user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 12K-12N).

In some embodiments, in response (2822) to detecting the input by thecontact, the device expands (2822-a) the user interface element untilreaching a first maximum size of the user interface element, where theouter edge of the user interface element moves beyond a displayedportion of the user interface, and the first threshold position isdetermined based on the first maximum size (e.g., the first maximum sizeis a stable maximum size of the user interface element) and is locatedoutside of the viewable region of the user interface, and furtherexpands (2822-b) the user interface element beyond the first maximumsize (e.g., in accordance with the movement of the contact, and,optionally, in accordance with simulated inertial movement of the userinterface element after lift-off of the contact), e.g., as shown inFIGS. 12K-12N and 13A-13G. In some embodiments, the user interfaceelement can be stretched beyond the stable maximum size to a largersize, but will not remain at that larger size after the input or motionthat causes the stretch to that larger size ceases to affect the userinterface element.

In some embodiments, moving the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element to the first threshold position includes shrinking(2824) the user interface element such that the user interface elementreturns to the first maximum size of the user interface element (e.g.,the first maximum size is a stable maximum size of the user interfaceelement), e.g., as shown in FIGS. 12K-120 and 13A-13H. In someembodiments, the stable maximum size is the original size of the userinterface element.

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element (e.g., a content region, or an image, etc.) relativeto the first threshold position in the user interface (e.g., boundary ofa user interface window or display region that contains the userinterface element) includes shrinking (2826) the user interface elementin the user interface (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 12B-12D and 13I-13J.

In some embodiments, in response (2828) to detecting the input by thecontact, the device shrinks (2828-a) the user interface element suchthat the user interface element reaches a first minimum size of the userinterface element, where the first threshold position is determinedbased on the first minimum size and is located within of a displayedportion of the user interface element, and further shrinks (2828-b) theuser interface element beyond the first minimum size (e.g., inaccordance with the movement of the contact, and, optionally, inaccordance with the simulated inertial movement of the user interfaceelement after lift-off of the contact). In some embodiments, the userinterface element can be shrunken beyond the stable minimum size to asmaller size, but will not remain at that smaller size after the inputor motion that causes the shrink to that smaller size ceases to affectthe user interface element.

In some embodiments, moving the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element to the first threshold position includes expanding(2830) the user interface element such that the user interface elementreturns to the first minimum size of the user interface element (e.g.,the first minimum size is a stable minimum size of the user interfaceelement). In some embodiments, the stable minimum size is the originalsize of the user interface element (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 12D-12F and13J-13L).

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic (e.g., a tactile outputpattern (e.g., including an amplitude, a duration, a frequency, and/or awaveform, of the tactile output pattern), an accompanying audio, etc.)of the tactile output is configured (2832) based on a speed at which theouter edge of the user interface element moves across the firstthreshold position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic (e.g., a tactile outputpattern (e.g., including an amplitude, a duration, a frequency, and/or awaveform, of the tactile output pattern), an accompanying audio, etc.)of the tactile output is configured (2834) based on a characteristicspeed of the input (e.g., an average speed of the contact) at a timewhen the outer edge of the user interface element moves across the firstthreshold position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic (e.g., a tactile outputpattern (e.g., including an amplitude, a duration, a frequency, and/or awaveform, of the tactile output pattern), an accompanying audio, etc.)of the tactile output is configured (2836) based on an extent by whichthe outer edge of the user interface element has moved beyond the firstthreshold position in the user interface (e.g., when termination of theinput is detected, or when the user interface element gradually stopsmoving sometime after the termination of the input).

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(2838) the tactile output upon detecting that the outer edge of the userinterface element has moved across the first threshold position in theuser interface (e.g., tactile output 1121, FIG. 11C).

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(2840) the tactile output upon detecting the termination of the input(e.g., upon detecting lift-off of the contact) (e.g., tactile output1124, FIG. 11E).

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(2842) the tactile output upon starting to move the position of theouter edge of the user interface element to the first threshold position(e.g., when the user interface element starts to bounce back, the devicegenerates a tactile output indicating that the user interface elementhas started to bounce back).

In some embodiments, the device generates (2844) a second tactile outputupon detecting that the outer edge of the user interface element hasmoved across the first threshold position in the user interface.

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 28A-28E have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 3000, 3200, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 2800 described above withrespect to FIGS. 28A-28E. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 2800optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 3000,3200, and 3400). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 29 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 2900 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 29 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 29, an electronic device 2900 includes a display unit2902 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 2904; one or more tactile output generator units 2906 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 2908 coupled to thedisplay unit 2902, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2904, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 2906. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 2910, changing unit 2912, movingunit 2914, scrolling unit 2916, expanding unit 2918, and shrinking unit2920.

The processing unit 2908 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 2902) a user interface on the display unit 2902,wherein the user interface includes a first user interface element;detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2910) a contact at a location onthe touch-sensitive surface unit 2904 that corresponds to the first userinterface element; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 2910) an inputby the contact, including detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit 2910)a movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface unit 2904;in response to detecting the input by the contact: change (e.g., withthe changing unit 2912) a position of an outer edge of the userinterface element relative to a first threshold position in the userinterface in accordance with the movement of the contact on thetouch-sensitive surface unit 2904; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit2910) that the change in the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element relative to the first threshold position in the userinterface has caused the outer edge of the user interface element tomove (e.g., with the moving unit 2914) across the first thresholdposition in the user interface; after detecting that the outer edge ofthe user interface element has moved across the first threshold positionin the user interface, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 2906) a tactile output; and move (e.g., with the moving unit2914) the position of the outer edge of the user interface element tothe first threshold position.

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element relative to the first threshold position in the userinterface includes scrolling (e.g., with the scrolling unit 2916) theuser interface element in a first direction relative to the firstthreshold position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2908 is further configured to:in response to detecting the input by the contact: scroll (e.g., withthe scrolling unit 2916) the user interface element such that the outeredge of the user interface element moves across the first thresholdposition in the user interface; and enable display of (e.g., with thedisplay unit 2902) a first region that extends from the outer edge ofthe user interface element in a second direction opposite the firstdirection after the outer edge of user interface element is moved pastthe first threshold position.

In some embodiments, moving the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element to the first threshold position includes: scrolling(e.g., with the scrolling unit 2916) the user interface element in thesecond direction until the outer edge of the user interface returns tothe first threshold position; and ceasing to display the first regionthat extends from the outer edge of the user interface element.

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element relative to the first threshold position in the userinterface includes expanding (e.g., with the expanding unit 2918) theuser interface element in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2908 is further configured to:in response to detecting the input by the contact: expand (e.g., withthe expanding unit 2918) the user interface element until reaching afirst maximum size of the user interface element, wherein the outer edgeof the user interface element moves beyond a displayed portion of theuser interface, and the first threshold position is determined based onthe first maximum size and is located outside of the viewable region ofthe user interface; and further expand (e.g., with the expanding unit2918) the user interface element beyond the first maximum size.

In some embodiments, moving the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element to the first threshold position includes: shrinking(e.g., with the shrinking unit 2920) the user interface element suchthat the user interface element returns to the first maximum size of theuser interface element.

In some embodiments, changing the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element relative to the first threshold position in the userinterface includes shrinking (e.g., with the shrinking unit 2920) theuser interface element in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2908 is further configured to:in response to detecting the input by the contact: shrink (e.g., withthe shrinking unit 2920) the user interface element such that the userinterface element reaches a first minimum size of the user interfaceelement, wherein the first threshold position is determined based on thefirst minimum size and is located within of a displayed portion of theuser interface element; and further shrink (e.g., with the shrinkingunit 2920) the user interface element beyond the first minimum size.

In some embodiments, moving the position of the outer edge of the userinterface element to the first threshold position includes: expanding(e.g., with the expanding unit 2918) the user interface element suchthat the user interface element returns to the first minimum size of theuser interface element.

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic of the tactile outputis configured based on a speed at which the outer edge of the userinterface element moves across the first threshold position in the userinterface.

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic of the tactile outputis configured based on a characteristic speed of the input at a timewhen the outer edge of the user interface element moves across the firstthreshold position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, a respective characteristic of the tactile outputis configured based on an extent by which the outer edge of the userinterface element has moved beyond the first threshold position in theuser interface.

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2906) the tactileoutput upon detecting that the outer edge of the user interface elementhas moved across the first threshold position in the user interface.

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2906) the tactileoutput upon detecting the termination of the input.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 2908 is further configured to:generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2906) a secondtactile output upon detecting that the outer edge of the user interfaceelement has moved across the first threshold position in the userinterface.

In some embodiments, generating the tactile output includes generating(e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 2906) the tactileoutput upon starting to move (e.g., with the moving unit 2914) theposition of the outer edge of the user interface element to the firstthreshold position.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 28A-28E are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.29. For example, detection operations 2804, 2806, and 2810 and tactilefeedback operation 2812 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 inevent sorter 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, andevent dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information toapplication 136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application136-1 compares the event information to respective event definitions186, and determines whether a first contact at a first location on thetouch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event,such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respectivepredefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of theevent or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls dataupdater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internalstate 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respectiveGUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in theart how other processes can be implemented based on the componentsdepicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 30A-30G are flow diagrams illustrating a method 3000 of providinghaptic feedback in conjunction with visually indicating selection of anobject and drop-off of an object into a predetermined snap position in auser interface. The method 3000 is performed at an electronic device(e.g., device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100, FIG.1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensorsto detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. Insome embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display and thetouch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In someembodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface.Some operations in method 3000 are, optionally, combined and/or theorder of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 3000 relates to providing haptic feedbackin conjunction with visually indicating selection of an object anddrop-off of an object into a predetermined snap position in a userinterface. Additionally, tactile feedback provides valuable informationto the user for touch screen user interfaces where the user's finger isobscuring corresponding visual feedback, which is frequently the casewhen a user is dragging a user interface object on a touch screen. Thehaptic feedback reinforces the visual feedback in the user interfaceregarding the selection and drop-off of the object, thereby enhancingthe operability of the device and making the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

The device displays (3002) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a first object and a plurality of predeterminedobject snap positions. In some embodiments, the plurality ofpredetermined object snap positions are exact locations on the userinterface (e.g., locations that correspond to certain predefined points,lines, cells, and/or areas) that an object would to settle into when theobject is released (e.g., dropped, or otherwise freed from factors thatinfluence the object's movement or position) within a threshold range ofthe those exact locations. For example, in a calendar interface, datelines in the calendar grid define object snap positions for a calendarentry, and a calendar entry would settle between two adjacent date lineswhen the calendar entry is dropped in proximity to a region between thetwo adjacent date lines. In another example, in an item list (e.g., aweather information interface that includes a list of weather items thatcorrespond to a plurality of cities), boundary lines between adjacentlist items define snap positions for a list item, and a list item wouldsettle into a slot defined by a pair of adjacent boundary lines when thelist item is moved to and released in proximity to the slot. In yetanother example, in the home screen interface, a hidden grid definelocations that application icons are displayed in the home screen, andthese locations are snap locations that a moved application icon cansettle into when released near those locations. This is illustrated inFIG. 14A (calendar interface 1410), FIG. 15A (weather forecast interface1510), and FIG. 16A (home screen 1610).

The device then detects (3004) a first portion of an input by a contacton the touch-sensitive surface at a location that corresponds to thefirst object in the user interface (e.g., the first portion of the inputincludes touch-down of the contact at a location on the touch-sensitivesurface that corresponds to the first object in the user inter; or thefirst portion of the input includes movement of a contact to a locationon the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to the first object inthe user interface).

In response (3006) to detecting the first portion of the input by thecontact, and in accordance with a determination that the first portionof the input meets selection criteria (e.g., the selection criteriarequire that the contact be maintained for at least a threshold amountof time, and/or that a characteristic intensity of the contact exceeds apredetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a light press intensitythreshold IT_(L)) in order for the selection criteria to be met) (andwhile continuing to detect the contact), the device visually indicates(3006-a) selection of the first object (e.g., the object is highlighted,changed to a different color/font/size, marked with handles, and/oranimated, the object appears to be lifted off from the surface of theuser interface in the virtual z-direction and/or floating on the surfaceof the user interface) and generates (3006-b) a first tactile output(e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz) with a gain of 0.6) in conjunction withvisually indicating selection of the first object. E.g., in someembodiments, there is a delay between initial detection of the contactand the selection of the object, and the tactile output is generatedupon lift-off of the object from the surface of the user interface,e.g., in the virtual z-direction, after selection criteria are met bythe contact (e.g., when the contact has been maintained for at least athreshold amount of time, and/or when a characteristic intensity of thecontact exceeds a predetermined intensity threshold (e.g., a light pressintensity threshold IT_(L))). Selecting or picking up an object isillustrated in FIG. 14E (selecting calendar entry 1406 (shown as 1408 inselected state) by contact 1413), FIG. 14K (selection of calendar entry1406 (shown as 1420 in selected state) by contact 1415), FIG. 14N(selection of calendar entry 1406 (shown in 1430 in selected state) bycontact 1431), FIG. 15B (selection of weather item 1502-5 by contact1512), FIG. 16B (selection of icon 1604 by contact 1612), and FIG. 16F(selection of icon 1608 by contact 1616), for example.

While the first object is selected, the device detects (3008) a secondportion of the input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface,where detecting the second portion of the input includes detectingmovement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface. In responseto detecting the second portion of the input by the contact, the devicemoves (3010) the first object on the user interface in accordance withthe movement of the contact. This is shown in FIGS. 14F-14I and 14L-14M(dragging of calendar entry); FIGS. 15C-15D (e.g., dragging of weatheritem); and FIGS. 16G-16I (dragging icon).

After detecting the second portion of the input, while the first objectis proximate to a first predetermined object snap position (e.g., alocation between two adjacent date lines in a calendar interface, a slotthat is vacated by another list item, a slot for an application icon ona home screen), the device detects a third portion of the input by thecontact on the touch sensitive surface (e.g., the third portion of theinput includes lift-off of the contact, or a drop in the characteristicintensity of the contact below a threshold intensity (e.g., a releaseintensity threshold IT_(LR) that is lower than a light press intensitythreshold IT_(L))).

In response (3014) to detecting the third portion of the input by thecontact, and in accordance with a determination that the third portionof the input meets drop-off criteria, the device visually indicates(3014-a) deselection of the first object (e.g., the object isun-highlighted, restored to its preselection state, and/or animated),moves (3014-b) the first object to the first predetermined object snapposition (e.g., so that the object is automatically snapped, aligned,jumped to the first predetermined object snap position, e.g., a cellthat corresponds to Thursday, August 4, 12-1 PM), and generates (3014-c)a second tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz) with a gain of0.6, to indicate that the first object has settled into the firstpredetermined snap position). Dropping an object is illustrated in FIGS.14H-14J, 15L, 16E, and 16K.

In some embodiments, the drop-off criteria require that a characteristicintensity of the contact drops below a predetermined intensity threshold(e.g., the light press intensity threshold IT_(L), a release intensitythreshold IT_(LR) that is lower than IT_(L), or the contact detectionintensity threshold (e.g., lift-off of the contact)) in order for thedrop-off criteria to be met. In some embodiments, the drop-off criteriarequire that, if after lift-off of the contact, the first objectcontinues to move due to moment of inertia, a movement speed of thefirst object drops below a threshold speed after the first objectreaches within a threshold range of the first predetermined snapposition, in order for the drop-off criteria to be met. For example, inFIG. 16D, drop-off criteria are met when speed of icon 1604 due tosimulated inertia is below a threshold value and the icon is within athreshold range of a snap position. In FIGS. 14I and 14J, drop-offcriteria are met when lift-off of contact 1413 is detected. In FIGS.14S-14Q, drop-off criteria are met when the speed of calendar entry dueto simulated inertia is below a threshold value and calendar entry iswithin a threshold range of a snap position. In FIGS. 15K-15L, drop-offcriteria are met when speed of item 1502-5 due to simulated inertia isbelow a threshold value and calendar entry is within a threshold rangeof a snap position.

In some embodiments, the selection criteria require (3016) that acharacteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensitythreshold and that the contact is maintained for at least apredetermined threshold amount of time in order for the selectioncriteria to be met (e.g., a long press on the displayed calendar withintensity exceeding IT_(L) for a predetermined threshold amount of time,e.g., 300 ms).

In some embodiments, the selection criteria require (3018) that acharacteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensitythreshold and a second intensity threshold above the first intensitythreshold (e.g., a deep press on the displayed calendar, the deep presshaving an intensity exceeding ITS).

In some embodiments, a second tactile output pattern of the secondtactile output is different from a first tactile output pattern of thefirst tactile output (3020). For example, the pickup tactile outputgenerated in conjunction with visually indicating selection of thecalendar event “Go to Gym” has a first tactile output pattern (e.g., aMicroTap Medium (150 Hz), Gain min: 0.0 and max: 0.6), while the droptactile output generated in conjunction with displaying the calendarevent “Go to Gym” at the first predetermined object snap position has asecond tactile output pattern (e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz), Gain:0.6)).

In some embodiments, by using tactile outputs with different tactileoutput patterns, the device effectively communicate to the userregarding the different operations that have been performed in responseto the current portion of the input. The visual distinctions betweenpicking up an object and dropping off of an object in the user interfaceis reinforced by the different haptic sensations caused by the tactileoutputs generated according to the different tactile output patterns.This improved non-visual feedback enhances the operability of the deviceand makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output is generated (3022)concurrently with visually indicating the selection of the first object.For example, in some embodiments, in cases where there is a delaybetween the initial detection of the contact, the selection of theobject, and the visual changes that indicate the selection of theobject, the generation of the first tactile output is synchronized withthe visual changes that indicate the selection of the object (e.g., thefirst tactile output is generated when the first object lifts off ofdisplay, not when the finger touches down on the touch-sensitivesurface). This is illustrated in FIGS. 14B, 14E, 14B, 16B, and 16F, forexample.

In some embodiments, there is a delay between the time when theselection criteria are met by a current portion of the input and thetime when the first object completes the visual transition from anunselected state to a selected state. By introducing the tactile outputat the time when the first object completes the visual transition to theselected state, the device assures the user that the transition iscomplete and the object is picked up and ready for movement. The propertiming of the haptic feedback helps the user to provide proper inputsand reduces user mistakes when interacting with the device (e.g., byhelping the user to determine when to start dragging the object),thereby enhancing the operability of the device and making theuser-device interface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces powerusage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the user touse the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the second tactile output is generated (3024)concurrently with arrival of the first object at the first predeterminedobject snap position. For example, in cases where there is a delay(e.g., 500 ms) between detection of the third portion of the input bythe contact (e.g., the lift-off of the contact) and the snapping of thefirst object into the first predetermined object snap position, thetactile output generation is synchronized with the object settling intothe snap position. For example, in FIG. 14P, when a user flings anobject across the display, the lift-off of the contact happens when thecontact is located within the grid location for “Wednesday, August 3,10-11 AM”, and the calendar event “Go to Gym” continues to move on thecalendar user interface across the date boundary between “Thursday,August 4” and “Friday, August 5” after the lift-off of the contact. Whenthe calendar event settles into the first predetermined object snapposition, e.g., the position for “Friday, August 5” (e.g., drop-off ofthe object from the surface of the user interface in the virtualz-direction and horizontal shifting in the x-y plane into the positionbetween the date lines), the second tactile output is generatedconcurrently with displaying the calendar event “Go to Gym” at the timeslot on Friday, August 5, e.g., as shown in FIGS. 14S-14T. Thus, thedrop tactile output occurs when the object settles into place, not whenthe finger lifts off the touch-sensitive surface. This is alsoillustrated in FIGS. 15F-15L, and FIGS. 16C-16E, for example.

In some embodiments, the delay between the time when the input isterminated and the when the first object completes its motion andfinally settle into a stable position can be significant. By introducingthe tactile output at the time when the first object finally settlesinto a stable position, the device assures the user that the drop-off ofthe first object is completed, and the object is now in a stable state.The proper timing of the haptic feedback helps the user to provideproper inputs and reduces user mistakes when interacting with the device(e.g., by helping the user to determine whether the object is at adesired location and whether additional adjustments are needed), therebyenhancing the operability of the device and making the user-deviceinterface more efficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage andimproves battery life of the device by enabling the user to use thedevice more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, detecting the movement of the contact across thetouch-sensitive surface includes detecting (3026) that the contact hasmoved to a threshold location in proximity to an edge of the display (orto an edge of the displayed portion of the user interface) (e.g., thecontact moves within a predetermined distance from a date boundaryadjacent to the edge of the display, either before reaching the dateboundary or after reaching the date boundary) and moving the firstobject on the user interface in accordance with the movement of thecontact includes moving (3026-a) the first object to the thresholdlocation in proximity to the edge of the display in accordance with themovement of the contact. The device shifts (3026-b) the user interfacerelative to the first object on the display, such that a previouslyun-displayed portion of the user interface is displayed underneath thefirst object, and the device generates (3026-c) a third tactile outputin conjunction with shifting the user interface relative to the firstobject on the display.

For example, with reference to shifting step 3026-b, when the object ismoved to the right edge of the display, the weekly calendar view slidesto the left to display the next day or week under the object “Go toGym”. Similarly, when the object is moved to the left edge of thedisplay, the weekly calendar view slides to the right to display theprevious day or week under the object.

For example, with reference to generating step 3026-c, the weeklycalendar view of August 31-September 6 shifts by a day. As a result, theweekly calendar view for the week of September 1-7 slides under thecalendar object “Go to Gym” and a third tactile output (e.g., a MicroTapHigh (270 Hz), Gain: 0.4) is generated in conjunction with sliding theweekly calendar view for the week of September 1-7 under the calendarobject “Go to Gym”. This is illustrated in FIG. 14M, where a tactileoutput 1452 is generated in conjunction with shifting the calendar userinterface 1410.

In some embodiments, the shifting of the user interface may be hard tonotice and/or may cause disorientation and confusion of the user. Byintroducing the tactile output in conjunction with the changes in theuser interface, the device alerts the user that an event of significancehas occurred, and prompts the user to pay attention to the changes inthe user interface. The haptic feedback provided in conjunction with theuser interface changes helps the user to provide proper inputs andreduces user mistakes when interacting with the device (e.g., by helpingthe user to note the relative position between the object and the newlyrevealed portion of the user interface), thereby enhancing theoperability of the device and making the user-device interface moreefficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, detecting the movement of the contact across thetouch-sensitive surface includes detecting (3028) that the contact hasmoved to a threshold location in proximity to a second predeterminedobject snap position (e.g., the contact moves within a predetermineddistance from a date boundary, either before reaching the date boundaryor after crossing the date boundary) and moving (3028-a) the firstobject on the user interface in accordance with the movement of thecontact includes, in response to detecting that the contact has moved tothe threshold location in proximity to the second predetermined objectsnap position, moving (3028-b) the first object, relative to thethreshold location, to the second predetermined object snap position.The device generates (3028-c) a third tactile output in conjunction withmoving the first object to the second predetermined object snapposition. This is illustrated in FIG. 14G, for example.

For example, with reference to moving step 3028-b, while the firstobject is dragged by the contact, the object snaps to one or more snappositions when the object is dragged near those snap positions. As thecontact continues to move away from a snap position at which the objectis currently settled, the object stays at the snap position until thecontact has moved out of the threshold range associated with the currentsnap position, and reached the threshold range associated with the nextsnap position. Once the contact has reached the threshold range of thenext snap position, the object jumps to catch up with the contact andsnaps to the next snap position. For example, in FIG. 14G, when thefinger moves horizontally within the grid for “Tuesday, August 2, 10-11AM,” the calendar event “Go to Gym” remains stationary. While the fingermoves close to the date boundary between “Tuesday, August 2” and“Wednesday, August 3,” the device moves the calendar event “Go to Gym”from “Tuesday, August 2, 10-11 AM” to “Wednesday, August 3, 10-11 AM”(“the second predetermined object snap position” in this case), suchthat it appears the calendar event “Go to Gym” slides under the fingerand automatically springs to the next snap position).

For example, with reference to generating step 3028-c, while thecalendar event “Go to Gym” is moved from Tuesday, August 2, 10-11 AM andsnapped to the location for Wednesday, August 3, 10-11 AM, a retargettactile output (e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz), Gain: 0.4) is generated.In some embodiments, the third tactile output has lower amplitude thanthe first tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap Medium (150 Hz), Gain min:0.0 and max: 0.6) for the pickup of the first object. In someembodiments, the third tactile output has a different waveform from thefirst tactile output, the pickup tactile output.)

In some embodiments, by introducing the tactile output at the time whenthe first object settles into a new snap position, the device alerts theuser to pay attention to the new position of the object and make adecision regarding whether to the object has arrived at a desiredposition. The haptic feedback provided in conjunction with the userinterface changes helps the user to provide proper inputs and reducesuser mistakes when interacting with the device (e.g., by helping theuser to take note of the new position of the object), thereby enhancingthe operability of the device and making the user-device interface moreefficient, which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves batterylife of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quicklyand efficiently.

In some embodiments, before the first object is moved to the firstpredetermined snap location (3030), the user interface includes a secondobject located at the first predetermined snap position, and the userinterface includes a second predetermined snap position adjacent to thefirst predetermined snap position. For example, in the weather forecastuser interface, the weather items “Shenzhen” and “Beijing” occupy twoadjacent slots (snap position 1 and snap position 2). The device moves(3030-a) the first object toward the first predetermined snap position(e.g., either in accordance with the movement of the contact or bymovement of inertia after lift-off of the contact) and, in accordancewith a determination that the first object is within a threshold rangeof the first predetermined snap position, moves (3030-b) the secondobject from the first predetermined snap position to the secondpredetermined object snap position (e.g., while moving weather forBeijing object towards weather for Shenzhen object, weather for Shenzhenobject is moved from the first object snap position 1504-3 and snappedto the second object snap position 1504-4 to make room for the movingweather object for “Beijing”.) The device also generates (3030-c) afourth tactile output in conjunction with moving the second object tothe second predetermined snap position. (e.g., while moving weather forShenzhen object to the second object snap position 1504-4, a snaptactile output 1522 (e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz), Gain: 0.4) isgenerated, as shown in FIGS. 15C-15E.

In some embodiments, the fourth tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap High(270 Hz), Gain: 0.4) has a lower amplitude than the first tactile output(e.g., a MicroTap Medium (150 Hz), Gain min: 0.0 and max: 0.6), thepickup tactile output. In some embodiments, the fourth tactile outputhas a different waveform from the first tactile output, the pickuptactile output, e.g., a different number of cycles.) In someembodiments, when the first object continues to move forward to anothersnap position adjacent to the first predetermined snap position (e.g.,the slot occupied by the weather item “Xi'an”), the object currentlyoccupying that snap position will move to the first snap position tomake room for the weather item “Beijing.” When the object settles intothe first snap position, a tactile output is generated. In someembodiments, when a series of objects are placed in a sequence of snappositions, when the first object moves past each of the objects, theobjects each jump to the adjacent vacant slot, and an accompanyingtactile output is generated. The rate by which the tactile outputs aregenerated is limited by a threshold, such that, if the rate that theobjects are moving into new slots is higher than the threshold, sometactile outputs are skipped (e.g., when the rate is faster than onceevery 0.05 seconds). In some embodiments, the tactile output isgenerated by calculating a time based on the time at which the objectmoved over a slot into which it could be dropped and adding a predefinedamount of time delay and generating the tactile output after the timedelay. This avoids generating a cascade of tactile outputs when themovement of one of the object causes multiple objects to snap intodifferent locations.

In some embodiments, moving the first object toward the firstpredetermined snap position includes moving (3032) the first objecttoward the first predetermined snap position in accordance with movementof the contact on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds tomovement toward the first predetermined snap position.

In some embodiments, the third portion of the input includes lift-off ofthe contact (3034) and moving the first object toward the firstpredetermined snap position includes continuing (3034-a) movement of thefirst object toward the first predetermined snap position after thelift-off of the contact (e.g., with gradually decreasing speed).

In some embodiments, the first tactile output has higher amplitude(3036) than the second tactile output (3036). For example, the firsttactile output is a pickup tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap High (270Hz), Gain: 1.0) and the second tactile output is a drop tactile output(e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz), Gain Drop: 0.6).

In some embodiments, the first tactile output has same waveform (3038)as the second tactile output (e.g., both are MicroTaps, with half acycle).

In some embodiments, the device detects (3040) (e.g., either before theinput, or after the input for pickup and drop-off) a second input by asecond contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location thatcorresponds to a third snap position in the user interface. Inaccordance with a determination (3040-a) that the second input meetsitem creation criteria (e.g., the second input is a long press by thesecond contact on the touch-sensitive surface at a location thatcorresponds to a snap location that is not already occupied by anotherobject), the device displays (3040-b) a new object in the user interfaceand generates (3040-c) a fifth tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap Medium(150 Hz), Gain max: 0.8 Gain min: 0.0) in conjunction with displayingthe new item in the user interface. In some embodiments, upon lift-offof the second contact, a new user interface for entering informationabout the new object is displayed (no tactile output is generated).After the object information is entered and the new user interface isdismissed, the original user interface is displayed with the new item asan existing item (in an unselected state).

In some embodiments, the device detects (3042) termination of the secondinput, including detecting lift-off of the second contact. In response(3042-a) to detecting the lift-off of the second contact, the device(optionally) displays (3042-b) a second user interface for enteringinformation related to the new object, in accordance with adetermination that the second input includes movement of the secondcontact before the lift-off of the second contact, generates (3042-c) asixth tactile output (e.g., and maintaining display of the calendar userinterface) (e.g., a drop tactile output, such as aa MicroTap High (270Hz), Gain: 0.6), and in accordance with a determination that the secondinput does not include movement of the second contact before thelift-off of the second contact, forgoes (3042-d) generation of the sixthtactile output (e.g., and displaying a new event editing user interfacefor editing details of a new event created in response to the secondinput). In some embodiments, the user interface shows the movement ofthe new object with the second contact before the user interface forentering information about the new object is displayed.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first portion of theinput by the contact, and in accordance with a determination that thethird portion of the input does not meet the selection criteria, thedevice scrolls (3044) content displayed in the user interface inresponse to detecting movement of the contact across the touch-sensitivesurface.

In some embodiments, the user interface is a calendar interface, theplurality of predetermined snap positions correspond to a plurality ofdates, and the first object includes a representation of a calendarentry (3046). This is shown in FIGS. 14A-14T.

In some embodiments, the user interface is an application launch userinterface that includes a plurality of application icons that correspondto different applications of a plurality of applications, the pluralityof predetermined snap positions correspond to a plurality of positionsfor displaying application icons, and the first object includes a firstapplication icon that corresponds to a first application of theplurality of applications (3048). This is shown in FIGS. 16A-16K.

In some embodiments, the user interface is a weather forecast userinterface that includes a plurality of weather items that correspond todifferent geographical locations of a plurality of geographicallocations and include an indication of the weather at a correspondinggeographical location, the plurality of predetermined snap positionscorrespond to a plurality of positions for displaying weather items, andthe first object includes a first weather item of the plurality ofweather items (3050). This is shown in FIGS. 15A-15L.

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 30A-30G have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3200, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 3000 described above withrespect to FIGS. 30A-30G. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 3000optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800,3200, and 3400). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 31 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 3100 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 31 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 31, an electronic device 3100 includes a display unit3102 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 3104; one or more tactile output generator units 3106 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 3108 coupled to thedisplay unit 3102, the touch-sensitive surface unit 3104, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 3106. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 3110, moving unit 3112, shiftingunit 3114, and scrolling unit 3116.

The processing unit 3108 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 3102) a user interface on the display unit 3102,wherein the user interface includes a first object and a plurality ofpredetermined object snap positions; detect (e.g., with the detectingunit 3110) a first portion of an input by a contact on thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3104 at a location that corresponds to thefirst object in the user interface; in response to detecting the firstportion of the input by the contact, and in accordance with adetermination that the first portion of the input meets selectioncriteria: visually indicate (e.g., with the display unit 3102) selectionof the first object; and generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 3106) a first tactile output in conjunction withvisually indicating selection of the first object; while the firstobject is selected, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) a secondportion of the input by the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit3104, wherein detecting the second portion of the input includesdetecting (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) movement of the contactacross the touch-sensitive surface unit 3104; in response to detectingthe second portion of the input by the contact, move (e.g., with themoving unit 3112) the first object on the user interface in accordancewith the movement of the contact; after detecting the second portion ofthe input, while the first object is proximate to a first predeterminedobject snap position, detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) athird portion of the input by the contact on the touch sensitivesurface; and in response to detecting the third portion of the input bythe contact, and in accordance with a determination that the thirdportion of the input meets drop-off criteria: visually indicate (e.g.,with the display unit 3102) deselection of the first object; move (e.g.,with the moving unit 3112) the first object to the first predeterminedobject snap position; and generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 3106) a second tactile output.

In some embodiments, the selection criteria require that acharacteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensitythreshold and that the contact is maintained for at least apredetermined threshold amount of time in order for the selectioncriteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the selection criteria require that acharacteristic intensity of the contact exceeds a first intensitythreshold and a second intensity threshold above the first intensitythreshold.

In some embodiments, a second tactile output pattern of the secondtactile output is different from a first tactile output pattern of thefirst tactile output.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output is generated concurrentlywith visually indicating the selection of the first object.

In some embodiments, the second tactile output is generated concurrentlywith arrival of the first object at the first predetermined object snapposition.

In some embodiments, detecting the movement of the contact across thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3104 includes detecting (e.g., with thedetecting unit 3110) that the contact has moved to a threshold locationin proximity to an edge of the display unit 3102; and moving the firstobject on the user interface in accordance with the movement of thecontact includes moving (e.g., with the moving unit 3112) the firstobject to the threshold location in proximity to the edge of the displayunit 3102 in accordance with the movement of the contact; and theprocessing unit 3108 is further configured to: shift (e.g., with theshifting unit 3114) the user interface relative to the first object onthe display unit 3102, such that a previously un-displayed portion ofthe user interface is displayed underneath the first object; generate(e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 3106) a third tactileoutput in conjunction with shifting the user interface relative to thefirst object on the display unit 3102.

In some embodiments, detecting the movement of the contact across thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3104 includes detecting (e.g., with thedetecting unit 3110) that the contact has moved to a threshold locationin proximity to a second predetermined object snap position; moving thefirst object on the user interface in accordance with the movement ofthe contact includes: in response to detecting that the contact hasmoved to the threshold location in proximity to the second predeterminedobject snap position, moving (e.g., with the moving unit 3112) the firstobject, relative to the threshold location, to the second predeterminedobject snap position; and generating (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 3106) a third tactile output in conjunction withmoving the first object to the second predetermined object snapposition.

In some embodiments, before the first object is moved to the firstpredetermined snap location, the user interface includes a second objectlocated at the first predetermined snap position, and the user interfaceincludes a second predetermined snap position adjacent to the firstpredetermined snap position; and the processing unit 3108 is furtherconfigured to: move (e.g., with the moving unit 3112) the first objecttoward the first predetermined snap position; and in accordance with adetermination that the first object is within a threshold range of thefirst predetermined snap position, move (e.g., with the moving unit3112) the second object from the first predetermined snap position tothe second predetermined object snap position; and generate (e.g., withthe tactile output generator unit(s) 3106) a fourth tactile output inconjunction with moving the second object to the second predeterminedsnap position.

In some embodiments, the third portion of the input includes lift-off ofthe contact; and moving the first object toward the first predeterminedsnap position includes continuing movement of the first object towardthe first predetermined snap position after the lift-off of the contact.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output has higher amplitude thanthe second tactile output.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output has same waveform as thesecond tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 3108 is further configured to:detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) a second input by a secondcontact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 3104 at a location thatcorresponds to a third snap position in the user interface; and inaccordance with a determination that the second input meets itemcreation criteria: enable display of (e.g., with the display unit 3102)a new object in the user interface; and generate (e.g., with the tactileoutput generator unit(s) 3106) a fifth tactile output in conjunctionwith displaying the new item in the user interface.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 3108 is further configured to:detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) termination of the secondinput, including detecting (e.g., with the detecting unit 3110) lift-offof the second contact; in response to detecting the lift-off of thesecond contact: enable display of (e.g., with the display unit 3102) asecond user interface for entering information related to the newobject; in accordance with a determination that the second inputincludes movement of the second contact before the lift-off of thesecond contact, generate (e.g., with the tactile output generatorunit(s) 3106) a sixth tactile output; and in accordance with adetermination that the second input does not include movement of thesecond contact before the lift-off of the second contact, forgogeneration of the sixth tactile output.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 3108 is further configured to:in response to detecting the first portion of the input by the contact,and in accordance with a determination that the third portion of theinput does not meet the selection criteria, scroll (e.g., with thescrolling unit 3116) content displayed in the user interface in responseto detecting movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surfaceunit 3104.

In some embodiments, the user interface is a calendar interface, theplurality of predetermined snap positions correspond to a plurality ofdates, and the first object includes a representation of a calendarentry.

In some embodiments, the user interface is an application launch userinterface that includes a plurality of application icons that correspondto different applications of a plurality of applications, the pluralityof predetermined snap positions correspond to a plurality of positionsfor displaying application icons, and the first object includes a firstapplication icon that corresponds to a first application of theplurality of applications.

In some embodiments, the user interface is a weather forecast userinterface that includes a plurality of weather items that correspond todifferent geographical locations of a plurality of geographicallocations and include an indication of the weather at a correspondinggeographical location, the plurality of predetermined snap positionscorrespond to a plurality of positions for displaying weather items, andthe first object includes a first weather item of the plurality ofweather items.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 30A-30G are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.31. For example, detection operation 3004 and tactile feedback operation3006 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatchermodule 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the eventinformation to respective event definitions 186, and determines whethera first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surfacecorresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of anobject on a user interface. When a respective predefined event orsub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Eventhandler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In someembodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 toupdate what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would beclear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processescan be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 32A-32C are flow diagrams illustrating a method 3200 of providinghaptic feedback in conjunction with visual feedback in accordance with adetermination that a current orientation of a device meets certainpredetermined criteria. The method 3200 is performed at an electronicdevice (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3, or portable multifunction device 100,FIG. 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or moresensors to detect intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitivesurface. In some embodiments, the display is a touch-screen display andthe touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. Insome embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitivesurface. Some operations in method 3200 are, optionally, combined and/orthe order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 3200 relates providing haptic feedback inconjunction with visual feedback in accordance with a determination thata current orientation of a device meets certain predetermined criteria.By providing haptic feedback, the device alerts the user when the devicehas reached an orientation of interest without requiring the user tomaintain visual contact with the user interface. In addition, in someembodiments, the visual changes that indicate the satisfaction of thecriteria may be subtle and difficult to notice. Additionally, tactilefeedback provides valuable information to the user for touch screen userinterfaces where the user's finger is obscuring corresponding visualfeedback. The haptic feedback reinforces the visual feedback regardingthe current orientation state of the device, thereby enhancing theoperability of the device and making the user-device interface moreefficient (e.g., by helping the user to provide proper inputs andreducing user mistakes when operating/interacting with the device)which, additionally, reduces power usage and improves battery life ofthe device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly andefficiently.

The device displays (3202) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes an indicator of device orientation thatindicates the current orientation of the electronic device. For example,in some embodiments, the indicator of device orientation is a compassthat indicates the device's orientation relative to the Earth's magneticfield (e.g., as shown in FIG. 17A), a level that indicates theorientation of the device relative to a plane that is normal to theEarth's gravitational field when the device is held horizontally (e.g.,as shown in FIG. 18A), or a plumbness indicator (which may be part ofthe level app) that indicates the orientation of the device relative tothe Earth's gravitational field when the device is held vertically.

The device then detects (3204) movement of the electronic device. Inresponse (3206) to detecting the movement of the electronic device: inaccordance with a determination (3206-a) that the current orientation ofthe electronic device meets first criteria: the device changes (3206-b)the user interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device (e.g., change the color ofthe user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG. 18E) or move a directionindicator around a compass face (e.g., as shown in FIGS. 17B, 17E, and17H)) and generates (3206-c) a tactile output (e.g., tactile outputs1712, 1714, and 1716 in FIGS. 17B, 17E, and 17H; and tactile output 1804in FIG. 18E) upon changing the user interface to indicate that the firstcriteria are met by the current orientation of the electronic device;and, in accordance with a determination that the current orientation ofthe electronic does not meet the first criteria, the device changes(3206-d) the user interface to indicate the current orientation of thedevice without generating the tactile output (e.g., the user interfaceis continuously updated with the changing orientation of the device, asshown in FIGS. 17C, 17D, 17F, 17G, and FIGS. 18A-18D). In one example,the first criteria are met when the device is level and stable (e.g., asshown in FIG. 18E). In another example, the first criteria are met whenthe device is plumb and stable. In yet another example, the firstcriteria are met when the device reaches one of one or morepredetermined directions (e.g., every 30 degrees away from true North,as shown in FIGS. 17B, 17E, and 17H).

In some embodiments, after generating the tactile output in accordancewith the current orientation of the electronic device meeting the firstcriteria, the device detects (3208) second movement of the electronicdevice. In response (3208-a) to detecting the second movement of theelectronic device: in accordance with a determination (3208-b) that thecurrent orientation of the electronic device meets the first criteriafor a second time, the device changes (3208-c) the user interface toindicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientation ofthe electronic device and generates (3208-d) a second tactile outputupon changing the user interface to indicate that the first criteria aremet by the current orientation of the electronic device; and, inaccordance with a determination that the current orientation of theelectronic does not meet the first criteria for the second time, thedevice changes (3208-e) the user interface to indicate the currentorientation of the device without generating the second tactile output.In one example, the first criteria are met for a second time when thedevice re-entered the level state for at least a threshold amount oftime after moving away from the level state. In another example, thefirst criteria are met for a second time when the device re-entered theplumb state for at least a threshold amount of time after leaving theplumb state. In yet another example, the first criteria are met for asecond time when the device reaches another one of the one or morepredetermined directions (e.g., every 30 degrees away from true North).

In some embodiments, the user interface includes (3210) a compass facewith a plurality of major markings that correspond to a plurality ofmajor directions relative to a magnetic field near the device. In someembodiments. the compass face further includes, between each pair ofadjacent major markings of the plurality of major markings, a pluralityof minor markings that correspond to a plurality of minor directions.The first criteria require that the current device orientation matchesone of the plurality of major directions in order for the first criteriato be met. The first criteria are not met when the current deviceorientation does not match one of the plurality of major directions(e.g., the current device orientation matches one of the plurality ofminor directions). Changing the user interface to indicate that thefirst criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice includes displaying the current orientation of the device as oneof the major directions (e.g., displaying the orientation as “0degrees,” “30 degrees,” etc. on the compass face). This is shown inFIGS. 17A-17H, for example.

In some embodiments, the user interface includes (3212) an alignmentindicator (e.g., a level indicator or a plumb indicator) that indicatesa current degree of deviation from a predetermined orientation (e.g., abubble between two lines to indicate deviation from the level state, ora number to indicate deviation from the level or plumb state, or twointersecting circles to indicate deviation from the level state, or twointersecting straight lines to indicate deviation from the plumb state,etc.) that is determined based on the current orientation of theelectronic device. The first criteria require that the current degree ofdeviation is less than a threshold amount and remains below thethreshold amount for at least a threshold amount of time (e.g., deviceis level and stable, or the device is plumb and stable) in order for thefirst criteria to be met. The first criteria are not met when thecurrent degree of deviation does not remain below the threshold amountfor at least the threshold amount of time. Changing the user interfaceto indicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientationof the electronic device includes changing a color of the user interface(e.g., the user interface turns green when the first criteria are metand the tactile output is generated). This is shown in FIGS. 18A-18E,for example.

In some embodiments, determining (3214) the current orientation of theelectronic device includes: in accordance with a determination that theelectronic device is in a first orientation state with respect to areference orientation (e.g., the reference orientation is a horizontalplane, and the device is more horizontal than vertical relative to thehorizontal plane. In some embodiments, the horizontal plane is a planethat is normal to a direction of the Earth's gravitational field), thedevice determines (3214-a) the current orientation of the electronicdevice in accordance with a degree of alignment of the electronic devicewith the reference orientation; and, in accordance with a determinationthat the electronic device is in a second orientation state with respectto the reference orientation (e.g., the reference orientation is ahorizontal plane, and the device is more vertical than horizontalrelative to the horizontal plane), the device determines (3214-b) thecurrent orientation of the electronic device in accordance with a degreeof alignment of the electronic device with the Earth's gravitationalfield.

In some embodiments, the first criteria require (3216) that a rate forgenerating tactile outputs in accordance with the current orientation ofthe electronic device does not exceed a predetermined rate limit (e.g.,no more than one tactile output every 0.05 seconds) in order for thefirst criteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the first criteria require (3216) that only onetactile output is generated while the current orientation of theelectronic device is maintained (e.g., a tactile output is generatedwhen the device reaches a predetermined orientation, and no subsequenttactile output is generated while the device is maintained in thatpredetermined orientation, or when the device leaves that predeterminedorientation).

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 32A-32C have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, and 3400) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 3200 described above withrespect to FIGS. 32A-32C. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 3200optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800,3000, and 3400). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 33 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 3300 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 33 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 33, an electronic device 3300 includes a display unit3302 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 3304; one or more tactile output generator units 3306 configured togenerate tactile outputs; one or more orientation sensor units 3307configured to determine a current orientation of the electronic device,and a processing unit 3308 coupled to the display unit 3302, thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3304, and the one or more tactile outputgenerator units 3306. In some embodiments, the processing unit includesdetecting unit 3310, changing unit 3312, and determining unit 3314.

The processing unit 3308 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 3302) a user interface on the display unit 3302,wherein the user interface includes an indicator of device orientationthat indicates (e.g., with the orientation sensor units 3307) thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; detect (e.g., with thedetecting unit 3310) movement of the electronic device; and, in responseto detecting the movement of the electronic device: in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic devicemeets first criteria: change (e.g., with the changing unit 3312) theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; and generate (e.g., withthe tactile output generator unit(s) 3306) a tactile output uponchanging the user interface to indicate that the first criteria are metby the current orientation of the electronic device; and in accordancewith a determination that the current orientation of the electronicdevice does not meet the first criteria, change (e.g., with the changingunit 3312) the user interface to indicate the current orientation of thedevice without generating the tactile output.

In some embodiments, the user interface includes a compass face with aplurality of major markings that correspond to a plurality of majordirections relative to a magnetic field near the device, the firstcriteria require that the current device orientation matches one of theplurality of major directions in order for the first criteria to be met,the first criteria are not met when the current device orientation doesnot match one of the plurality of major directions, and changing theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device includes displaying (e.g.,with the display unit 3302) the current orientation of the device as oneof the major directions.

In some embodiments, the processing unit 3308 is further configured to:after generating the tactile output in accordance with the currentorientation of the electronic device meeting the first criteria, detect(e.g., with the detecting unit 3310) second movement of the electronicdevice; and, in response to detecting the second movement of theelectronic device: in accordance with a determination (e.g., with thedetermining unit 3314) that the current orientation of the electronicdevice meets the first criteria for a second time: change (e.g., withthe changing unit 3312) the user interface to indicate that the firstcriteria are met by the current orientation of the electronic device;and generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 3306) asecond tactile output upon changing the user interface to indicate thatthe first criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice; and in accordance with a determination (e.g., with thedetermining unit 3314) that the current orientation of the electronicdevice does not meet the first criteria for the second time, change(e.g., with the changing unit 3312) the user interface to indicate thecurrent orientation of the device without generating the second tactileoutput.

In some embodiments, the user interface includes an alignment indicatorthat indicates a current degree of deviation from a predeterminedorientation that is determined (e.g., with the determining unit 3314)based on the current orientation (e.g., with the orientation sensorunits 3307) of the electronic device, the first criteria require thatthe current degree of deviation is less than a threshold amount andremains below the threshold amount for at least a threshold amount oftime in order for the first criteria to be met, the first criteria arenot met when the current degree of deviation does not remain below thethreshold amount for at least the threshold amount of time, and changing(e.g., with the changing unit 3312) the user interface to indicate thatthe first criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice includes changing (e.g., with the changing unit 3312) a color ofthe user interface.

In some embodiments, determining the current orientation of theelectronic device includes: in accordance with a determination that theelectronic device is in a first orientation state with respect to areference orientation, determining (e.g., with the determining unit3314) the current orientation of the electronic device (e.g., with theorientation sensor units 3307) in accordance with a degree of alignmentof the electronic device with the reference orientation; and inaccordance with a determination (e.g., with the determining unit 3314)that the electronic device is in a second orientation state (e.g., withthe orientation sensor units 3307) with respect to the referenceorientation, determining (e.g., with the determining unit 3314) thecurrent orientation of the electronic device in accordance with a degreeof alignment of the electronic device with the Earth's gravitationalfield.

In some embodiments, the first criteria require that a rate forgenerating tactile outputs in accordance with the current orientation ofthe electronic device does not exceed a predetermined rate limit inorder for the first criteria to be met.

In some embodiments, the first criteria require that only one tactileoutput is generated while the current orientation of the electronicdevice is maintained.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 32A-32C are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.33. For example, detection operations 3204 and tactile feedbackoperation 3206 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, eventrecognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and eventdispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application136-1. A respective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 comparesthe event information to respective event definitions 186, anddetermines whether a first contact at a first location on thetouch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event,such as selection of an object on a user interface. When a respectivepredefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of theevent or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls dataupdater 176 or object updater 177 to update the application internalstate 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respectiveGUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application.Similarly, it would be clear to a person having ordinary skill in theart how other processes can be implemented based on the componentsdepicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

FIGS. 34A-34D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 3400 of providingcoordinated haptic and audio feedback in accordance with a moveablecomponent passing through selectable options. The method 3400 isperformed at an electronic device (e.g., device 300, FIG. 3, or portablemultifunction device 100, FIG. 1A) with a display, a touch-sensitivesurface, and one or more sensors to detect intensity of contacts withthe touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the display is atouch-screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integratedwith the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from thetouch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 3400 are, optionally,combined and/or the order of some operations is, optionally, changed.

As described below, the method 3400 relates to providing haptic feedbackwith accompanying audio feedback in accordance with a respective speedby which a moveable component passes through each selectable option in aplurality of selectable options (e.g., with slowing speed aftertermination of a scroll input that had set the moveable component inmotion). In some embodiments, as the moveable component passes through aseries of selectable options with decreasing speed, the device generatestactile outputs that have the same value for a first property (e.g.,frequency) and different values for a second property (e.g., amplitude),while providing corresponding audio outputs with different values forthe first property (e.g., frequency). It is advantageous to combinetactile outputs and audio outputs in an intelligent manner to provide arich and intuitive experience to the user without undue burdens on thedevice's hardware/software capabilities and inform the user about thespeed and amount of movement of the moveable component. For example, bykeeping the first property (e.g., frequency) of the tactile outputs at aconstant value and only vary the value of a second property (e.g.,amplitude), the burdens placed on the tactile output generators arereduced (e.g., especially when tactile outputs are generated at a highrate), which improves longevity of the device. By providingcorresponding audio outputs with varying values for the first property(e.g., frequency), the device can make up the variations needed toconvey the correct sensations that match the visual changes in the userinterface with minimal cost. Additionally, tactile feedback providesvaluable information to the user for touch screen user interfaces wherethe user's finger is obscuring corresponding visual feedback. Providingthis improved nonvisual feedback enhances the operability of the deviceand makes the user-device interface more efficient (e.g., by helping theuser to provide proper inputs and reducing user mistakes whenoperating/interacting with the device) which, additionally, reducespower usage and improves battery life of the device by enabling the userto use the device more quickly and efficiently.

The device displays (3402) a user interface on the display, where theuser interface includes a user interface object that includes a firstmoveable component (e.g., minute wheel 1950 in FIG. 19A) that representsa first plurality of selectable options (e.g., a time picker withmoveable elements for choosing a hour and a minute value from aplurality of hour and minute values, respectively; a date picker withmovable elements for choosing a year, a month, and a date value from aplurality of year, month, and date values, respectively).

The device detects (3404) a first scroll input (e.g., input by contact1904) directed to the first moveable component (e.g., minute wheel 1950)of the user interface object that includes movement of a first contacton the touch-sensitive surface and liftoff of the first contact from thetouch-sensitive surface.

In response (3406) to detecting the first scroll input: the device moves(3406-a) the first moveable component through a subset of the firstplurality of selectable options of the first moveable component (e.g.,the moveable component moves through a respective selectable option whenthe respective selectable option passes a predetermined position (e.g.,a position marked by an stationary indicator) or enters a predeterminedstate (e.g., facing forward at the user) in the user interface duringthe movement of the moveable component), including moving the firstmoveable component through a first selectable option and a secondselectable option of the first moveable component after detecting theliftoff of the first contact from the touch-sensitive surface, where themovement of the first moveable component gradually slows down after theliftoff of the first contact is detected (e.g., the moveable componentcontinues to move due to inertia). This is illustrated in FIGS. 19A-19J,for example, where minute wheel 1950 gradually slows down after input bycontact 1904 is terminated and minute wheel 1950 passes through asequence of minute values during its movement.

As the first moveable component moves (3406-b) through a firstselectable option with a first speed, the device generates (3406-c) afirst tactile output (e.g., a MicroTap High (270 Hz), gain: 0.4, minimuminterval 0.05 seconds) and generates (3406-d) a first audio output(e.g., a haptic audio output that accompanies the tactile output). Thisis illustrated in FIG. 19B where tactile output 1920 and audio output1921 are generated when minute wheel passes through minute value “59”,for example.

As the first moveable component moves (3406-e) through the secondselectable option with a second speed that is slower than the firstspeed, the device generates (3406-f) a second tactile output that isdifferent in a first output property (e.g., amplitude) than the firsttactile output and that is the same in a second output property (e.g.,frequency) as the first tactile output (e.g., the second tactile outputis a MicroTap High (270 Hz), with a gain: 0.2, minimum interval 0.05seconds) and generates (3406-g) a second audio output that is differentin the second output property (e.g., frequency) than the first audiooutput. This is illustrated in FIG. 19G where tactile output 1926 andaudio output 1927 are generated when minute wheel passes through minutevalue “34” at a slower speed than when minute wheel passed throughminute value “59” in FIG. 19B. Tactile output 1926 has a lower amplitudethan tactile output 1920, and same frequency as tactile output 1920.Audio output 1927 has a higher frequency than Audio output 1921.

For example, when the wheel of the minute element rotates through aseries of values in sequence with decreasing speed after lift-off of thecontact is detected, the frequencies of the tactile outputs remain thesame (e.g., at 270 Hz), but the amplitudes of the tactile outputsdecrease with the decreasing speed of the wheel (e.g., the gain valuedecreases with the decreasing speed); in contrast, the pitches of theaudio outputs that accompany the tactile outputs become lower over timewith the reducing speed of the wheel.

In some embodiments, moving the first moveable component through thesubset of the first plurality of selectable options of the firstmoveable component includes moving (3408) the first moveable componentthrough a third selectable option of the first plurality of selectableoptions. As the first movable component moves (3408-a) through the thirdselectable option of the first plurality of selectable options: inaccordance with a determination that a tactile output rate limit is notreached, the device generates (3408-b) a third tactile output (andgenerates a third audio output); and, in accordance with a determinationthat the tactile output rate limit is reached, the device forgoes(3408-c) generation of the third tactile output. This is illustrated inFIGS. 19B-19J, where tactile outputs are skipped in FIGS. 19C, 19E whenminute wheel is passing through values at a high speed and the tactileoutput rate limit is reached; and where tactile outputs are generated inFIGS. 19D, 19F, 19G, 19I, and 19J when tactile output rate limit is notreached (e.g., either because previous tactile outputs have been skippedor when speed of minute wheel has slowed down). In some embodiments,audio outputs are still generated, even when a tactile output is skippeddue to the tactile output rate limit being reached. In some embodiments,the tactile outputs are still timed to coincide with movement of thefirst moveable component even when tactile outputs are skipped.

In some embodiments, the user interface object further includes (3410) asecond moveable component (e.g., hour wheel 1948 in FIG. 19K) thatrepresents a second plurality of selectable options (e.g., in a timepicker, if the first moveable component is for choosing the minutevalues, the second moveable component is for choosing the hour values.

While the movement of the first moveable component continues (e.g.,either before or after detecting the lift-off of the first scrollinput), the device detects (3410-a) a second scroll input directed tothe second moveable component of the user interface object that includesmovement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface and liftoffof the second contact from the touch-sensitive surface. This isillustrated in FIGS. 19M-19N.

In response (3410-b) to detecting the second scroll input, and while thefirst moveable component continues to move through the first pluralityof selectable options (e.g., either before or after the lift-off of thefirst contact in the first scroll input), the device moves (3410-c) thesecond moveable component through a subset of the second plurality ofselectable options of the second moveable component, including movingthe second moveable component through a first selectable option of thesecond plurality of selectable options and, as the second moveablecomponent moves through the first selectable option of the secondplurality of selectable options, the device generates (3410-d) a fourthtactile output (and generating a fourth audio output). This isillustrated in FIG. 19O, for example, where hour wheel 1948 movesthrough hour value “4”, while minute wheel 1950 continues to movethrough minute values. Device 100 generates tactile output 1938 andaudio output 1939 when hour wheel moves past hour value “4”. This isalso illustrated in FIG. 19P, for example, where hour wheel 1948 movesthrough hour value “6”, while minute wheel 1950 continues to movethrough minute values. Device 100 generates tactile output 1940 andaudio output 1941 when hour wheel moves past hour value “6”.

In some embodiments, as the tactile outputs and audio outputs for thesecond moveable component vary as the second moveable component slowsdown in the same or a similar way in which the tactile and audio outputsfor the first moveable component vary (e.g., with the amplitude of thetactile outputs and audio outputs decreasing and the audio frequencychanging while the tactile output frequency remains the same). In someembodiments, the tactile outputs for the second moveable component havetactile outputs with a tactile output pattern that is different from thetactile output pattern of the tactile outputs for the first moveablecomponent (e.g., the first moveable component uses MiniTaps and thesecond moveable component uses MicroTaps, or the first moveablecomponent uses MiniTaps and the second moveable component usesFullTaps). In some embodiments, the tactile outputs for the secondmoveable component have tactile outputs with a frequency that isdifferent from the frequency of the tactile outputs for the firstmoveable component (e.g., the first moveable component uses MiniTaps at270 Hz and the second moveable component uses MiniTaps at 150 Hz). Insome embodiments, the baseline tactile output patterns of the first andsecond moveable components are selected in accordance with respectivesizes of the first and second moveable components, and gain factors forchanging the amplitudes of the tactile outputs are selected based on thespeeds of the moveable component when crossing the selectable options.

In some embodiments, the second moveable component moves (3412) throughthe first selectable option of the second plurality of selectableoptions while the first selectable component has moved past the firstselectable option of the first plurality of selectable options and hasnot reached the second selectable option of the first plurality ofselectable options, and the fourth tactile output is generated betweenthe first and the second tactile outputs. For example, after minutewheel 1950 passes through minute value “27” in FIG. 19M (tactile output1934 and audio output 1935 are generated), hour wheel passes throughhour value “4” (tactile output 1938 and audio output 1939 aregenerated), then minute wheel passes through minute value “24” (tactileoutput 1942 and audio output 1943 are generated).

In some embodiments, the second moveable component moves (3414) throughthe first selectable option of the second plurality of selectableoptions after the lift-off of the second contact is detected.

In some embodiments, moving the second moveable component through thesubset of the second plurality of selectable options of the secondmoveable component includes moving (3416) the second moveable componentthrough a second selectable option of the second plurality of selectableoptions.

As the second movable component moves (3416-a) through the secondselectable option of the second plurality of selectable options: inaccordance with a determination that a tactile output rate limit is notreached, the device generates (3416-b) a fifth tactile output; and, inaccordance with a determination that the tactile output rate limit isreached, the device forgoes (3416-c) generation of the fifth tactileoutput.

For example, with reference to generating step 3416-b, in someembodiments, the tactile output limit is a respective tactile outputlimit that applies to the second moveable component only, and a separatetactile output limit applies to the first moveable component. In someembodiments, a single tactile output limit applies to both the first andthe second moveable components.

With reference to forgoing step 3416-c, in some embodiments, audiooutputs are still generated, even when a tactile output is skipped dueto the tactile output rate limit being reached. In some embodiments, thetactile outputs are still timed to coincide with movement of the firstand second moveable components even when tactile outputs are skipped.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same duration (e.g., 7.5 ms) (3418).

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same frequency (e.g., 270 Hz) (3420).

In some embodiments, the first audio output and the second audio outputhave different amplitudes (e.g., different gains due to differentmovement speed) (3422).

In some embodiments, there is a first delay between the first tactileoutput and the first audio output, there is a second delay between thesecond tactile output and the second audio output, and the first delayis different from the second delay (3424). E.g., a greater delay is usedfor a slower speed of the moveable component as it moves through aselectable option.

It should be understood that the particular order in which theoperations in FIGS. 34A-34D have been described is merely exemplary andis not intended to indicate that the described order is the only orderin which the operations could be performed. One of ordinary skill in theart would recognize various ways to reorder the operations describedherein. Additionally, it should be noted that details of other processesdescribed herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g.,methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, and 3200) are alsoapplicable in an analogous manner to method 3400 described above withrespect to FIGS. 34A-34D. For example, the contacts, gestures, userinterface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds, focusselectors, animations described above with reference to method 3400optionally have one or more of the characteristics of the contacts,gestures, user interface objects, tactile outputs, intensity thresholds,focus selectors, animations described herein with reference to othermethods described herein (e.g., methods 2000, 2200, 2400, 2600, 2800,3000, and 3200). For brevity, these details are not repeated here.

In accordance with some embodiments, FIG. 35 shows a functional blockdiagram of an electronic device 3500 configured in accordance with theprinciples of the various described embodiments. The functional blocksof the device are, optionally, implemented by hardware, software, or acombination of hardware and software to carry out the principles of thevarious described embodiments. It is understood by persons of skill inthe art that the functional blocks described in FIG. 35 are, optionally,combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of thevarious described embodiments. Therefore, the description hereinoptionally supports any possible combination or separation or furtherdefinition of the functional blocks described herein.

As shown in FIG. 35, an electronic device 3500 includes a display unit3502 configured to display user interfaces; a touch-sensitive surfaceunit 3504; one or more tactile output generator units 3506 configured togenerate tactile outputs; and a processing unit 3508 coupled to thedisplay unit 3502, the touch-sensitive surface unit 3504, and the one ormore tactile output generator units 3506. In some embodiments, theprocessing unit includes detecting unit 3510, moving unit 3512, anddetermining unit 3514.

The processing unit 3508 is configured to: enable display of (e.g., withthe display unit 3502) a user interface on the display unit 3502,wherein the user interface includes a user interface object thatincludes a first moveable component that represents a first plurality ofselectable options; detect (e.g., with the detecting unit 3510) a firstscroll input directed to the first moveable component of the userinterface object that includes movement of a first contact on thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3504 and liftoff of the first contact fromthe touch-sensitive surface unit 3504; in response to detecting thefirst scroll input: move (e.g., with the moving unit 3512) the firstmoveable component through a subset of the first plurality of selectableoptions of the first moveable component, including moving (e.g., withthe moving unit 3512) the first moveable component through a firstselectable option and a second selectable option of the first moveablecomponent after detecting the liftoff of the first contact from thetouch-sensitive surface unit 3504, wherein the movement of the firstmoveable component gradually slows down after the liftoff of the firstcontact is detected; as the first moveable component moves through afirst selectable option with a first speed: generate (e.g., with thetactile output generator unit(s) 3506) a first tactile output; andgenerate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s) 3506) a firstaudio output; and, as the first moveable component moves through thesecond selectable option with a second speed that is slower than thefirst speed: generate (e.g., with the tactile output generator unit(s)3506) a second tactile output that is different in a first outputproperty than the first tactile output and that is the same in a secondoutput property as the first tactile output; and generate (e.g., withthe tactile output generator unit(s) 3506) a second audio output that isdifferent in the second output property than the first audio output.

In some embodiments, moving the first moveable component through thesubset of the first plurality of selectable options of the firstmoveable component includes moving (e.g., with the moving unit 3512) thefirst moveable component through a third selectable option of the firstplurality of selectable options; and the processing unit 3508 is furtherconfigured to: as the first movable component moves through the thirdselectable option of the first plurality of selectable options: inaccordance with a determination (e.g., with the determining unit 3514)that a tactile output rate limit is not reached, generate (e.g., withthe tactile output generator unit(s) 3506) a third tactile output; andin accordance with a determination (e.g., with the determining unit3514) that the tactile output rate limit is reached, forgo generation ofthe third tactile output.

In some embodiments, the user interface object further includes a secondmoveable component that represents a second plurality of selectableoptions; and the processing unit 3508 is further configured to: whilethe movement of the first moveable component continues, detect (e.g.,with the detecting unit 3510) a second scroll input directed to thesecond moveable component of the user interface object that includesmovement of a second contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 3504and liftoff of the second contact from the touch-sensitive surface unit3504; and in response to detecting the second scroll input, and whilethe first moveable component continues to move (e.g., with the movingunit 3512) through the first plurality of selectable options: move(e.g., with the moving unit 3512) the second moveable component througha subset of the second plurality of selectable options of the secondmoveable component, including moving (e.g., with the moving unit 3512)the second moveable component through a first selectable option of thesecond plurality of selectable options; and as the second moveablecomponent moves through the first selectable option of the secondplurality of selectable options, generate (e.g., with the tactile outputgenerator unit(s) 3506) a fourth tactile output

In some embodiments, the second moveable component moves through thefirst selectable option while the first selectable component has movedpast the first selectable option and has not reached the secondselectable option, and the fourth tactile output is generated betweenthe first and the second tactile outputs.

In some embodiments, the second moveable component moves through thefirst selectable option of the second plurality of selectable optionsafter the lift-off of the second contact is detected.

In some embodiments, moving the second moveable component through thesubset of the second plurality of selectable options of the secondmoveable component includes moving the second moveable component througha second selectable option of the second plurality of selectableoptions; and the processing unit 3508 is further configured to: as thesecond movable component moves through the second selectable option ofthe second plurality of selectable options: in accordance with adetermination (e.g., with the determining unit 3514) that a tactileoutput rate limit is not reached, generate (e.g., with the tactileoutput generator unit(s) 3506) a fifth tactile output; and in accordancewith a determination (e.g., with the determining unit 3514) that thetactile output rate limit is reached, forgo generation of the fifthtactile output.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same duration.

In some embodiments, the first tactile output and the second tactileoutput have the same frequency.

In some embodiments, the first audio output and the second audio outputhave different amplitudes.

In some embodiments, there is a first delay between the first tactileoutput and the first audio output, there is a second delay between thesecond tactile output and the second audio output, and the first delayis different from the second delay.

The operations in the information processing methods described aboveare, optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules ininformation processing apparatus such as general purpose processors(e.g., as described above with respect to FIGS. 1A and 3) or applicationspecific chips.

The operations described above with reference to FIGS. 34A-34D are,optionally, implemented by components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B or FIG.35. For example, detection operation 3402 and tactile feedback operation3406 are, optionally, implemented by event sorter 170, event recognizer180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event sorter 170detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatchermodule 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. Arespective event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the eventinformation to respective event definitions 186, and determines whethera first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surfacecorresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of anobject on a user interface. When a respective predefined event orsub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates an event handler190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Eventhandler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or objectupdater 177 to update the application internal state 192. In someembodiments, event handler 190 accesses a respective GUI updater 178 toupdate what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it would beclear to a person having ordinary skill in the art how other processescan be implemented based on the components depicted in FIGS. 1A-1B.

The foregoing description, for purpose of explanation, has beendescribed with reference to specific embodiments. However, theillustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or tolimit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modificationsand variations are possible in view of the above teachings. Theembodiments were chosen and described in order to best explain theprinciples of the invention and its practical applications, to therebyenable others skilled in the art to best use the invention and variousdescribed embodiments with various modifications as are suited to theparticular use contemplated.

What is claimed is:
 1. A method, comprising: at an electronic devicewith a touch-sensitive surface, a display, one or more tactile outputgenerators for generating tactile outputs, and one or more orientationsensors for determining a current orientation of the electronic device:displaying a user interface on the display, wherein the user interfaceincludes an indicator of device orientation that indicates the currentorientation of the electronic device; detecting movement of theelectronic device; and, in response to detecting the movement of theelectronic device: in accordance with a determination that the currentorientation of the electronic device meets first criteria: changing theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; and generating a tactileoutput upon changing the user interface to indicate that the firstcriteria are met by the current orientation of the electronic device;and in accordance with a determination that the current orientation ofthe electronic device does not meet the first criteria, changing theuser interface to indicate the current orientation of the electronicdevice without generating the tactile output.
 2. The method of claim 1,wherein: the user interface includes a compass face with a plurality ofmajor markings that correspond to a plurality of major directionsrelative to a magnetic field near the electronic device, the firstcriteria require that the current device orientation matches one of theplurality of major directions in order for the first criteria to be met,the first criteria are not met when the current device orientation doesnot match one of the plurality of major directions, and changing theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device includes displaying thecurrent orientation of electronic the electronic device as one of themajor directions.
 3. The method of claim 1, including: after generatingthe tactile output in accordance with the current orientation of theelectronic device meeting the first criteria, detecting second movementof the electronic device; and, in response to detecting the secondmovement of the electronic device: in accordance with a determinationthat the current orientation of the electronic device meets the firstcriteria for a second time: changing the user interface to indicate thatthe first criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice; and generating a second tactile output upon changing the userinterface to indicate that the first criteria are met by the currentorientation of the electronic device; and in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic device doesnot meet the first criteria for the second time, changing the userinterface to indicate the current orientation of the electronic devicewithout generating the second tactile output.
 4. The method of claim 1,wherein: the user interface includes an alignment indicator thatindicates a current degree of deviation from a predetermined orientationthat is determined based on the current orientation of the electronicdevice, the first criteria require that the current degree of deviationis less than a threshold amount and remains below the threshold amountfor at least a threshold amount of time in order for the first criteriato be met, the first criteria are not met when the current degree ofdeviation does not remain below the threshold amount for at least thethreshold amount of time, and changing the user interface to indicatethat the first criteria are met by the current orientation of theelectronic device includes changing a color of the user interface. 5.The method of claim 4, wherein determining the current orientation ofthe electronic device includes: in accordance with a determination thatthe electronic device is in a first orientation state with respect to areference orientation, determining the current orientation of theelectronic device in accordance with a degree of alignment of theelectronic device with the reference orientation; and in accordance witha determination that the electronic device is in a second orientationstate with respect to the reference orientation, determining the currentorientation of the electronic device in accordance with a degree ofalignment of the electronic device with Earth's gravitational field. 6.The method of claim 1, wherein the first criteria require that a ratefor generating tactile outputs in accordance with the currentorientation of the electronic device does not exceed a predeterminedrate limit in order for the first criteria to be met.
 7. The method ofclaim 1, wherein the first criteria require that only one tactile outputis generated while the current orientation of the electronic device ismaintained.
 8. An electronic device, comprising: a display; atouch-sensitive surface; one or more tactile output generators forgenerating tactile outputs; one or more orientation sensors fordetermining a current orientation of the electronic device; one or moreprocessors; memory; and one or more programs, wherein the one or moreprograms are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by theone or more processors, the one or more programs including instructionsfor: displaying a user interface on the display, wherein the userinterface includes an indicator of device orientation that indicates thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; detecting movement of theelectronic device; and, in response to detecting the movement of theelectronic device: in accordance with a determination that the currentorientation of the electronic device meets first criteria: changing theuser interface to indicate that the first criteria are met by thecurrent orientation of the electronic device; and generating a tactileoutput upon changing the user interface to indicate that the firstcriteria are met by the current orientation of the electronic device;and in accordance with a determination that the current orientation ofthe electronic device does not meet the first criteria, changing theuser interface to indicate the current orientation of the electronicdevice without generating the tactile output.
 9. The electronic deviceof claim 8, wherein: the user interface includes a compass face with aplurality of major markings that correspond to a plurality of majordirections relative to a magnetic field near the electronic device, thefirst criteria require that the current device orientation matches oneof the plurality of major directions in order for the first criteria tobe met, the first criteria are not met when the current deviceorientation does not match one of the plurality of major directions, andchanging the user interface to indicate that the first criteria are metby the current orientation of the electronic device includes displayingthe current orientation of electronic the electronic device as one ofthe major directions.
 10. The electronic device of claim 8, wherein theone or more programs include instruction for: after generating thetactile output in accordance with the current orientation of theelectronic device meeting the first criteria, detecting second movementof the electronic device; and, in response to detecting the secondmovement of the electronic device: in accordance with a determinationthat the current orientation of the electronic device meets the firstcriteria for a second time: changing the user interface to indicate thatthe first criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice; and generating a second tactile output upon changing the userinterface to indicate that the first criteria are met by the currentorientation of the electronic device; and in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic device doesnot meet the first criteria for the second time, changing the userinterface to indicate the current orientation of the electronic devicewithout generating the second tactile output.
 11. The electronic deviceof claim 8, wherein: the user interface includes an alignment indicatorthat indicates a current degree of deviation from a predeterminedorientation that is determined based on the current orientation of theelectronic device, the first criteria require that the current degree ofdeviation is less than a threshold amount and remains below thethreshold amount for at least a threshold amount of time in order forthe first criteria to be met, the first criteria are not met when thecurrent degree of deviation does not remain below the threshold amountfor at least the threshold amount of time, and changing the userinterface to indicate that the first criteria are met by the currentorientation of the electronic device includes changing a color of theuser interface.
 12. The electronic device of claim 11, whereindetermining the current orientation of the electronic device includes:in accordance with a determination that the electronic device is in afirst orientation state with respect to a reference orientation,determining the current orientation of the electronic device inaccordance with a degree of alignment of the electronic device with thereference orientation; and in accordance with a determination that theelectronic device is in a second orientation state with respect to thereference orientation, determining the current orientation of theelectronic device in accordance with a degree of alignment of theelectronic device with Earth's gravitational field.
 13. The electronicdevice of claim 8, wherein the first criteria require that a rate forgenerating tactile outputs in accordance with the current orientation ofthe electronic device does not exceed a predetermined rate limit inorder for the first criteria to be met.
 14. The electronic device ofclaim 8, wherein the first criteria require that only one tactile outputis generated while the current orientation of the electronic device ismaintained.
 15. A non-transitory computer readable storage mediumstoring one or more programs, the one or more programs comprisinginstructions that, when executed by an electronic device with a display,a touch-sensitive surface, one or more tactile output generators forgenerating tactile outputs, and one or more orientation sensors fordetermining a current orientation of the electronic device, cause theelectronic device to: display a user interface on the display, whereinthe user interface includes an indicator of device orientation thatindicates the current orientation of the electronic device; detectmovement of the electronic device; and, in response to detecting themovement of the electronic device: in accordance with a determinationthat the current orientation of the electronic device meets firstcriteria: change the user interface to indicate that the first criteriaare met by the current orientation of the electronic device; andgenerate a tactile output upon changing the user interface to indicatethat the first criteria are met by the current orientation of theelectronic device; and in accordance with a determination that thecurrent orientation of the electronic device does not meet the firstcriteria, change the user interface to indicate the current orientationof the electronic device without generating the tactile output.
 16. Thenon-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein:the user interface includes a compass face with a plurality of majormarkings that correspond to a plurality of major directions relative toa magnetic field near the electronic device, the first criteria requirethat the current device orientation matches one of the plurality ofmajor directions in order for the first criteria to be met, the firstcriteria are not met when the current device orientation does not matchone of the plurality of major directions, and changing the userinterface to indicate that the first criteria are met by the currentorientation of the electronic device includes displaying the currentorientation of electronic the electronic device as one of the majordirections.
 17. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium ofclaim 15, wherein the one or more programs include instruction that,when executed by the electronic device, cause the electronic device to:after generating the tactile output in accordance with the currentorientation of the electronic device meeting the first criteria, detectsecond movement of the electronic device; and, in response to detectingthe second movement of the electronic device: in accordance with adetermination that the current orientation of the electronic devicemeets the first criteria for a second time: change the user interface toindicate that the first criteria are met by the current orientation ofthe electronic device; and generate a second tactile output uponchanging the user interface to indicate that the first criteria are metby the current orientation of the electronic device; and in accordancewith a determination that the current orientation of the electronicdevice does not meet the first criteria for the second time, change theuser interface to indicate the current orientation of the electronicdevice without generating the second tactile output.
 18. Thenon-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein:the user interface includes an alignment indicator that indicates acurrent degree of deviation from a predetermined orientation that isdetermined based on the current orientation of the electronic device,the first criteria require that the current degree of deviation is lessthan a threshold amount and remains below the threshold amount for atleast a threshold amount of time in order for the first criteria to bemet, the first criteria are not met when the current degree of deviationdoes not remain below the threshold amount for at least the thresholdamount of time, and changing the user interface to indicate that thefirst criteria are met by the current orientation of the electronicdevice includes changing a color of the user interface.
 19. Thenon-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 18, whereindetermining the current orientation of the electronic device includes:in accordance with a determination that the electronic device is in afirst orientation state with respect to a reference orientation,determining the current orientation of the electronic device inaccordance with a degree of alignment of the electronic device with thereference orientation; and in accordance with a determination that theelectronic device is in a second orientation state with respect to thereference orientation, determining the current orientation of theelectronic device in accordance with a degree of alignment of theelectronic device with Earth's gravitational field.
 20. Thenon-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim 15, wherein thefirst criteria require that a rate for generating tactile outputs inaccordance with the current orientation of the electronic device doesnot exceed a predetermined rate limit in order for the first criteria tobe met.
 21. The non-transitory computer readable storage medium of claim15, wherein the first criteria require that only one tactile output isgenerated while the current orientation of the electronic device ismaintained.